NEC NEAX 2000 Programming Manual Download

Page: 409 / 1200

PRIVACY RELEASE-D

term

– 389 –

A2382-10

PRIVACY RELEASE-D

term

PROGRAMMING

HARDWARE REQUIRED

term

and DLC card

DESCRIPTION

DATA

Assign the Service Restriction Class B for
Privacy Release to required stations.

•

(1)
(2)

Y=02
X-XXXXXXXX: Station No.
XX ZZ
ZZ: 00-15 : Service Restriction Class

Allow Privacy Release in the Service Re-
striction Class B assigned by CM12 Y=02.

•

(1)

(2)

Y=63
00-15: Service Restriction Class B as-

signed by CM12 Y=02

1 : Allow

CM15

START

END

CM12

Summary of Contents for NEAX 2000

Page 1: ...ND 70916 E ISSUE 1 Feature Programming Manual JANUARY 2000 NEC Corporation ...

Page 2: ...EC Corporation has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers The information contained herein is the property of NEC Corporation and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval from NEC Corporation NEAX and Dterm are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation Copyright 2000 NEC Corporation Printed in Japan ...

Page 3: ...o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 i 1 ii 1 iii 1 iv 1 v 1 vi 1 vii 1 viii 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 1 15 1 16 1 17 1 18 1 19 1 20 1 21 1 22 1 23 1 24 1 25 1 26 1 27 1 28 1 29 1 30 1 31 1 32 1 33 1 34 1 35 1 36 1 37 1 38 1 39 1 40 1 41 1 42 1 43 1 44 1 45 1 46 1 47 1 48 1 49 1 50 1 51 1 52 1 53 1 54 1 55 1 56 1 57 1 58 1 59 1 60 1 61 1 62 1 63 1 64 1 65 1 66 1 67 1 68 1 PAGE No I...

Page 4: ...7 1 78 1 79 1 80 1 81 1 82 1 83 1 84 1 85 1 86 1 87 1 88 1 89 1 90 1 91 1 92 1 93 1 94 1 95 1 96 1 97 1 98 1 99 1 100 1 101 1 102 1 103 1 104 1 105 1 106 1 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 107 1 108 1 109 1 110 1 111 1 112 1 113 1 114 1 115 1 116 1 117 1 118 1 119 1 120 1 121 1 122 1 123 1 124 1 125 1 126 1 127 1 128 1 129 1 130 1 131 1 132 1 133 1 134 1 135 1 136 1 137 1 138 1 139 1 140 1 141 1 1...

Page 5: ... 1 155 1 156 1 157 1 158 1 159 1 160 1 161 1 162 1 163 1 164 1 165 1 166 1 167 1 168 1 169 1 170 1 171 1 172 1 173 1 174 1 175 1 176 1 177 1 178 1 179 1 180 1 181 1 182 1 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 183 1 184 1 185 1 186 1 187 1 188 1 189 1 190 1 191 1 192 1 193 1 194 1 195 1 196 1 197 1 198 1 199 1 200 1 201 1 202 1 203 1 204 1 205 1 206 1 207 1 208 1 209 1 210 1 211 1 212 1 213 1 214 1 215 ...

Page 6: ... 1 231 1 232 1 233 1 234 1 235 1 236 1 237 1 238 1 239 1 240 1 241 1 242 1 243 1 244 1 245 1 246 1 247 1 248 1 249 1 250 1 251 1 252 1 253 1 254 1 255 1 256 1 257 1 258 1 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 259 1 260 1 261 1 262 1 263 1 264 1 265 1 266 1 267 1 268 1 269 1 270 1 271 1 272 1 273 1 274 1 275 1 276 1 277 1 278 1 279 1 280 1 281 1 282 1 283 1 284 1 285 1 286 1 287 1 288 1 289 1 290 1 291 ...

Page 7: ... 1 307 1 308 1 309 1 310 1 311 1 312 1 313 1 314 1 315 1 316 1 317 1 318 1 319 1 320 1 321 1 322 1 323 1 324 1 325 1 326 1 327 1 328 1 329 1 330 1 331 1 332 1 333 1 334 1 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 335 1 336 1 337 1 338 1 339 1 340 1 341 1 342 1 343 1 344 1 345 1 346 1 347 1 348 1 349 1 350 1 351 1 352 1 353 1 354 1 355 1 356 1 357 1 358 1 359 1 360 1 361 1 362 1 363 1 364 1 365 1 366 1 367 ...

Page 8: ... 1 383 1 384 1 385 1 386 1 387 1 388 1 389 1 390 1 391 1 392 1 393 1 394 1 395 1 396 1 397 1 398 1 399 1 400 1 401 1 402 1 403 1 404 1 405 1 406 1 407 1 408 1 409 1 410 1 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 411 1 412 1 413 1 414 1 415 1 416 1 417 1 418 1 419 1 420 1 421 1 422 1 423 1 424 1 425 1 426 1 427 1 428 1 429 1 430 1 431 1 432 1 433 1 434 1 435 1 436 1 437 1 438 1 439 1 440 1 441 1 442 1 443 ...

Page 9: ... 1 459 1 460 1 461 1 462 1 463 1 464 1 465 1 466 1 467 1 468 1 469 1 470 1 471 1 472 1 473 1 474 1 475 1 476 1 477 1 478 1 479 1 480 1 481 1 482 1 483 1 484 1 485 1 486 1 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 487 1 488 1 489 1 490 1 491 1 492 1 493 1 494 1 495 1 496 1 497 1 498 1 499 1 500 1 501 1 502 1 503 1 504 1 505 1 506 1 507 1 508 1 509 1 510 1 511 1 512 1 513 1 514 1 515 1 516 1 517 1 518 1 519 ...

Page 10: ... 1 535 1 536 1 537 1 538 1 539 1 540 1 541 1 542 1 543 1 544 1 545 1 546 1 547 1 548 1 549 1 550 1 551 1 552 1 553 1 554 1 555 1 556 1 557 1 558 1 559 1 560 1 561 1 562 1 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 563 1 564 1 565 1 566 1 567 1 568 1 569 1 570 1 571 1 572 1 573 1 574 1 575 1 576 1 577 1 578 1 579 1 580 1 581 1 582 1 583 1 584 1 585 1 586 1 587 1 588 1 589 1 590 1 591 1 592 1 593 1 594 1 595 ...

Page 11: ... 1 611 1 612 1 613 1 614 1 615 1 616 1 617 1 618 1 619 1 620 1 621 1 622 1 623 1 624 1 625 1 626 1 627 1 628 1 629 1 630 1 631 1 632 1 633 1 634 1 635 1 636 1 637 1 638 1 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 639 1 640 1 641 1 642 1 643 1 644 1 645 1 646 1 647 1 648 1 649 1 650 1 651 1 652 1 653 1 654 1 655 1 656 1 657 1 658 1 659 1 660 1 661 1 662 1 663 1 664 1 665 1 666 1 667 1 668 1 669 1 670 1 671 ...

Page 12: ...16 E 677 1 678 1 679 1 680 1 681 1 682 1 683 1 684 1 685 1 686 1 687 1 688 1 689 1 690 1 A1 1 A2 1 A3 1 A4 1 A5 1 A6 1 A7 1 A8 1 A9 1 A10 1 A11 1 A12 1 A13 1 A14 1 A15 1 A16 1 B1 1 B2 1 C1 1 C2 1 C3 1 C4 1 C5 1 C6 1 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 C7 1 C8 1 C9 1 C10 1 C11 1 C12 1 C13 1 C14 1 C15 1 C16 1 C17 1 C18 1 C19 1 C20 1 C21 1 C22 1 C23 1 C24 1 C25 1 C26 1 D1 1 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 ...

Page 13: ... LOOP RELEASE 37 ATTENDANT NIGHT TRANSFER 38 ATTENDANT OVERRIDE 39 ATTENDANT SPEED CALLING SYSTEM SET UP 41 ATTENDANT TERMINAL Dterm 42 AUTHORIZATION CODE 49 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT 56 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION ACD MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM MIS 61 AUTOMATIC CAMP ON 62 AUTOMATIC CHANGE OF NIGHT SERVICE 63 AUTOMATIC HOLD Dterm 64 AUTOMATIC IDLE RETURN Dterm 65 AUTOMATIC INTERCOM Dterm 66 AUTOMATIC...

Page 14: ...95 CALL HOLD Dterm 95 CALL INDICATOR LAMP Dterm 96 CALL INFORMATION SYSTEM CIS 97 CALL PARK Dterm 131 CALL PARK SYSTEM 132 CALL PARK TENANT 133 CALL PICKUP DESIGNATED GROUP 134 CALL PICKUP DIRECT 135 CALL PICKUP GROUP 136 CALL PICKUP GROUP Dterm 136 CALL QUEUING 137 CALL REDIRECT 138 CALL TRANSFER ALL CALLS 139 CALL TRANSFER ALL CALLS Dterm 139 CALL TRANSFER ATTENDANT 140 CALL WAITING ANSWER Dterm...

Page 15: ...m 247 DYNAMIC DIAL PAD Dterm 248 EXCLUSIVE HOLD Dterm 249 EXECUTIVE CALLING 250 EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY 251 EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY Dterm 251 FAULT MESSAGE 253 FAX ARRIVAL INDICATOR Dterm 254 FLASH OVER TRUNK 258 FLASH OVER TRUNK Dterm 258 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING OF STATIONS 259 FLEXIBLE RINGING ASSIGNMENT Dterm 260 FORCED ACCOUNT CODE 262 GROUP DIVERSION 267 GROUP LISTENING Dterm 268 HANDS FREE ANSWER B...

Page 16: ... STATION 334 MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESS 337 MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK RESTRICTION 338 MULTI FUNCTION KEY ATTENDANT 339 MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS 340 MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE 341 MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER 342 MULTIPLE CONSOLE OPERATION 343 MULTIPLE LINE OPERATION Dterm 344 MULTIPLE TRUNK OPERATION Dterm 345 MUSIC ON HOLD 346 MUTE KEY Dterm 354 NAILED DOWN CONNECTION 355 NAM...

Page 17: ...rm 418 ROTARY DIAL CALLING 419 ROUTE ADVANCE 420 SAVE AND REPEAT Dterm 421 SECURITY ALARM 422 SELF DIAGNOSIS 423 SERIAL CALL 424 SET RELOCATION 425 SINGLE DIGIT FEATURE ACCESS CODE 426 SINGLE DIGIT FEATURE CODE 428 SINGLE DIGIT STATION CALLING WITH TIMING 429 SINGLE DIGIT STATION CALLING W O TIMING 431 SMART CONSOLE SN708 SN709 SN712 ATTCON 432 SMART CONSOLE SN716 DESKCON 434 SOFTWARE LINE APPEARA...

Page 18: ...term 515 TIMED REMINDER 516 TOLL DENIAL TOLL DIVERSION 523 TOLL RESTRICTION TOTAL DIGIT COUNT 524 TOLL RESTRICTION 3 6 DIGIT 527 TRUNK ANSWER FROM ANY STATION TAS 532 TRUNK GROUP BUSY DISPLAY 536 TRUNK LINE APPEARANCE Dterm 537 TRUNK TO TRUNK CONNECTION 540 TRUNK TO TRUNK TRANSFER BEFORE ANSWER BY ATTENDANT CONSOLE 544 TRUNK TO TRUNK THIRD PARTY CANCELLATION 545 UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION UCD 546 U...

Page 19: ... SYSTEM 660 GUEST NAME DISPLAY THROUGH PMS 662 GUEST ROOM TO GUEST ROOM CALLING RESTRICTION 664 GUEST ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICE 665 HOTEL CONSOLE 668 HOTEL MOTEL FRONT DESK TERMINAL 669 MAID STATUS 673 MESSAGE REGISTRATION 676 MESSAGE WAITING 679 PMS INTERFACE 682 PRINTER CONTROL FRONT DESK TERMINAL 686 ROOM CUT OFF 688 ROOM NUMBER DISPLAY ON STATION 690 ROOM STATUS 690 SPLIT ACCESS 690 APPENDIX A TE...

Page 20: ...oup Billing C5 Billing Data Accumulation C14 Audit Print and Interim Print C17 AP Memory Management C20 TIMS Optional Prints C23 APPENDIX D FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS D1 BUSSINESS FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS HOSPITALITY FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS FEATURES FOR AUSTRALIA ONLY FEATURES AND SPESIFICATIONS FEATURES FOR OTHER COUNTRIES ONLY FEATURES AND SPESIFICATIONS ...

Page 21: ...ns the following information related to the Hotel System and Property Man agement System PMS System configuration for the Hotel System and the Property Management System PMS Hardware requirement Programming procedure of the Hotel features Programming procedure of the Property Management System interface APPENDIX A TERMINAL KEY ASSIGNMENT This appendix contains the key number layout of each Dterm A...

Page 22: ...or programming the system and Resident System Program AD 8 System Manual describes the hardware installation procedure and programming procedure for AD 8 System CCIS System Manual describes the system description hardware installation procedure programming procedure and operation test procedure for CCIS System Data Interface System Manual describes the system description hardware installation proc...

Page 23: ...PIM System Manual describes the system description hardware installation procedure and troubleshooting proce dure for Remote PIM System VoIP System Manual describes the system description hardware installation procedure programming procedure for VoIP System WCS System Manual describes the system description hardware installation procedure programming procedure for WCS System ...

Page 24: ...ter data setting Press SW1 switch on the MP card A reset of the AP00 card is required after data setting Set the Make Busy switch to UP and then DOWN A reset of the DTI card is required after data setting Set the Make Busy switch to UP and then DOWN Command with this marking can be used only under Off Line mode of the MP card Command with this marking can be used only under Off Line mode of the AP...

Page 25: ...AD THIS MANUAL 5 A2001 10 For Call Information System CIS and Station Message Detail Recording SMDR the following sections explain the system for further details SYSTEM OUTLINE SYSTEM CAPACITY PROGRAMMING SUMMARY PRECAUTION ...

Page 26: ...and appropriate nation code to the user should be assigned by CM31 Y 0 as shown below Users in Australia Users in New Zealand NOTE 1 System reset is required after changing the command data NOTE 2 Initial data of CM31 Y 0 0 depends on each nation code of the MP program as follows For North America 03 For Australia New Zealand 01 For Other Countries 04 310 0 01 EXE ST DE DE 310 0 15 EXE ST DE DE ...

Page 27: ...edure and hardware re quirements Explanations are given in alphabetical order of the feature names ex cept the features on the next page which require no programming BUSINESS FEATURES 7 FEATURES FOR AUSTRALIA ONLY 586 FEATURES FOR OTHER COUNTRIES ONLY 594 CHAPTER 1 BUSINESS FEATURES ...

Page 28: ... Delay Operation Dial Monitor Dterm Digital Display Station Digital Display Trunk Elapsed Time Display Dterm Feature Activation from Subline Dterm Hands Free Dialling Monitoring Dterm I Hold Indication Dterm I Use Indication Dterm Intermediate Station Number Display Dterm Lamp Check Line Re connect Other Line Dterm Line Re connect Same Line Dterm Microphone Control Dterm Non Delay Operation Non Ex...

Page 29: ...striction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 30 00 15 Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Specify the maximum number of digits for Account Codes NOTE If the SMDR message format 2400 IMS Format is assigned the maximum number of digits is 10 1 2 10 01 16 Max number of digits If no data is entered the default is 10 Assign an access code for Account Code entry 1 2 Y 0 3 Numberin...

Page 30: ...ACCOUNT CODE ACCOUNT CODE ATTENDANT ACCOUNT CODE Dterm 10 A2008 10 HARDWARE REQUIRED SMDR AP00 card and cables Dterm and DLC card if required ...

Page 31: ... Metering In addition to the DTI assignment 30 DTI in the Direct Digital Interface DDI do the following programming DESCRIPTION DATA Specify the application of answer signal from the distant office for outgoing con nection 1 2 Y 04 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 Answer Signal arrives 12 KHz 50 Hz Metering Signal C O line 1 2 Y 42 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 Metering DESCRIPTION DATA Assign the data so as to de...

Page 32: ...5 32 ms 480 ms 32 ms increments If no data is set the default setting is 128 ms Assign the Process for detection of Meter ing Signal 1 2 Y 3 14 00 Process 1 for Australia 01 Process 2 for Argentina Initial Data NONE Process 1 Assign the Metering Signal Detect Timing on the DTI trunks 1 2 Y 3 15 01 15 32 ms 320 ms 32 ms increments If no data is set the default setting is 160 ms END CM41 A ...

Page 33: ...GRAMMING In addition to the programming of THREE WAY CALLING page 506 do the following pro gramming DESCRIPTION DATA Provide the system with four party confer ence 1 2 246 1 Four Party Conference NOTE This feature can only be activat ed from a Dterm START END CM08 ...

Page 34: ...ch is associated with the Add On Module NOTE The Dterm and the Add On Mod ule must be in the same PIM 1 2 Y 0 00 31 Last two digits of Add On Mod ule No EC00 EC31 X XXXXXXXX My Line No Assign the Service Restriction Class for the accommodation of Single Line Tele phone to Dterm Assignment for Single Line Telephone only 1 2 Y 05 X XXXXXXXX Station No 0 Accommodated Assign the station and trunk numb...

Page 35: ...e Speed Calling Station to the keys on each Add On Module if required For details refer to SPEED CALLING STATION page 446 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Add On Module Key No 30 89 F11XX XX 00 99 Speed Calling Station 00 99 Specify the tone ringer enabled on call ter mination for Day Mode to each line trunk key on each Add On Module if required 1 2 Y 01 My Line No Add On Module Key No 30 54 0 Disabled 1 Enabl...

Page 36: ...m and DLC card DESCRIPTION DATA Specify the Delayed Ringing timing 1 2 Y 1 09 01 10 2 sec 20 sec 2 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 10 sec Provide Trunk Line Appearances to the trunk number 1 2 Y 18 000 255 Trunk No 0 To provide CM30 END CM41 B ...

Page 37: ... Key No F0044 UCD Busy Out Specify the connection when a UCD sta tion dials UCD Busy Out code after hold ing the call from C O or Tie Line 1 2 214 For Tie Line Call 215 For C O Line Call 0 Service Set Tone and return to the call by Switch Hook Flash 1 The call is disconnected Enable the Agent Busy Out set and reset from the Sub Line 1 2 442 0 Available 1 Not available DESCRIPTION DATA Provide the ...

Page 38: ...he Analog Port Adapter to the re quired stations 1 2 Y 32 X XXXXXXXX My Line No 0 To connect Assign the Single Port Mode to the required stations 1 2 Y 33 X XXXXXXXX My Line No 1 Single Port Mode Specify whether a ringing signal is sent to the analog terminal 1 2 Y 35 X XXXXXXXX My Line No 0 Not sent 1 To send START CM13 END INITIAL ...

Page 39: ...connect Assign the Dual Port Mode to the required stations 1 2 Y 33 X XXXXXXXX My Line No 0 Dual Port Mode DESCRIPTION DATA Assign an analog terminal station number to the required LEN 1 2 000 763 LEN FX FXXXXXXXX Analog Terminal Station No NOTE The analog terminal station number must be assigned to the following LEN Analog Terminal LEN Dterm LEN 8 For example when the DLC card is mounted on LT01 ...

Page 40: ... as Prime Line 1 2 X XXXXXXXX Analog Terminal Sta tion No X XXXXXXXX Analog Terminal Sta tion No Provide the Analog Port Adapter to the re quired station 1 2 Y 34 X XXXXXXXX Analog Terminal Sta tion No 0 To connect Specify whether a ringing signal is sent to the analog terminal 1 2 Y 35 X XXXXXXXX My Line No 0 Not sent 1 To send Specify the PAD control of the analog ter minal 1 2 Y 09 X XXXXXXXX A...

Page 41: ...ital AnnouncementTrunk card number must be assigned to the first LEN Level 0 the third LEN Level 2 the fifth LEN Level 4 and the seventh LEN Level 6 of each LT slot 1 2 000 763 LEN EB002 EB127 Digital Announcement Trunk Card No For PIM0 1 EB002 EB031 For PIM2 3 EB032 EB063 For PIM4 5 EB064 EB095 For PIM6 7 EB096 EB127 NOTE EB000 and EB001 are dedi cated to built in Digital An nouncement Trunk of t...

Page 42: ...e Group 4 Replay Y 39 Announcement Service Group 0 4 Record 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign access codes for Announcement Service 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A103 Announcement Service Group 0 4 Record A104 Announcement Service Group 0 Replay A105 Announcement Service Group 1 Replay A106 Announcement Service Group 2 Replay A107 Annou...

Page 43: ...duration of re play for an announcement is programmable from 4 to 396 seconds DESCRIPTION DATA When Multiple Connections is provided CM08 124 0 specify the duration of message replay for the Announcement Service 1 2 Y 0 53 01 99 4 sec 396 sec 4 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 60 64 sec Assign the function for each Digital An nouncement Trunk card 1 2 Y 00 000 001 Built in D...

Page 44: ...EB001 are dedi cated to built in Digital An nouncement Trunk of the MP card Assign the Service Restriction Class A for Digital Announcement Trunk Access Record Replay Delete 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX Station No XX ZZ XX 00 15 Service Restriction Class A Allow Digital Announcement Trunk Access in the Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 33 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as signed b...

Page 45: ...nding on traffic conditions System programming can be set to wait until circuit s become free or immediately follow preprogrammed normal call handling if a busy condition is encountered Digital Announcement Trunk Circuits can be shared among tenants This feature does not function on Attendant transferred calls DESCRIPTION DATA Assign the function for each Digital An nouncement Trunk card 1 2 Y 00 ...

Page 46: ...PIM2 3 EB032 EB063 For PIM4 5 EB064 EB095 For PIM6 7 EB096 EB127 NOTE EB000 and EB001 are dedi cated to built in Digital An nouncement Trunk of the MP card Assign the Service Restriction Class A for Digital Announcement Trunk Access Record Replay Delete 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX Station No XX ZZ XX 00 15 Service Restriction Class A Allow Digital Announcement Trunk Access in the Service Restriction Class...

Page 47: ...he Digital An nouncement Trunk card 1 2 Y 00 000 001 Built in DAT on MP card 002 127 Digital Announcement Trunk Card No EB002 EB127 as signed by CM10 0D00 No Answer 0E00 Busy Assign the Digital AnnouncementTrunk as the destination of the DID call on each ten ant Assign the Digital AnnouncementTrunk as the destination of the Tie Line call on each tenant 1 2 1 2 Y 00 No Answer Y 03 Busy 00 63 Tenant...

Page 48: ...E EB000 and EB001 are dedi cated to built in Digital An nouncement Trunk of the MP card Define the type of call to be provided with Hold Message 1 2 Y 0 00 C O Line Call 01 Tie Line Call 02 Internal Call 0500 Hold Message Assign the function of the Digital An nouncement Trunk to Hold Message Ser vice 1 2 1 2 Y 00 000 001 Built in DAT on MP card 002 127 Digital Announcement Trunk Card No EB002 EB12...

Page 49: ...e programmed on a tenant basis Different messages can be programmed depending on the type of line C O line Tie line or station on Hold More than one connection can be made to a Digital Announcement Trunk Card Only the first connection can be assured of hearing the message from the beginning Announcement will be repeated until the call is removed from hold ...

Page 50: ...P card Assign the Digital Announcement Trunk number to each incoming trunk 1 2 1 2 Y 03 000 255 Trunk No 04 Direct In Termination Y 05 000 255 Trunk No EB000 EB127 Digital Announcement Trunk No assigned by CM10 Assign the function of the Digital An nouncement Trunk to Night Announce ment 1 2 Y 00 000 001 Built in DAT on MP card 002 127 Digital Announcement Trunk Card No EB002 EB127 as signed by CM...

Page 51: ...line The voice message can be programmed for Day Night More than one connection can be made to a Digital Announcement Trunk Card Only the first connection can be assured of hearing the message from the beginning Announcements may be programmed to be repeated from 4 to 120 seconds in four second increments HARDWARE REQUIRED DAT card or MP card built in DAT ...

Page 52: ...amp on Tone is sent out only once 1 Camp on Tone is repeated at an interval of 4 sec Specify the recall timing of Camp On 1 2 Y 0 00 01 14 2 4 sec 33 6 sec 2 4 sec increments 15 24 38 4 sec 124 8 sec 9 6 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 31 2 33 6 sec DESCRIPTION DATA Assign the access code for Call Pickup Direct 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A021 Call...

Page 53: ...ion number and name on an Attendant Console when reentering a Camped On trunk by pressing the loop key DESCRIPTION DATA Provide the Attendant Console with the busy station number name display when reentering a Camped On trunk 1 2 441 0 Available 1 Not available START CM08 END ...

Page 54: ...ant Console Lockout for an ATTCON if required 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A155 Specify the buzzer sound when terminat ing an incoming call to the ATTCON in At tendant Console Lockout 1 2 353 0 Not provided 1 To provide Assign the password code for Attendant Console Lockout 1 2 Y 30 0 XX XX Password Code Max 8 digits X 0 9 A B If no data is set the default setting is NONE ...

Page 55: ...001 are dedi cated to built in Digital An nouncement Trunk of the MP card Allow the Announcement Service via Digi tal Announcement Trunk on Attendant De lay Announcement 1 2 Y 74 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 Allow Assign the function of the Digital An nouncement Trunk card 1 2 Y 00 000 001 Built in DAT on MP card 002 127 Digital Announcement Trunk Card No EB002 EB127 as signed by CM10 0FXX Attendant Del...

Page 56: ...ctively 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A100 Record A101 Replay A102 Delete Specify the unanswered timing of mes sage replay 1 2 Y 0 16 01 30 4 sec 120 sec 4 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 32 36 sec Specify the interval time of message re play 1 2 Y 0 47 01 30 4 sec 120 sec 4 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 32 36 sec CM41 END C...

Page 57: ...rom a loop before being recalled DESCRIPTION DATA Provide the system with the Attendant Loop Release 1 2 014 Attendant Loop Release 0 Available DESCRIPTION DATA Assign the access code for Call Pickup Di rect 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A021 Call Pickup Direct START END CM08 START END CM20 ...

Page 58: ...GRAMMING DESCRIPTION DATA Provide the system with Attendant Night Transfer 1 2 018 Attendant Night Transfer 1 To provide Assign the Night station to each ATTCON Group 1 2 Y 13 00 03 ATTCON Group 0 3 assigned by CM60 Y 00 X XXXXXXX Night station No START END CM08 CM51 ...

Page 59: ...es 1 2 045 0 Only once 1 Every 4 sec Specify whether the Warning Tone is sent to the outside party 1 2 076 0 To send 1 Not sent Assign Service Restriction Class A to each station 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX Station No XX ZZ XX 00 15 Service Restriction Class A Allow Attendant Override called side in the Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 09 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as signed ...

Page 60: ...ent System Program Trunk Identification Codes are assigned as follows 1XXX XXX 000 255 Trunk number 1 2 Y 19 000 255 Trunk No XXXX Trunk ID Code Assign the Busy Verification key to ATTCON DESKCON NOTE By Resident System Program one of the Multi Function keys is assigned as a Busy Verification key when receiving Busy Tone 1 2 Y 00 ATTCON No E000 E007 Key No F6107 Busy Verification END CM30 CM90 A ...

Page 61: ...gits X 0 9 A B If no data is set the default setting is NONE In this case the password is set to 12345678 Assign the programming key for providing Attendant Programming on ATTCON DESKCON 1 2 Y 00 ATTCON No E000 E007 Key No F6111 Assign the access code for providing At tendant Programming for ATTCON DESKCON if required 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A156 CM90 CM20 START END C...

Page 62: ... Y 02 X XXXXXXXX My Line No XX ZZ ZZ 00 15 Service Restriction Class B Allow the Attendant Terminal in the Ser vice Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 71 00 15 Service Restriction Class B as signed by CM12 Y 02 0 Attendant Terminal Assign the required number of Loop ICI Incoming Call Identification and OPR Operator Call lines to the Virtual LEN 1 2 000 255 Virtual LEN AA X Y Loop Line...

Page 63: ...ss B assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 73 00 15 Service Restriction Class B as signed by CM12 Y 02 0 ICI OPE key Assign a Hot Line station to each ICI OPR line number With this assignment each ICI OPR line is restricted from call origination 1 2 Y 03 AB00 AB99 ICI OPR No 04 Hot Line Assign a UCD station to each ICI OPR line number With this assignment ICI OPR lines are provided the call queuing facility...

Page 64: ... Available Assign the Service Restriction Class B for Day Night Mode Change by station dialing to Attendant Terminal 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX My Line No XX ZZ ZZ 00 15 Service Restriction Class B Allow Day Night Mode Change by station dialing in the Service Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 60 00 15 Service Restriction Class B as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign the Loop keys to each Dt...

Page 65: ...M6 7 E124 E131 Assign the My Line number of the Atten dant Terminal associated with each DSS Console 1 2 00 31 DSS Console No assigned by CM10 E100 E131 X XXXXXXXX My Line No of Atten dant Terminal Assign station numbers to the DSS keys Assign the MW DND NT keys as function keys For DSS key 1 2 DSS Console No 00 31 DSS key No 00 59 X XXXXXXXX Station No For Function key 1 2 DSS Console No 00 31 DS...

Page 66: ...Call from Stations OPR Line No AB10 OVR Key Executive Right of Way NT Key Night Key 4 Number of Loop 5 Loop Line No AA01 AA05 5 Tenant No 00 6 Numbering Plan Group 0 7 Dterm Type DTP 16D 1 Speaker L1 Feature Hold Transfer Answer Redial Conf Recall L4 L3 L2 L5 NT OVR DDD TIE 200 OPR RLS L1 L5 Loop Keys DDD TIE RLS Release Key OPR Operator Call Key 200 My Line Key OVR Executive Right of Way Key NT N...

Page 67: ...1 1202 AB20 1501 Service Class for ICI Line 1202 AB21 1501 1203 AA01 08 1203 AA02 08 1203 AA03 08 Service Class for Loop Line 1203 AA04 08 1203 AA05 08 1203 AB10 04 1203 AB20 04 1203 AB21 04 1203 200 15 1571 00 0 Attendant Position Class 1573 01 0 ICI OPR Key Class 171 AB10 1 171 AB20 1 171 AB21 1 172 AB10 00 172 AB20 01 172 AB21 02 200 0 A088 Operator Access Code ICI Line Number Assign UCD Pilot ...

Page 68: ...4 003 AB20 3004 004 AB20 9000 200 01 AA01 9000 200 02 AA02 9000 200 03 AA03 LOOP Key 9000 200 04 AA04 9000 200 05 AA05 9000 200 07 F0006 OVR Key 9000 200 08 F0043 NT Key 9000 200 09 AB20 DDD Key 9000 200 13 AB24 TIE Key 9000 200 14 F1020 RLS Key 9000 200 15 AB10 OPR Key 9000 200 16 200 My Line Key 08 244 0 08 245 0 HARDWARE REQUIRED Dterm and DLC card DSS Console and DLC card Operator Call Termina...

Page 69: ...ice Set Tone after dialing the access code 0 No tone 1 Service Set Tone Assign the Service Restriction Class A for Authorization Code to the required sta tions 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX My Line No XX ZZ XX 00 15 Service Restriction Class A Allow Authorization Code in the Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 31 Authorization Code 00 15 Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 ...

Page 70: ...e 0000 2999 ID Code Pattern No Assign the purpose of ID Code 1 2 Y 10 0000 2999 ID Code Pattern No 0 Validate the ID Code entered from stations and trunks 1 Validate the ID Code entered from stations 3 Invalidate the ID Code entered from stations and trunks Assign the desiredTrunk Restriction Class for each ID Code Pattern number 1 2 Y 11 0000 2999 ID Code Pattern No 1 Unrestricted RCA 2 Non Restr...

Page 71: ...sign the desired Service Restriction Class A to each ID Code Pattern number The features available in each class are assigned by CM15 1 2 Y 12 0000 2999 ID Code Pattern No 00 15 Service Restriction Class A Assign the desired Service Restriction Class B to each ID Code Pattern number The features available in each class are assigned by CM15 1 2 Y 13 0000 2999 ID Code Pattern No 00 15 Service Restri...

Page 72: ...r the Authorization Code 1 2 362 Service Set Tone after dialing the access code 0 No tone 1 Service Set Tone Assign the Service Restriction Class A for Authorization Code to required stations 1 2 Y 02 X XXXX Station No XX ZZ XX 00 15 Service Restriction Class A Allow Authorization Code in the Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 31 Authorization Code 00 15 Service Restriction Cl...

Page 73: ... ing to the conditions specified by CMD5 Y 0 and CMD5 Y 1 Authorization Code X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 C1 C2 1 2 Y 0 Significant digits for Check Code generation 0 For 1st Check Code 1 For 2nd Check Code 00 XX XX 00 No Check Code 01 FF Random digits for generat ing Check Code Enter desired value If no Check Code is required set data 0000 for both 1st and 2nd Check Code 1 2 Y 1 Check Sum Data for gen...

Page 74: ...ary Service Class 0 Unrestricted 1 Fully Restricted 2 As per BB CC DD EE 9 Delete the ID Code BB 01 08 Trunk Restriction Class assigned by CM35 Y 51 68 CC 00 15 Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 and CM15 DD 00 15 Service Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 Y 02 and CM15 EE 00 15 Service Restriction Class C assigned by CM12 Y 02 and CM15 Assign the station number corresponding to e...

Page 75: ...assigned to each code For details refer to APPENDIX D FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS page D1 NOTE 2 When deleting all ID codes stored in the AP01 card at one time do the following oper ation D60 0000 CCC NOTE 3 When providing Mask Data for Authorization Codes assign CMD001 160 175 Refer to STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SMDR page 477 HARDWARE REQUIRED EXPMEM card on MP card or AP01 card if required...

Page 76: ...vailable Auto mated Attendant destination 1 2 1 2 Y 30 Handling of busy not available Automated Attendant destination in Day Mode Y 31 Handling of busy not available Automated Attendant destination in Night Mode 000 255 Trunk No 00 C O line release 01 Forwarded to TAS 03 Forwarded to Attendant Console 04 Forwarded to DIT Station 05 Music and DT connection for Redial 06 DT connection for redial 08 ...

Page 77: ...nt connection is allowed on an Automated Attendant in coming call 1 2 Y 2 XX ZZ XX 00 63 Tenant No of called station ZZ 00 63 Tenant No of trunk 0 Restricted 1 Allowed Assign the answering method for the Auto mated Attendant to the required tenants 1 2 Y 0 00 63 Tenant No 00 DT connection 01 Hold Tone on MP card and DT connection 02 1st Answering Message and DT connection 03 DT connection For prov...

Page 78: ... receiving the message or music 1 Allow Specify the time before answering by Au tomated Attendant 1 2 Y 0 59 00 08 0 sec 32 sec 4 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 4 8 sec Specify the time before an Automated At tendant call is redirected because no digits are received from the calling party 1 2 Y 0 34 01 30 4 sec 120 sec 4 sec increments If no data is set the default setting...

Page 79: ...PIM4 5 EB064 EB095 For PIM6 7 EB096 EB127 NOTE EB000 and EB001 are dedi cated to built in Digital An nouncement Trunk of the MP card Assign the function of the Digital An nouncement Trunk 1 2 Y 00 000 001 Built in DAT on MP card 002 127 Digital Announcement Trunk Card No EB002 EB127 as signed by CM10 01XX 1st Answering Message 02XX 2nd Answering Message Night Message XX 00 63 Message No Assign the...

Page 80: ...e first and or second Answering Message Night Message DAT card or MP card built in DAT DESCRIPTION DATA Specify the message replay timer for Auto mated Attendant 1 2 Y 0 51 01 15 4 sec 60 sec 4 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 40 sec END CM41 A ...

Page 81: ...ION ACD MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM MIS 61 A2056 10 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION ACD MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM MIS PROGRAMMING Refer to CallCenterWorX System Manual HARDWARE REQUIRED Refer to CallCenterWorX System Manual ...

Page 82: ...G DESCRIPTION DATA Specify the Camp On Tone pattern 1 2 068 0 Send out only once 1 Repeat at 4 sec intervals Assign Automatic Camp On to the re quired DIT trunks 1 2 Y 13 In Day Mode Y 14 In Night Mode 000 255 Trunk No 06 Automatic Camp On CM30 START END CM08 ...

Page 83: ... Available Assign the data for terminating system in Day Mode and Night Mode for each trunk 1 2 Y 02 Day Mode 000 255 Trunk No 14 Termination to Attendant Console 1 2 Y 03 Night Mode 000 255 Trunk No 04 Direct In Termination 09 Automated Attendant Note 1 2 Y 05 Night Station Assignment 000 255 Trunk No X XXXXXXXX Night Station No Specify the timing for Automatic Change of Night Service 1 2 Y 0 01 ...

Page 84: ...DLC card DESCRIPTION DATA Assign the Service Restriction Class B for Automatic Hold to the required Dterm 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX My Line No XX ZZ ZZ 00 15 Service Restriction Class B Allow Automatic Hold in the Service Re striction Class B assigned by CM12Y 02 1 2 Y 72 00 15 Service Restriction Class B as signed by CM12 Y 02 0 Allow CM15 START CM12 END ...

Page 85: ...TOMATIC IDLE RETURN Dterm 65 A2056 10 AUTOMATIC IDLE RETURN Dterm PROGRAMMING HARDWARE REQUIRED Dterm and DLC card DESCRIPTION DATA Provide the system with this feature 1 2 172 1 Available CM08 END START ...

Page 86: ...atic Intercom No AX YY X 0 1 to be made one pair YY 00 31 Automatic Intercom Group No NOTE The maximum number of Automatic Intercom paired stations per system is 32 16 Automatic Intercoms Assign each Automatic Intercom station 1 2 Y 03 A000 A031 A100 A131 Automatic In tercom No assigned by CM11 05 Automatic Intercom Specify the busy indication on the Auto matic Intercom LED when the other Dterm of...

Page 87: ... to each Auto matic Intercom number 1 2 Y 10 A000 A031 A100 A131 Automatic In tercom No assigned by CM11 X XXXXXXXX My Line No Assign the AUTOMATIC INTERCOM key to each Dterm 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No A000 A031 A100 A131 Automatic In tercom No of each Dterm Specify the Automatic Intercom access capability when a called intercom station has set Do Not Disturb 1 2 237 0 Restricted 1 Allowed CM56 CM...

Page 88: ...00 Attendant Recall 01 14 2 4 sec 33 6 sec 2 4 sec increments 15 24 38 4 sec 124 8 sec 9 6 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 31 2 33 6 sec 1 2 05 Non Exclusive Hold 01 98 4 sec 392 sec 4 sec increments 99 Recall is not performed If no data is set the default setting is 60 64 sec 1 2 06 Exclusive Hold 01 98 4 sec 392 sec 4 sec increments 99 Recall is not performed If no data i...

Page 89: ...CRIPTION DATA 1 2 11 Attendant Hold Recall 01 14 2 4 sec 33 6 sec 2 4 sec increments 15 24 38 4 sec 124 8 sec 9 6 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 31 2 33 6 sec 1 2 26 Camp On Recall 01 15 16 sec 128 sec 8 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 24 32 sec CM41 END A ...

Page 90: ...nd Music on Dterm in the Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 1 2 Y 32 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign access code for this feature 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access code A039 BGM on Dterm Assign a trunk route number to the BGM Interface trunk 1 2 Y 00 000 255 Trunk No 00 63 Trunk Route No Assign the BGM interface to each trunk route 1...

Page 91: ...BACKGROUND MUSIC Dterm 71 A2066 10 HARDWARE REQUIRED External BGM source Up to 10 BGM sources can be provided COT TNT card Dterm and DLC card ...

Page 92: ... Boss station is a Dterm assign a MW Lamp to the Boss Dterm 1 2 Y 00 My Line No of Boss Key No F1005 MW Lamp Assign the access code for MW Set MW Reset to the secretary s Dterm if required 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A040 MW Set A041 MW Reset Whether Message Waiting Message Re minder is reset turning the MW Lamp off irrespective of answering of calling station when the called ...

Page 93: ...vice Restriction Class A Allow Call Waiting to the Secretary station in the Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 43 Calling Side 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow To provide Boss Secretary Override as sign the Service Restriction Class A for Call Waiting to the Boss station For Boss Station 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX Station No XX ZZ XX 00 15 Service Res...

Page 94: ...Secre tary station 0 Secretary station Assign the Boss line key as a secondary extension line to the Secretary s Dterm 1 2 Y 00 My Line No of Secretary s Dterm Key No X XXXXXXXX Boss My Line No Boss Station No DESCRIPTION DATA Assign the data for accommodating the Boss line to the Secretary s Sub line 1 2 Y 05 X XXXXXXXX Boss Station No 0 Accommodated Specify the ringing signal is sent to the Boss...

Page 95: ...BROKER S CALL 75 A2066 10 BROKER S CALL PROGRAMMING Refer to CALL HOLD and CALL HOLD Dterm page 95 ...

Page 96: ...00 Station A Station B 01 Station B Station A NOTE 1 Up to 100 Hot Line stations 50 pair can be set 1 2 1 2 Y 00 99 Hot Line pair No 0 Calling Station X XXXXXXXX Virtual Station No 1 Called Station X XXXXXXXX Station No CXX For Called Outside party XX Abbreviated Code given by CM71 NOTE 2 Do not assign station number with first digit 0 Assign the Virtual Line station number and RELEASE key on the ...

Page 97: ...Hot Line Outside XXX YYY XXX 000 299 Starting Memory Slot No YYY 001 100 Number of Memory Slots required Assign the outside party s number and name to each Memory Slot number 1 2 Y 0 000 299 Memory Slot No XXXX YY Y XXXX Access Code Max 4 digits Separator Mark YY Y Outside Party s No Max 26 digits 1 2 Y 1 000 299 Memory Slot No XXX X Station Name Character Code Max 32 digits 16 characters See APPE...

Page 98: ...BUSY LAMP FIELD FIXED 78 A2076 10 BUSY LAMP FIELD FIXED PROGRAMMING Refer to DIRECT STATION SELECTION DSS CONSOLE page 230 HARDWARE REQUIRED ATTCON DESKCON with DSS Console DLC card ...

Page 99: ...parties 1 2 045 0 Only once 1 Every 4 sec Specify the Warning Tone sent to outside party 1 2 076 0 To send 1 Not sent Assign Service Restriction Class A to each station 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX Station No XX ZZ XX 00 15 Service Restriction Class A Allow Busy Verification called side in the Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 09 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 0...

Page 100: ...Flash 1 Ineffective 1 2 051 Button as Switch Hook Flash 1 Ineffective 1 2 069 Single Digit Dialing on BT Con nection 1 Step Call 1 2 148 Same Last Digit Redialing on BT Connection 1 Ineffective NOTE 1 A single digit access code 2 is fixedly assigned to this feature NOTE 2 While the calling Dterm DP or DTMF telephone is holding the other call the single digit access code 2 is not available NOTE 3 F...

Page 101: ... Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 if required 1 2 Y 46 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign the access code for Call Back 1 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code For setting the different access code from OG Trunk Queuing 2 A002 Call Back Set A003 Call Back Cancel For setting the same access code as OG Trunk Queuing 2 A004 Set A005 Cancel Ass...

Page 102: ...CALL BACK MULTIPLE ASSIGNMENT 82 A2076 10 CALL BACK MULTIPLE ASSIGNMENT PROGRAMMING Refer to CALL BACK page 80 ...

Page 103: ...t 1 Allow for CM15 Y 00 Y 26 1 2 Y 00 Call Forwarding All Calls Y 26 Call Forwarding All Calls Outside 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign the access code for Call Forward ing All Calls Set and Cancel respectively 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A010 Set A011 Cancel Assign Call Forwarding All Calls keys to the Dterm as required 1 2 Y 00 My ...

Page 104: ...ension can set Call Forwarding All Calls Outside by entering only a trunk access code 1 2 386 0 Restrict 1 Allow Assign whether or not the system should check the trunk restriction class of the for warded station during a Call Forwarding All Calls Outside 1 2 387 0 Call forwarding All Calls Outside follows setting station class 1 No check Provide Call Forwarding feature with each tenant as per inc...

Page 105: ...ice Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 NOTE When providing Call Forwarding Busy Line Outside set 1 Al low for CM15Y 11 Y 28 Y 12 Y 29 1 2 Y 11 Call Forwarding Busy Line Y 28 Call Forwarding Busy Line Out side Y 12 Call Forwarding Busy Line Don t Answer Y 29 Call Forwarding Busy Line Out side Don t Answer Outside 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign the acc...

Page 106: ... No NOTE 1 Release Signal arrives NOTE NOTE For Resident System Program ming refer to the Command Manual 1 2 Y 0 Incoming Trunk Route No Outgoing Trunk Route No assigned by CM35 Y 05 0 Allow Specify the setting method for Call For warding Busy Line Outside 1 2 222 0 The feature is set when the station goes on hook when receiving Ser vice Set Tone ORT time out 1 The feature is set when receiving Se...

Page 107: ...a station with Do Not Disturb set 1 2 240 0 Allow 1 Restrict Assign whether or not an extension can set Call Forwarding Busy Line Outside by entering only a trunk access code 1 2 386 0 Restrict 1 Allow Assign whether or not the system should check the trunk restriction class of the for warded station during a Call Forwarding Busy Line Outside 1 2 387 0 Call forwarding Busy Line Outside follows set...

Page 108: ...TE When providing Call Forwarding Don t Answer Outside set 1 Allow for CM15 Y 10 Y 27 Y 12 Y 29 1 2 Y 10 Call Forwarding Don t Answer Y 27 Call Forwarding Don t Answer Outside Y 12 Call Forwarding Busy Line Don t Answer Y 29 Call Forwarding Busy Line Out side Don t Answer Outside 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign the access code for Call Forward ing Don t Answ...

Page 109: ...orwarding Don t Answer for an internal call or an as sisted call 1 2 Y 0 15 01 30 4 sec 120 sec 4 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 32 36 sec To apply this feature to incoming calls as sign the combination of trunk routes for Tandem connection 1 2 Y 05 00 63 Trunk Route No NOTE 1 Release Signal arrives NOTE NOTE For Resident System Program ming refer to the Command Manual 1 2...

Page 110: ...ess code 1 2 386 0 Restrict 1 Allow Assign whether or not the system should check the trunk restriction class of the for warded station during a Call Forwarding Don t Answer Outside 1 2 387 0 Call Forwarding Don t Answer Outside follows setting station class 1 No check Provide Call Forwarding feature with each tenant as per incoming call type 1 2 Y 23 Internal Call or ATT assisted call Y 24 C O In...

Page 111: ...re in the Ser vice Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 15 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign the access code for Call Forward ing I m Here Set and Cancel respectively 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A018 Call Forwarding I m Here Set A019 Call Forwarding I m Here Cancel Assign Call Forwarding I m Here set can cel keys to the Dte...

Page 112: ...095 For PIM6 7 EB096 EB127 NOTE EB000 and EB001 are dedi cated to built in Digital An nouncement Trunk of the MP card Assign Service Restriction Class A to the required stations 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX Station No XX ZZ XX 00 15 Service Restriction Class A Allow Digital Announcement Trunk Access in the Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 33 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as sign...

Page 113: ...No EB000 EB127 Digital Announcement Trunk Card No Assign the Digital AnnouncementTrunk as the destination of Tie Line call intercepted on each tenant 1 2 Y 07 00 63 Tenant No EB000 EB127 Digital Announcement Trunk Card No To record replay and delete a message assign the Digital Announcement Trunk access codes 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A100 Digital Announcement Trunk ac ...

Page 114: ...tension X XXXXXXXX Station No Destination Outside Party X XX YY Y X XX Outgoing Trunk LCR Group Ac cess Code 1 2 digits Separate Mark YY Y Called No Max 26 digits Destination Attendant Console E000 Attendant Console 1 2 Y 04 Split CF ALL Calls Y 05 Split CF Busy Line Don t Answer X XXXXXXXX Station No 0 Target Station for Split CF Block 0 ATT 1 Target Station for Split CF Block 1 2 Target Station ...

Page 115: ... Station No XX ZZ XX 00 15 Service Restriction Class A Allow Call Hold in the Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 01 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign an access code for Call Hold 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A046 Call Hold Assign a CALL HOLD key to the Dterm if required NOTE 1 This line key is not the same key norm...

Page 116: ...TOR LAMP Dterm PROGRAMMING HARDWARE REQUIRED Dterm and DLC card DESCRIPTION DATA Specify whether call termination is indicat ed on the Call Indicator Lamp or not on each line key 1 2 Y 05 My Line No Key No 0 Not indicated 1 To indicate START END CM90 ...

Page 117: ...formation are sent out from the MP Main Processor to the AP Application Processor The AP stores the outgoing call information and executes such process ing as call charge calculation and accumulation Also the AP sends the call charge data request ed through the key operation of Dterm to the printer The system data for the function of the Dterm TIMS are entered via the CAT Customer Adminis tration ...

Page 118: ...ing fea tures Totaled Bill accumulation Dterm TIMS Call Record accumulation Dterm TIMS Immediate Print Dterm TIMS SMDR SMDR information on PMS Centralized Billing CCIS DESCRIPTION CAPACITY Station 512 Trunk 255 Printer 2 Call Charge per Station 0 00 999 99 Call Storage Capacity 800 1600 26000 calls NOTE Dterm TIMS Terminal 8 No EXPMEM card on AP00 provided EXPMEM card on AP00 provided When CMD001 ...

Page 119: ...CALL INFORMATION SYSTEM CIS HARDWARE REQUIRED 99 A2097 10 HARDWARE REQUIRED AP00 B card Dterm DLC card RS PRT 15 S CA Printer Customer provided EXPMEM card PZ M537 on AP00 ...

Page 120: ... Station No SET Audit PRINT REC Station No RESET Call Record Interim PRINT REC DETAIL Station No SET Audit PRINT REC DETAIL Station No RESET Specified station group Totaled Bill Interim PRINT REC GROUP Group No SET Audit PRINT REC GROUP Group No RESET Call Record Interim PRINT REC DETAIL GROUP Group No SET Audit PRINT REC DETAIL GROUP Group No RESET Display Specified station Totaled Bill Interim R...

Page 121: ... operation is involved in the incidence of the data loss this operation is not available in default data NOTE 2 You can select the print type Interim Totaled Bill Audit Totaled Bill Interim Call Record Audit Call Record when the check out is performed from the Front Desk Terminal ...

Page 122: ...102 A2097 10 Key Arrangement of Dterm TIMS Continued on next page CNF LNR SPD DETAIL HRC HMW Exit HRLS 1 2 3 Help MY LINE CNL GROUP HWU REC DND OV RSTS PRINT HDND CK IN SET RESET Feature Speaker Recall Answer Transfer Hold 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 NEC Dterm 75 ...

Page 123: ...CALL INFORMATION SYSTEM CIS Dterm TIMS TERMINAL 103 A2097 10 Key Arrangement of Dterm TIMS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 CHKIN DND MW RC WKUP STS GRP PRT CR DET SET RESET CANCL RLS MYLINE Dterm 65 ...

Page 124: ...tify the destination of the call and calculates call charge on each call according to the charging method of the network H Method K Method Flat Rate H Method Time per pulse is fixed Charging Rate per pulse varies depending on the destination Area K Method Charging Rate per pulse is fixed Time per pulse varies depending on the distance to the destination Flat Rate Fixed charge per call regardless o...

Page 125: ...tion Dterm TIMS Programming Does Metering Pulse arrive on C O OG call What is charging method K Method Programming FLAT RATE FIXED CHARGE NO CHARGE K METHOD H Method Programming H METHOD NO YES TIMS Printer Programming Metering Pulse Programming page 108 page 110 page 114 page 115 page 117 page 116 page 119 Flat Rate Fixed Charge Programming ...

Page 126: ... INFORMATION SYSTEM CIS PROGRAMMING SUMMARY 106 A2097 10 ISDN Call Charge for France END START AP Initialization ISDN Call Charge TIMS Printer Programming page 108 page 118 page 119 Programming France Only ...

Page 127: ...the system data pertaining to stations trunks and service features are already assigned Station Number Data Loading The AP00 stores the station number data loaded from the MP When station numbers have been added deleted or changed by CM10 the station number data must be reloaded to the AP00 by the following procedure 1 Flip the MB switch of the AP to UP position 2 Return the MB switch to DOWN posi...

Page 128: ... whether the AP active or not by the RUN lamp indication The RUN lamp flashes on green color when the AP is in active When you install the AP00 at first time you should assign the data shown below NOTE If the system has provided one of the AP related features SMDR PMS MCI the pre vious initialization is not required Because it should have been done already DESCRIPTION DATA Assign an AP number to t...

Page 129: ... 4 should be set as fol lows ON AP No 04 15 OFF AP No 20 31 Initial the AP Up and DOWN the MB switch The message shown on Example will be print ed Station number information is transferred from the MP to the AP With the transfer com pleted message SORT COMPLETE is printed out on the printer It takes about 4 min for the message printout of SORT COMPLETE after AP00 START message CMD101 END A AP OFF ...

Page 130: ...Thu 05 Fri 06 Sat 1 2 2 Time HH MM SS HH 00 23 Hour MM 00 59 Minute SS 00 59 Second Assign the Pseudo Answer signal function when the answer signal Battery Reversal has not been detected within the time as signed by CM41 Y 0 03 after making an outgoing trunk call 1 2 123 For Australia 0 To send 1 Not sent For Other Countries 0 Not sent 1 To send Provide the Call Charge Service to the re quired sta...

Page 131: ...k route by CM35Y 04 and Dterm TIMS recording function by CM35 Y 14 1 2 Y 04 00 63 Trunk Route No 1 Answer signal arrives Battery Re versal from distant office 7 Answer signal does not arrive from distant office 1 2 Y 14 Dterm TIMS Recording for outgo ing call 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 Not provided 1 To provide Assign the Dterm TIMS function on pro grammable keys of the Dterm 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key N...

Page 132: ...he attribute data depending on the channel Port 1 or 3 connected to the printer 1 2 See the following table See the following table CM42 CMD000 CMD001 B AP00 INITIAL FIRST DATA 1 MEANING SECOND DATA 2 MEANING PORT 0 PORT 1 PORT 2 PORT 3 24 32 Data Speed 2 3 4 1200 2400 4800 bps 25 33 Stop Bit 2 2 bits 26 34 Data Length 0 7 bits 27 35 Parity 1 Even Parity 100 140 Equipment Type 16 17 Printer 0 Prin...

Page 133: ... DATA Specify the L0 L3 Lamp meanings on the AP00 card NOTE Confirm CS Lamp on the printer port is ON 1 2 250 See the following table END CMD001 C AP00 INITIAL LAMP 2ND DATA Port No 0 1 2 3 L3 No 3 port SD CS CS CS L2 No 2 port SD CD CD CD L1 No 1 port SD SD SD SD L0 No 0 port SD RD RD RD ...

Page 134: ...k Assign the metering function to a trunk route 1 2 Y 42 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 Assign the charging rate per metering pulse 1 2 00X000 X 0 2 Break Point 0 9999 Charging rate Assign the charging method development table number to outgoing trunk route 1 2 00 63 Outgoing Trunk Route No 000 511 Development table No Assign the Call Charge Development data to each dial code 0 9 A B on the basis of each ...

Page 135: ...idnight for Local Call Toll Call or Interna tional Call 1 2 XX Y ZZ XX 00 15 H Method No Y 0 7 Time table No ZZ 00 23 Time Time ID No 0 Day 1 Night 2 Midnight Assign the charging rate for Local Call Toll Call or International Call H Method 1 2 AA B C DD AA 00 15 H Method No B 0 2 Break Point C 0 2 Time ID No DD 00 15 Charging Rank 0 9999 Charging rate Assign the charging method development table n...

Page 136: ...e charging rate Flat Rate for Lo cal Call Toll Call 1 2 40 49 Flat Rate No 0 9 0 9999 Charging rate NOTE In case of no charge Free of Charge no data assignment is required Assign the charging method development table number to outgoing trunk route 1 2 00 63 Trunk Route No 000 511 Development table No Assign the charging method to each dialed digit 1 2 XXX Y XXX 000 511 Development table No Y 0 9 A...

Page 137: ...k Second 0 5 Setting data Assign the Time ID Day Night Midnight number of Local Call Toll Call or Interna tional Call K Method 1 2 XX Y ZZ XX 00 15 K Method No Y 0 7 Time Table No ZZ 00 23 Time Time ID No 0 Day 1 Night 2 Midnight Assign the charging rate for Local Call Toll Call or International Call K Method 1 2 0 15 K Method No 0 9999 Assign the Charging Method Development Table number to outgoi...

Page 138: ...xample CMD026 1 00 2 000 CMD027 1 0000 2 9 0001 9 0009 9 000A 9 000B 9 DESCRIPTION DATA Assign the charging method development table number to outgoing trunk route 1 2 00 63 Trunk Route No 000 511 Development table No Assign the charging method to each dialed digit 1 2 XXX Y XXX 000 511 Development Table No assigned by CMD026 Y 0 9 A B Dialed digit 9 Send to SMDR Terminal START CMD026 END CMD027 ...

Page 139: ...or Interim Printout 900 1 2 5 0 Not available 1 Available Specify whether the station number of which amount bill 0 is printed out by the printout operation of individual station s to taled bill 1 2 7 0 To printout 1 Not printed out Specify whether the station number of which amount bill 0 is printed out by the printout operation of individual station s call record 1 2 8 0 To printout 1 Not printe...

Page 140: ...s 1 Stations belong to the Large Group administrated by the Front Desk Terminal Specify whether the detailed information of call records is printed out by the print out operation of long time call 1 2 35 0 Not printed out 1 To printout Specify whether the call duration is printed out in each call record 1 2 36 0 To printout 1 Not printed out Specify whether T is printed beside the transferred stat...

Page 141: ...r the printout of totaled bill call record starts a new page for each Me dium Group 1 2 101 0 No 1 Yes Specify whether the printout of totaled bill call record starts a new page for each Large Group 1 2 102 0 No 1 Yes Specify whether the call records which have been printed out are confirmed by In terim Printout on station basis 1 2 121 0 Not available 1 Available Specify whether the call records ...

Page 142: ...fy whether automatic call record Au dit Printout is executed once a day 1 2 224 0 To execute 1 Not executed Specify whether automatic totaled bill In terim Printout is executed once a month 1 2 225 0 To execute 1 Not executed Specify whether automatic totaled bill Au dit Printout is executed once a month 1 2 226 0 To execute 1 Not executed Specify whether automatic call record In terim Printout is...

Page 143: ...rinted at the end of the billing information 1 2 3 0 7 See the following table Specify the number of line feeds after printing 1 2 6 0 No line feed 1 10 1 10 line feeds Specify the call duration by which the long time call record is printed out 1 2 10 0 No printing 1 225 Print every 1 255 minutes Specify the maximum number of Immedi ate Printout Call Record for the Printer which is set to 17 by CM...

Page 144: ... not executed 1 27000 1 block 27000 blocks Specify the threshold for the automatic printout of the call record accumulation overflow 1 2 31 0 Printout is not executed 1 12000 1 call 12000 calls Assign the time and day for daily monthly report with the Printer if required 1 2 21 28 XXXX Time and Day When you provide the external alarm indi cation through the DK specify the external equipment starti...

Page 145: ...a character assign data 20 NOTE 2 At the end of a Hotel Name Company Name or a message enter CR Data 0DH and End Mark Data 00H in the order named CMD030 G F Chara cter DATA Chara cter DATA Chara cter DATA Chara cter DATA Chara cter DATA Chara cter DATA Chara cter DATA SPACE 20 2A 4 34 3E H 48 R 52 5C 21 2B 5 35 3F I 49 S 53 5D 22 2C 6 36 40 J 4A T 54 5E 23 2D 7 37 A 41 K 4B U 55 5F 24 2E 8 38 B 42...

Page 146: ...um Group 1 2 000 127 Group No assigned by CMD012 200 232 Medium Group No NOTE Group No 232 is to be as signed to a Group No which is not included in a Medium Group No Assign the Large Group 1 2 200 231 Medium Group No assigned by CMD013 300 308 Large Group No NOTE Large Group No 308 is to be assigned to a Medium Group which is not included in a Large Group Assign the Station Service Class 1 2 X XX...

Page 147: ...S XX08 NOTE Accumulation of call charge on Local or Toll Call 0 YES 1 NO XX09 NOTE Call Recording on Local Call 0 NO 1 YES XX10 NOTE Immediate printout on Local Call 0 NO 1 YES XX11 NOTE Call Recording on Toll Call 0 NO 1 YES XX12 NOTE Immediate printout on Toll Call 0 NO 1 YES XX13 NOTE Accumulation of Call Charge on International Call 0 YES 1 NO XX14 NOTE Call Recording on International Call 0 N...

Page 148: ...pe of call with respect to each dialed digits 0 9 A B on the basis of each call development table number as signed by CMD033 1 2 XXX Y XXX 0 127 Call development table No Y 0 9 A B Dialed digit NOTE The actual digits sent from a trunk should be assigned X1 For assigning Type of Call 1 Local Call 2 Toll Call 3 International Call 7 Tie Line 8 Tie Line 9 Tie Line XXX 0 For assign next digit develop m...

Page 149: ... TIMS Printer Programming 129 A2107 10 DESCRIPTION DATA Assign the data for identifying which print er is used by the key operation of each Dterm TIMS Terminal 1 2 X XXXX My Line No of Dterm TIMS Terminal 0 Printer 0 1 Printer 1 CMD035 END J ...

Page 150: ... Audit Printout To prevent this trouble this programming is required DESCRIPTION DATA Assign the data for displaying the totaled call charge of call records on station basis 1 2 16 1 Available Assign the data for displaying the totaled call charge of call records on group basis 1 2 128 1 Available Assign the data for confirming the call records which have been printed out by the Interim Printout o...

Page 151: ...CALL PARK Dterm 131 A2131 10 CALL PARK Dterm PROGRAMMING Refer to CALL PARK TENANT page 133 HARDWARE REQUIRED Dterm and DLC card ...

Page 152: ... 07 1 2 Y 96 00 15 Service Restriction Class C assigned by CM12 Y 07 1 With LCD Assign an access code for Call Park Sys tem set and retrieve 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A008 Call Park System Set A009 Call Park System Retrieve Specify the recall timing for the Call Park System 1 2 Y 0 05 01 98 4 sec 392 sec 4 sec increments 99 Recall is not performed If no data is set the ...

Page 153: ...ble Assign Call Park keys to the Dterm NOTE A maximum of 8 calls can be parked per tenant 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No F3XX Z XX 00 63 Group No Z 1 8 Serial Key No Assign the access code for Call Park Ten ant 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A062 Call Park Tenant Set Retrieve Specify the recall timing for the Call Park Tenant 1 2 Y 0 05 01 98 4 sec 392 sec 4 sec increments 99 Re...

Page 154: ...ion B 2 Station C Last Operation 1 Station X 2 Station A 1 2 Y 0 X XXXXXXXX Station No to be in cluded in the Call Pick up Group X XXXXXXXX Another station No to be included in the same Call Pickup Group Assign the Service Restriction Class A to each station 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX Station No XX ZZ XX 00 15 Service Restriction Class A Allow Call Pickup Direct in the Service Re striction Class A assign...

Page 155: ... Restriction Class A Allow Call Pickup Direct in the Service Re striction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 14 00 15 Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign an access code for Call Pickup Di rect 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A021 Call Pickup Direct Assign a Call Pickup Direct key to Dterm if required 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No F0021 Call Pickup D...

Page 156: ...ckup group by assign ing station numbers within a group one by one with the following operation 1st Operation 1 Station A 2 Station B 2nd Operation 1 Station B 2 Station C Last Operation 1 Station X 2 Station A 1 2 Y 0 X XXXXXXXX Station No to be in cluded in the Call Pick up group X XXXXXXXX Another station No to be included in the same group Assign the access code for Call Pickup Group 1 2 Y 0 3...

Page 157: ...CALL QUEUING 137 A2131 10 CALL QUEUING PROGRAMMING Refer to CALL WAITING DISPLAY page 142 ...

Page 158: ...0 My Line No Key No F5011 Call Redirect 0 For transferring to a station as signed by CM51 Y 22 F5012 Call Redirect 1 For transferring to a VMS as signed by CM51 Y 18 Specify the destinationVMS station of Call Redirect to each tenant 1 2 Y 18 00 63 Tenant No X XXXXXXXX VMS Station No Specify the destination station of Call Re direct to each tenant 1 2 Y 22 00 63 Tenant No X XXXXXXXX Station No STAR...

Page 159: ...A2131 10 CALL TRANSFER ALL CALLS CALL TRANSFER ALL CALLS Dterm PROGRAMMING HARDWARE REQUIRED Dterm and DLC card if required DESCRIPTION DATA Specify Call Transfer from a station before a called station answers 1 2 062 0 Not available 1 Available START END CM08 ...

Page 160: ...s 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code 800 Specify the tenants to be handled by each ATT Group 1 2 Y 0 3 ATT Group 0 3 assigned by CM60 Y 00 00 63 Tenant No 0 To be handled Specify Call Transfer from a station before the called attendant answers 1 2 063 0 Available 1 Not available START END CM20 CM62 CM08 INITIAL ...

Page 161: ...CALL WAITING ANSWER Dterm 141 A2131 10 CALL WAITING ANSWER Dterm PROGRAMMING Refer to CALL WAITING TERMINATING page 145 HARDWARE REQUIRED Dterm and DLC card ...

Page 162: ...CALL WAITING DISPLAY PROGRAMMING DESCRIPTION DATA Specify the number of waiting calls which cause Call Waiting display to flash 1 2 00 01 48 Number of Waiting Calls If no data is set the default setting is 6 wait ing call START END CM42 ...

Page 163: ... cess Code set the data for 050 051 069 and 148 to 1 1 2 050 Button as Switch Hook Flash 1 Ineffective 1 2 051 Button as Switch Hook Flash 1 Ineffective 1 2 069 Single Digit Dialing on BT Con nection 1 Step Call 1 2 148 Same Last Digit Redialing on BT Connection 1 Ineffective Provide the System with the Single Digit Feature Access Code on BT Connection 1 2 208 0 Available Specify the Camp On Call ...

Page 164: ...ng in the Service Restric tion Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 43 Call Waiting Set from calling side Y 44 Call Waiting Answer from called side 00 15 Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign an access code for Call Waiting 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A125 Call Waiting DESCRIPTION DATA Assign VIP class to the required stations 1 2 Y 21 X XXXXXXXX...

Page 165: ...ice Restriction Class A to the required stations 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX Station No XX ZZ XX 00 15 Service Restriction Class A Allow Call Waiting Terminating in the Ser vice Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 44 00 15 Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow START END CM12 CM15 ...

Page 166: ...iting for DID call to the Trunk Route 1 2 Y 59 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 To provide 1 Not provided Specify the number of times for Call Wait ing tone NOTE This data is effective when the 2nd data of CM08 367 0 1 2 18 01 99 Number of Times If no data is set the default setting is no lim itation Allow the Call Waiting for DID call per sta tion number NOTE This data is effective when the 2nd data of CM3...

Page 167: ... 147 A2131 10 CALLER ID DISPLAY PROGRAMMING HARDWARE REQUIRED Dterm with LCD and DLC card DESCRIPTION DATA Provide the Dterm with a Caller ID Display key 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No F5010 Caller ID Display START END CM90 ...

Page 168: ...In Termination 08 Dial in 09 Automated Attendant 10 Attendant Console TAS 11 Attendant Console Trunk Line Appearance 12 Attendant Console Trunk Line Appearance TAS 14 Termination to Attendant Console 16 Remote Access to System 18 ISDN Indial 31 DID Tie Line and the call which is not handled by the PBX Assign a Trunk ID Code 1 2 Y 19 000 255 Trunk No XXXX Trunk ID Code Assign the Programming key to...

Page 169: ...ion 1 2 1 2 Y 00 Type of Telephone X XXXXXXXX Station No 1 DP Rotary Dial Telephone 2 DTMF Push Button Telephone 3 DTMF DP Y 03 Telephone Class X XXXXXXXX Station No 00 House Phone 0 01 House Phone 1 02 House Phone 2 03 House Phone 3 04 Hot Line 05 Automatic Intercom 06 Manual Intercom 07 Dial Intercom 08 Attendant Terminal Loop Line 15 Ordinary Station START END CM12 ...

Page 170: ... 8 Trunk Restriction Class in Night Mode 1 Unrestricted RCA 2 Non Restricted 1 RCB 3 Non Restricted 2 RCC 4 Semi Restricted 1 RCD 5 Semi Restricted 2 RCE 6 Restricted 1 RCF 7 Restricted 2 RCG 8 Fully Restricted RCH Set the Outgoing Incoming Trunk Route Restriction Data by Trunk Restriction Classes RCA RCH 1 2 Y 51 58 Outgoing Trunk Restriction Data Y 61 68 Incoming Trunk Restriction Data 00 63 Tru...

Page 171: ...for each class are specified by CM15 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX Station No XX ZZ XX 00 15 Service Restriction Class A ZZ 00 15 Service Restriction Class B 1 2 Y 07 X XXXXXXXX Station No 00 15 Service Restriction Class C Specify the service features in each Ser vice Class A B and C NOTE For details refer to Command Manual 1 2 00 15 Service Restriction Class A B C 0 NOTE 1 NOTE START CM12 CM15 END ...

Page 172: ... NOTE 2 Circuit No 3 of E831 is used for built in External Equip ment Interface of MP card by setting CM44 Assign the trunk data to the trunk number 1 2 Y 0 Trunk Route Allocation 000 255 Trunk No 00 63 Trunk Route No Dedicated route number for this service should be assigned 1 2 Y 01 Tenant Allocation 000 255 Trunk No 00 01 63 Tenant No Assign the route data to the trunk route specified by CM30 Y...

Page 173: ...tion to the DK card 1 2 XX Y XX 00 31 DK Card No assigned by CM10 E800 E831 Y 0 3 Circuit No of DK card 313 MP built in External Equipment In terface 02XX Zone assigned by CM30 Y 28 XX 00 09 Speaker Paging Zone 0 9 Assign the access code for this service 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code 100 163 Trunk Route No 00 63 as signed by CM30 Y 00 CM20 END CM44 A ...

Page 174: ...led number to each LDN or TIE key assigned by CM90 The indialed number should be different from any numbers assigned by CM10 and CM11 1 2 1 2 Y 01 To LDN keys 1 8 LDN key 0 7 assigned by CM90 X XXXX Indialed No Y 02 To TIE keys 1 8 TIE key 0 7 assigned by CM90 X XXXX Indialed No Assign the destination of a DID Tie Line call transferred when unassigned number is dialed 1 2 Y 06 For DID Call Y 07 Fo...

Page 175: ... 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 Y 00 Tenant No of LDN 00 08 10 18 LDN0 7 TIE0 7 assigned by CM50 Y 01 Y 02 00 63 Tenant No Y 01 TAS Group No Same as CM58 Y 00 00 63 TAS Group No Y 02 Day Mode destination of LDN Same as CM58 Y 00 00 07 LDN0 TIE0 key LDN7 TIE7 key 08 To TAS 09 To the station outside party as signed by CM58 Y 08 Y 03 Night Mode destination Same as CM58 Y 00 00 07 LDN0 TIE0 key LDN7 TIE7 key 08 To TAS...

Page 176: ...de diversion for busy destination station Same as CM58 Y 00 Same as CM58 Y 04 Y 06 Day Mode diversion for non an swering destination station Same as CM58 Y 00 00 To Attendant Console NANS key 08 To TAS Y 07 Night Mode diversion for non an swering destination station Same as CM58 Y 00 Same as CM58 Y 06 Y 08 Day Mode destination station Same as CM58 Y 00 X XXXXXXXX Station No Y 09 Night Mode destina...

Page 177: ...n Entry Cancel re spectively 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A064 Origination A065 Entry A066 Cancel Specify Toll Restriction for an outgoing call by Speed Calling Station 1 2 035 0 Not provided 1 Provided Specify dialing is set as paused data 1 5 sec or as a dialed digit to the C O line when the DTMF station or Dterm dials in the setting of the Speed Calling Sta tion feature...

Page 178: ... 10 Number of 10 Slot Memory Blocks NOTE 1000 Slot Memory Block number 4 9 6000 Memory Parcels can be used when the Expansion Memory card PZ M537 is mounted on the MP card For using this memory area there are several conditions as mentioned below This memory area cannot be used for Speed Calling with Speed Calling keys provided by CM90 F11XX on a Dterm and cannot also be used for Speed Call ing Sy...

Page 179: ... If the stored number intended is 10 for Station Number 300 20 for Station Num ber 301 and 30 for Station Number 302 the memory areas assignment is as fol lows B C Memory Parcel 0 3 4 9 0 1 9 10 Slot Memory Block 1000 Slot Memory Block Basic 4000 Memory Parcels Option 6000 Memory Parcels 00 01 09 1000 Slot Memory Memory Start Block No Number of 10 Slot Station No Block No 10 Slot Memory Block Memo...

Page 180: ...viated Code 0 9 If the number of Memory Parcels ore station exceeds 11 then Abbreviated Code 00 99 The following figure shows the relation between Abbreviated Codes and Memory Parcels In the case of 10 Memory Parcels In the case of 20 Memory Parcels C D CM73 Memory Parcel Number Abbrev Code 10 Slot Memory Block 0 1 0 1 2 3 2 3 4 5 4 5 9 9 Memory Parcel Number Abbrev Code 10 Slot Memory Block 10 Sl...

Page 181: ... Stored No enter C Fixed Pause 1 5 sec or D Programmable Pause specified by CM41 Y 0 38 after desired digits Assign the Station Name to be displayed to each Memory Slot number by character codes or character 1 2 Y 1 X YY Z X 0 3 Basic 4 9 Option 1000 Slot Memory Block No YY 00 99 10 Slot Memory Block No Z 0 9 Memory Parcel No XX XX Station Name Character Code Max 32 digits 16 characters See APPEND...

Page 182: ...OTE 1 These Speed Calling Station keys are assigned to line buttons on the Dterm 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No F11XX XX 00 99 Speed Calling Station 00 99 NOTE 2 The initial setting of key layout is for 16 Line Trunk Feature keys Key No 01 16 When using Key No 17 24 data setting of CM12 Y 24 2nd data 0 is required E CM90 END ...

Page 183: ...A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Specify Toll Restriction for an outgoing call by Speed Calling Station 1 2 035 0 Not provided 1 To provide Specify dialing is set as paused data 1 5 sec or dialed digit when the DTMF station or Dterm dials in the setting of the Speed Calling Station feature 1 2 168 0 Paused data 1 5 sec 1 Dialed digit Specify dialing is set as a programma ble pause by CM41 Y 0 38 o...

Page 184: ... Memory Start Block No 10 Slot Memory Block ZZ 01 10 Number of 10 Slot Memory Blocks NOTE 1 1000 Slot Memory Block number 4 9 6000 Memory Parcels can be used when the Expansion Memory card PZ M537 is mounted on the MP card If the station number is assigned to One Touch keys using this memory area the lamp does not show the busy state NOTE 2 When Consecutive Speed Calling is provided using the One ...

Page 185: ... the stored number intended is 10 for Station Number 300 20 for Station Num ber 301 and 30 for Station Number 302 the memory areas assignment is as fol lows B END CM94 Memory Parcel 0 3 4 9 0 1 9 10 Slot Memory Block 1000 Slot Memory Block Basic 4000 Memory Parcels Option 6000 Memory Parcels 00 01 09 1000 Slot Memory Memory Start Block No Number of 10 Slot Station No Block No 10 Slot Memory Block ...

Page 186: ...re available per system The number of slots available for each Tenant is also 300 1 2 00 63 For stations within Tenant 00 63 64 For Attendant Console XXX YYY XXX 000 299 First Memory Slot No in Block YYY 001 300 Number of Slots to be allocated in Block Abbreviated Call Codes required for ac cessing this feature are automatically giv en to each Tenant shown below For example to provide 20 memory sl...

Page 187: ...ts Assign the name for display to the Memo ry Slot number allocated by CM71 by character codes or character 1 2 Y 1 000 299 Memory Slot No XX XX Station Name Character Code Max 32 digits 16 characters See APPENDIX B CHARACTER CODE TABLE 1 2 Y 2 000 299 Memory Slot No XX XX Station Name Character by MAT CAT Max 16 characters Specify the Speed Calling System securi ty Stored number displays on Dterm...

Page 188: ...nal Ringing CM08 138 to External Ringing CM35 Y 33 when transferring a call 1 External Ringing CM35 Y 33 Assign the Service Restriction Class C to each station 1 2 Y 07 X XXXXXXXX Station No 00 15 Service Restriction Class C Allow the Switch Hook Flash capability in the Service Restriction Class C assigned by CM12 Y 07 1 2 Y 88 89 Switch Hook Flash on Internal Call Y 90 91 Switch Hook Flash on Ext...

Page 189: ...02 1 2 Y 56 00 15 Service Restriction Class B as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Specify the command codes accessible to each Password Level 1 2 Y 00 Password Level 0 6 Y 01 Password Level 1 6 Y 02 Password Level 2 6 Y 03 Password Level 3 6 Y 04 Password Level 4 6 Y 05 Password Level 5 6 Y 06 Password Level 6 Y 10 Password Level 0 Y 11 Password Level 1 Y 12 Password Level 2 Y 13 Password Level 3 Y 14 ...

Page 190: ... the password mode and enter the password assigned by CME9 To start the work To log off the password mode To finish the work HARDWARE REQUIRED Dterm and DLC card DESCRIPTION DATA Assign a password to each Password Lev el 1 2 0 7 Password Level 0 7 X X X Max 8 digits Password Code A password code for Password Level 7 must be assigned prior to providing the password service by Function No 9 of CME9 ...

Page 191: ... A2168 10 DATA LINE SECURITY PROGRAMMING DESCRIPTION DATA Assign the function of Analogue Data sta tion Single Line Station with FAX or MO DEM to required stations 1 2 Y 07 X XXXXXXXX Station No 0 Data station START END CM13 ...

Page 192: ...05 13 14 15 16 30 31 DESCRIPTION DATA Assign the password code for Day Night Change by ATTCON 1 2 Y 30 1 XX XX Password Code Max 8 digits X 0 9 A B If no data is set the default setting is NONE In this case the password is set to 12345678 Assign the Day Night Mode key on ATTCON 1 2 Y 00 ATTCON No key No F6110 Assign the access code for providing Day Night Mode change from a ATTCON if re quired 1 2...

Page 193: ...ay Mode Y 03 Night Mode Y 40 Mode A Y 41 Mode B 000 255 Trunk No 04 Direct In Termination Assign the station number to be terminat ed by DIT in Day Mode Night Mode Mode A Mode B respectively 1 2 Y 04 Day Mode Y 05 Night Mode Y 42 Mode A Y 43 Mode B 000 255 Trunk No X XXXXXXXX Station No When using Mode A or Mode B assign the terminating system Mode change 1 2 Y 29 00 63 Tenant No 0 Two kinds of mo...

Page 194: ...e by Station Dialing 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A043 Day Night Mode Change by Sta tion Dialing Assign the Day Night Mode Change by Tenant key on Dterm if required 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No F1300 F1363 Day Night Mode Change by Tenant 00 63 To the key which is set by CM90 Y 00 F13XX specify the call indicator lamp control as not available 1 2 Y 05 My Line No Key No 0 Not ...

Page 195: ... the UCD Group 0 To send periodically 1 To send only once Assign the Digital Announcement Trunk card number to the required LEN NOTE The Digital AnnouncementTrunk card number must be assigned to the first LEN Level 0 the third LEN Level 2 the fifth LEN Level 4 and the seventh LEN Level 6 of LT slot 1 2 000 763 LEN EB002 EB127 Digital Announcement Trunk Card No For PIM0 1 EB002 EB031 For PIM2 3 EB0...

Page 196: ...ouncement Trunk Card No EB002 EB127 as signed by CM10 0B0XX UCD Delay Announcement 11XX Second UCD delay announce ment XX 00 15 UCD Group No To record replay and delete a message assign the Digital Announcement Trunk access code respectively 1 2 Y 0 3 Number Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A100 Record A101 Replay A102 Delete When transferring the call to a station or Attendant after the 1st inte...

Page 197: ...ure to each line key on a Dterm NOTE The Delayed Ringing feature can be assigned to the first 16 line trunk keys Key 01 16 24 line trunk keys Key 01 24 1 2 Y 03 My Line No Key No NOTE 0 Delayed Ringing Specify the timing for Delayed Ringing 1 2 Y 1 09 01 10 2 sec 20 sec 2 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 10 sec START END CM90 CM41 ...

Page 198: ...DIAL ACCESS TO ATTENDANT 178 A2168 10 DIAL ACCESS TO ATTENDANT PROGRAMMING Refer to INDIVIDUAL ATTENDANT ACCESS page 280 ...

Page 199: ...Dterm accommodated in each DLC card NOTE 1 For 4DLC card assign this data to the first LEN Level 0 of each card For 8DLC card assign this data to first Level 0 and fifth Level 4 LEN of each card NOTE 2 The same type of Dterms must be accommodated in the same DLC card 1 2 Y 17 X XXXXXXXX My Line No 0 Dterm 75 with 65 mode Soft Key is not available 1 Dterm 70 3 Dterm 75 with 75 mode Dterm 65 Soft Ke...

Page 200: ...ether Soft Key feature is avail able to each Dterm 1 2 Y 22 X XXXXXXXX My Line No 0 Available 1 Not available Assign Soft Key Pattern to each Dterm 1 2 Y 23 X XXXXXXXX My Line No 0 Soft Key Pattern No 0 1 Soft Key Pattern No 1 2 Soft Key Pattern No 2 3 Soft Key Pattern No 3 START CM12 A ...

Page 201: ...Dterm is in idle state 1 2 Y 00 03 Soft Key Pattern No 0 3 as signed by CM12 Y 23 00 ZZ 00 Status No Idle state NOTE 5 ZZ 00 15 Soft Key No 00 03 Indicated on 1st display 04 07 Indicated on 2nd display 08 11 Indicated on 3rd display 12 15 Indicated on 4th display F5002 Scroll key to change Soft Key Indication F5014 Dial By Name for Speed Calling System 300 Slot Memory F5015 Dial By Name for Speed ...

Page 202: ...Soft Key function assigned by CM9A Y 00 03 For the Pattern No 3 the initial Soft Key data for Dial By Name are as signed as follows 1 2 Y 10 13 Soft Key Pattern No 0 3 assigned by CM12 Y 23 Same as CM9A Y 00 03 Characters Max 12 characters See APPENDIX B CHARACTER CODE TABLE END CM9A B CM9A Y 13 1st Data 2nd Data 0001 SYS 0002 STA ...

Page 203: ...Block For example to provide 20 memory slots starting at Slot 60 Data 060020 Assign the number to be called to the Memory Slot number allocated by CM71 1 2 Y 0 000 299 Memory Slot No Stored No Outgoing Access Code Max 4 digits Stored No Max 26 digits To set a pause into the Stored No en ter C Fixed pause 1 5 sec or D Programmable pause specified by CM41 Y 0 38 after desired digits more than 2 digi...

Page 204: ...DIAL BY NAME Dterm 184 A2179 10 DESCRIPTION DATA 1 2 Y 2 000 299 Memory Slot No XX XX Station Name Character Max 16 characters END CM72 A ...

Page 205: ... number from the Station 0 1 Effective Ineffective ZZ 01 10 Number of 10 Slot Memory Blocks NOTE 1000 Slot Memory Block number 4 9 6000 Memory Parcels can be used when the Expansion Memory card PZ M537 is mounted on the MP card For using this memory area there are several conditions as mentioned below This memory area cannot be used for Speed Calling with Speed Calling keys provided by CM90 F11XX ...

Page 206: ...the stored number intended is 10 for Station Number 300 20 for Station Number 301 and 30 for Station Number 302 the memory areas assignment is as follows 1000 Slot Memory Memory Start Block No Number of 10 Slot Station No Block No 10 Slot Memory Block Memory Block 1st Data 2nd Data W 2nd Data XX 2nd Data ZZ 300 0 00 01 301 0 01 02 302 0 03 03 303 0 06 01 CM73 A B 0 3 4 1000 Slot Memory Block 0 9 1...

Page 207: ...on 1000 Slot Memory Block No XX 00 99 Memory Start Block No 10 Slot Memory Block ZZ 01 99 Number of 10 Slot Memory Blocks NOTE 1 When Dial By Name is provided using the One Touch Keys the same memory area must be specified by CM73 and CM94 NOTE 2 1000 Slot Memory Block number 4 9 can be used when the Expansion Memory card PZ M537 is mounted on the MP card If the station number is assigned to One T...

Page 208: ...le 1 2 110 1000 Slot Memory Block No 3 0 Available 1 Not available Assign the number to be dialed to each Memory Slot number if required The numbers to be called are usually set from individual stations by their station users 1 2 Y 0 X YY Z X 0 3 Basic 4 9 Option 1000 Slot Memory Block No YY 00 99 10 Slot Memory Block No Z 0 9 Memory Parcel No Stored No Outgoing Call Access Code Max 4 digits Store...

Page 209: ...racter 1 2 Y 1 X YY Z X 0 3 Basic 4 9 Option 1000 Slot Memory Block No YY 00 99 10 Slot Memory Block No Z 0 9 Memory Parcel No XX XX Station Name Character Code Max 32 digits 16 characters See APPENDIX B CHARACTER CODE TABLE 1 2 Y 2 X YY Z X 0 3 Basic 4 9 Option 1000 Slot Memory Block No YY 00 99 10 Slot Memory Block No Z 0 9 Memory Parcel No XX XX Station Name Character Max 16 characters D CM74 E...

Page 210: ...o INTERCOM No 00 B000 B100 B200 B900 01 B001 B101 B201 B901 24 B024 B124 B224 B924 1 2 000 255 Virtual LEN BX YY Dial Intercom Number X 0 9 Intercom Code YY 00 24 Dial Intercom Group NOTE A maximum of 25 Dial Intercom groups are available per system A maximum of 10 Dterm s can belong to a Dial Intercom group Assign the Dial Intercom station 1 2 Y 03 B000 B924 Dial Intercom No as signed by CM11 07 ...

Page 211: ... Dial Intercom No of each Dterm If the private Dial Intercom is provided as sign the Service Restriction Class A to each Dial Intercom number 1 2 Y 02 B000 B924 Dial Intercom No as signed by CM11 XX ZZ XX 00 15 Service Restriction Class A Restrict Executive Right of Way in the Ser vice Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 09 00 15 Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 0 Rest...

Page 212: ...required number of LDN keys on ATTCON DESKCON 1 2 Y 00 ATTCON No E000 E007 Key No F6000 F6007 C O Incoming Call 0 7 F6040 F6047 Tie Line Incoming Call 0 7 Assign the indialed number to each LDN key orTie Line key assigned by CM90 The indialed number should be different from any numbers assigned by CM10 and CM11 1 2 Y 01 For DID 0 Effective data in CM35 Y 15 1 8 LDN key 0 7 assigned by CM90 X XXXX ...

Page 213: ...diverted to LDN 0 7 keys as specified by CM58 Y 02 Y 03 even if CM50 Y 01 02 1 8 has been set 1 2 Y 02 Day Mode destination of LDN 00 Effective data in CM35 Y 15 01 08 LDN key 0 7 assigned by CM90 10 Effective data in CM35 Y 15 11 18 Tie Line key 0 7 assigned by CM90 00 07 LDN TIE key 0 7 1 2 Y 03 Night Mode destination of LDN Same as CM58 Y 02 00 07 LDN TIE Line key 0 7 1 2 Y 08 Day Mode destinat...

Page 214: ...runk Route No Dedicated route number for this service should be assigned 1 2 Y 01 Tenant allocation 000 255 Trunk No 00 63 Tenant No 01 Tenant No Assign the route data to the trunk route specified by CM30 Y 00 1 2 Y 00 Kind of Route 00 63 Trunk Route No 05 1 2 Y 01 Type of Signal to be sent out 00 63 Trunk Route No 4 DTMF 1 2 Y 08 Dial Pulse Sending 00 63 Trunk Route No 3 To send Assign the access...

Page 215: ... 544 MHz 30 channel PCM Digital Line 2 048 MHz To add a Direct Digital Interface to the system it is necessary to install a DTI Digital Trunk Inter face card Figure below shows the system outline of the Direct Digital Interface of the PBX System Outline of Direct Digital Interface TDSW 24 30 CH 24 30 CHANNEL PCM DIGITAL LINE CLOCK SIGNAL PLO PHASE LOCKED OSCILLATOR DTI 24 30 CHANNEL DIGITAL TRUNK ...

Page 216: ... Test Local Remote Loop Back Cyclic Redundancy Checking based on ITU T Rec G704 For 30 DTI Unipolar Bipolar Conversion HDB3 Format Signalling Insertion Extraction Alarm Detection Insertion Digital PAD on Voice Signal Transmission Cyclic Redundancy Checking based on ITU T Rec G704 Channel Associated Signalling based on ITU T Rec 0421 Digital R2 Signalling Code For connection of a 24 DTI and transmi...

Page 217: ...ther is a standby route 1 from a sub source office When no clock signals arrive from the source and sub source office due to a transmission line failure the PLO keeps generating the clock signals at the frequency of the previous source clock The PLO can receive different frequency of source clocks from the route 0 and route 1 Figure below shows an example of clock supply route when the system is a...

Page 218: ...ACITY 198 A2195 10 SYSTEM CAPACITY System Capacity for Direct Digital Interface HARDWARE REQUIRED DTI card MP Internal PLO card DESCRIPTION CAPACITY 24 DTI 30 DTI DTI Card 8 4 DTI Trunk 192 124 DTI Trunk Route 64 64 Ports per DTI Card 24 31 ...

Page 219: ...me slots to channels not assigned For example as shown below even when Channel 1 through Channel 10 have been assigned by the system data programming CM07Y 01 except for Channel 5 the system allocates a total of 10 time slots for all ten channels Therefore to avoid unnecessary allocation of time slots it is recommended that consecutive channels be assigned on each DTI card Time Slot Allocation for...

Page 220: ...Input Jitter Wander Cable Length from PBX to CSU 1 544 Mbps 50 ppm AMI with ZCS B8ZS 100 ohms 3 volts 0 6 volts 324 ns 30 ns 1 544 Mbps 200 bps 130 ppm 1 5 volts 3 volts 100011011100 ITU T Fig 1 G743 138U1 193UI or 138UI 193UI Max 200 m 655 ft with 0 6 φ 22 ABAM twisted pair cable 2 048 Mbps 50 ppm HDB3 High Density Bipolar 3 75 ohms 100 µH Coaxial Cable 120 ohms 160 µH Twisted Pair Cable 2 37 vol...

Page 221: ...i Frame ESF 1 12 Multi Frame This configuration has 12 Multi Frames and each Multi frame has a 24 Channel PCM signal 8 bits channel and a S bit Super Frame Bit Figure below shows the frame configuration and Table in next page shows frame bit assignment DTI Frame Configuration 12 Multi Frame S CH1 CH2 CH3 CH24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 FRAME 1 FRAME 2 FRAME 3 F...

Page 222: ... are repeated in the order shown above Frames 6 and 12 become signal frames FRAME No S BIT BIT No OF EACH CHANNEL CH1 CH12 SIGNAL CHANNEL TERMINAL SYNCHRONIZATION FT SIGNAL SYNCHRONIZATION FS INFORMATION SIGNAL BIT CONTROL SIGNAL BIT 1 1 1 8 2 0 1 8 3 0 1 8 4 0 1 8 5 1 1 8 6 1 1 7 8 A 7 0 1 8 8 1 1 8 9 1 1 8 10 1 1 8 11 0 1 8 12 0 1 7 8 B ...

Page 223: ...as a 24 Channel PCM signal 8 bits channel and a S bit Super Frame Bit Figure below shows the frame configuration and Table in next page shows frame bit assignment DTI Frame Configuration 24 Multi Frame S CH1 CH2 CH3 CH24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 FRAME 1 FRAME 2 FRAME 3 FRAME 24 125 µs S SUPERFRAME BIT ...

Page 224: ...a Link column means that the frame is usually assigned to 1 FRAME No S BIT BIT No OF EACH CHANNEL CH1 CH24 SIGNAL CHANNEL FRAME SYNCHRONIZATION 4 Kbps DATA LINK CRC INFORMATION SIGNAL BIT CONTROL SIGNAL BIT 1 m 1 8 2 CB1 1 8 3 m 1 8 4 0 1 8 5 m 1 8 6 CB2 1 7 8 A 7 m 1 8 8 0 1 8 9 m 1 8 10 CB3 1 8 11 m 1 8 12 1 1 7 8 B 13 m 1 8 14 CB4 1 8 15 m 1 8 16 0 1 8 17 m 1 8 18 CB5 1 7 8 C 19 m 1 8 20 1 1 8 ...

Page 225: ...TU T Specification the frame configuration con sists of 16 multi frame each frame having 32 time slots Figure below shows the frame configuration and Table in next page shows the details of time slot assignment Frame Configuration of 30 DTI TS0 TS1 TS2 TS15 TS16 TS17 TS30 TS31 FRAME 0 FRAME 1 FRAME 2 FRAME 3 FRAME 14 FRAME 15 125 µsec ...

Page 226: ...X 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 FAS b0 1 2 3 4 5 6 b7 CRC BIT X 1 1 1 1 1 1 b0 1 2 3 4 5 6 b7 CRC BIT 0 NORMAL 1 FRAME LOSS REMOTE ALARM X 0 0 0 1 X 1 1 b0 1 2 3 4 5 6 b7 Xa 0 1 0 1 b0 1 2 3 4 5 6 b7 Xa 0 1 0 1 b0 1 2 3 4 5 6 b7 0 Xb Xa Xb Xb Xa Xb MULTI FRAME ALIGNMENT SIGNAL MAS REMOTE MULTI ALARM 0 NORMAL 1 MULTI FRAME LOSS FRAME 0 FRAME 1 FRAME 15 SIGNALING DATA OF CH1 SIGNALING DATA OF CH16 SIGNALING DATA OF...

Page 227: ... channel 128 time slots 1 Basic Highway channel 128 time slots Assign trunk numbers to each channel number on the DTI card The system allocates time slots to consec utive channels from the lowest to the high est channel number assigned To minimize the number of time slots allocated assign trunk numbers to consecutive channels on each card Never skip channels in CM07 1 2 Y 01 XX ZZ XX 04 15 20 31 A...

Page 228: ...20 31 AP No assigned by CM05 Y 0 0 12 Multi Frame 1 24 Multi Frame Y 02 Zero Code Suppression 04 15 20 31 AP No assigned by CM05 Y 0 0 Available 1 Not available Y 03 04 15 20 31 AP No assigned by CM05 Y 0 7 Associated Channel Interoffice Signaling Assign a trunk route number for tie line in terface to each DTI NOTE The DTI route must be separated from any analog trunk route 1 2 Y 00 000 255 Trunk ...

Page 229: ...1 2 Y 09 Incoming Connection Signaling 00 63 Trunk Route No 03 Wink Start 04 Delay Dial 05 Immediate Start 06 2nd DT Timing Start CM35 Y 19 DTI PAD For Other Countries 1 2 1 2 Y 19 DTI Pad 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 3 Programmable PAD See CM42 4 7 Fixed PAD See left table Y 20 Sender start condition 00 63 Trunk Route No 00 Wink Start 01 Delay Dial 02 Ground Start 15 Timing Start CM35 B T R Transmitter...

Page 230: ...w CM42 C D T R Transmitter PAD Receiver PAD Gain Loss PATTERN PAD DATA PATTERNS CONNECTING PATTERNS 1ST DATA CM35 Y 19 2ND DATA 0 CM35 Y 19 2ND DATA 1 CM35 Y 19 2ND DATA 2 CM35 Y 19 2ND DATA 3 50 65 50 54 58 62 STA TONE DTI 51 55 59 63 COT DID LDT DTI 52 56 60 64 ODT DTI 53 57 61 65 DTI DTI PATTERNS PAD DATA OF DTI T R dB REMARKS 2ND DATA OTHERS 00 15 00 0 0 01 2 2 02 3 3 03 0 6 04 3 8 05 3 3 06 6...

Page 231: ...th 01 15 64 ms 512 ms 32 ms increments If no data is set the default setting is 32 ms 1 2 Y 3 03 Wink Delay Detection Timeout 01 15 1 sec 15 sec 1 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 7 sec Assign an access code for the DTI trunk route 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code 100 163 Trunk Route No 00 63 NOTE The Least Cost Routing or Route Advance feature is availa...

Page 232: ... time slots 1 Basic Highway channel 128 time slots Assign trunk numbers to each channel number on the DTI card The system allocates time slots to consec utive channels from the lowest to highest channel number assigned To minimize the number of time slots allocated assign trunk numbers to consecutive channels on each card Never skip channels in CM07 1 2 Y 01 XX ZZ XX 04 15 20 31 AP No assigned by ...

Page 233: ...e shows the re lationship between CMAA Y 01 and CMAA Y 02 1 2 Y 01 Frame Configuration 04 15 20 31 AP No assigned by CM05 Y 0 0 12 Multi Frame 1 24 Multi Frame 1 2 Y 02 Zero Code Suppression 04 15 20 31 AP No assigned by CM05 Y 0 0 Available 1 Not available 1 2 Y 03 04 15 20 31 AP No assigned by CM05 Y 0 7 Associated Channel Interoffice Signaling CMAA A B DTI INITIAL Indicates 2nd data CMAA Y 01 F...

Page 234: ...Mode or Night Mode Mode A or Mode B for incoming C O calls 1 2 Y 02 Day Mode Y 03 Night Mode Y 40 Mode A Y 41 Mode B 000 255 Trunk No assigned by CM07 Y 01 02 Trunk Line Appearance 03 Trunk Line Appearance TAS 04 Direct In Termination 08 Dial in 09 Automated Attendant 10 Attendant Console TAS 11 Attendant Console Trunk Line Appearance 12 Attendant Console Trunk Line Appearance TAS 14 Termination t...

Page 235: ...TMF DTMF 1 2 Y 04 Answer Signal from distant office 00 63 Trunk Route No 2 Answer Signal arrives 7 Answer Signal does not arrive 1 2 Y 05 Release Signal from distant of fice 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 Release Signal does not arrive Loop Start C O w o Release Sig nal 1 Release Signal arrives Ground Start Loop Start with Re lease Signal 1 2 Y 09 Incoming Connection Signaling 00 63 Trunk Route No 01 Ring...

Page 236: ...data is set the default setting is 512 ms 1 2 Y 3 06 Answer Signal Detect Timing 01 15 64 ms 960 ms 64 ms increments If no data is set the default setting is 576 ms 1 2 Y 3 07 Ringing Signal Detect Timing 01 15 512 ms 7 680 ms 512 ms increments If no data is set the default setting is 7 168 ms 1 2 Y 3 08 Guard Timing of DTI release 01 15 128 ms 1 920 ms 128 ms increments If no data is set the defa...

Page 237: ...ms 1 2 Y 3 12 Ground Start Return Ground de tect timing 01 15 1 sec 15 sec 1 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 7 sec Assign an access code for the DTI trunk route used as a C O line interface 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code 100 163 Trunk Route No 00 63 NOTE The Least Cost Routing or Route Advance feature is also available for call origina tion via the DT...

Page 238: ...s to consecutive channels from lowest to the highest channel number assigned To minimize the number of time slots allocat ed assign trunk numbers to con secutive channels on each card Never skip channels in CM07 1 2 Y 01 XX ZZ XX 04 15 20 31 AP No assigned by CM05 Y 0 ZZ 01 15 17 31 Channel No of 30 DTI D000 D255 Trunk No Any trunk number already assigned by CM10 cannot be used Assign a trunk rout...

Page 239: ...iate Start 06 2nd DT Timing Start 1 2 Y 19 DTI Pad 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 3 Programmable PAD See CM42 4 7 Fixed PAD See left table 1 2 Y 20 Sender start condition 00 63 Trunk Route No 00 Wink Start 01 Delay Dial 02 Ground Start 15 Timing Start 1 2 Y 89 Cyclic Redundancy Checking for Bit Error Detection 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 To provide CM35 A T R Transmitter PAD Receiver PAD CONNECTION PATTERNS PA...

Page 240: ...itter PAD Receiver PAD Gain Loss PATTERN PAD DATA PATTERNS CONNECTING PATTERNS 1ST DATA CM35 Y 19 2ND DATA 0 CM35 Y 19 2ND DATA 1 CM35 Y 19 2ND DATA 2 CM35 Y 19 2ND DATA 3 50 65 50 54 58 62 STA TONE DTI 51 55 59 63 COT DID LDT DTI 52 56 60 64 ODT DTI 53 57 61 65 DTI DTI PATTERNS PAD DATA OF DTI T R dB REMARKS 2ND DATA AUSTRALIA OTHERS 00 15 00 0 0 0 0 01 3 3 2 2 02 8 8 3 3 03 6 6 0 6 04 0 0 3 8 05...

Page 241: ...l width 01 15 64 ms 512 ms 32 ms increments If no data is set the default setting is 32 ms 1 2 Y 3 03 Wink Delay Detection Timeout 01 15 1 sec 15 sec 1 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 7 sec Assign an access code for the DTI trunk route 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code 100 163 Trunk Route No 00 63 NOTE The Least Cost Routing or Route Advance feature is a...

Page 242: ... Y 00 Trunk Route Allocation 000 255 Trunk No 00 63 Trunk Route No Y 01 Tenant Allocation 000 255 Trunk No 00 63 Tenant No 01 Tenant No Y 02 Terminating System in Day Mode Y 03 Terminating System in Night Mode Y 40 Terminating System in Mode A Y 41 Terminating System in Mode B 000 255 Trunk No 31 DID Tie line and any call which is not handled by the PBX Assign the data for DID to the trunk routes ...

Page 243: ... 2 Y 18 Received Digit Conversion 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 To provide 1 Not provided 1 2 Y 59 Call Waiting for DID call 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 To provide 1 Not provided NOTE When 2nd data is set to 1 the Trunk ID number assigned by CM30 Y 19 is displayed 1 2 Y 75 DID incoming LDN Display on Dterm ATTCON DESKCON 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 Available 1 Not available NOTE 1 2 Y 78 Digit conversion of leadin...

Page 244: ...tion does not an swer the DID Tie Line call 0800 Announcement Service when the DID Tie Line call terminates to the busy station Assign the destination of DID call trans ferred when the station is busy unas signed no answer NOTE When Announcement Service is provided for No Answer CM51 Y 00 or Busy CM51Y 03 see ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE page 21 When Announcement Service is provided for unassigned CM51 Y ...

Page 245: ...received 1 2 Y 01 Day Mode Y 02 Night Mode Y 03 Mode A Y 04 Mode B 000 999 Number Conversion Block No assigned by CM76 Y 00 X XXXXXXXX Station No to be termi nated DXX Change Terminating System to D02 Trunk Line Appearance D03 Trunk Line Appearance TAS D04 Direct In Termination D09 Automated Attendant D10 Attendant Console TAS D11 Attendant Console Trunk Line Appearance D12 Attendant Console Trunk...

Page 246: ... Mode A B when DID call terminates HARDWARE REQUIRED AUC card or 4DIT card DID Trunk DESCRIPTION DATA Assign the tenant for Day Night Mode Mode A B per each station number re ceived on DID call 1 2 Y 05 000 999 Number Conversion Block No assigned by CM76 Y 00 00 63 Tenant No START END CM76 ...

Page 247: ...ation 000 255 Trunk No 00 63 Trunk Route No NOTE Y 01 Tenant Allocation 000 255 Trunk No 00 63 Tenant No 01 Tenant No Y 08 Restriction on Night Mode 000 255 Trunk No 0 Restricted 1 Allow Assign the data for Direct Outward Dialing to the Route number assigned by CM30 Y 00 NOTE For Resident System Program refer to the Command Manual 1 2 1 2 1 2 Y 00 Kind of Route 00 63 Trunk Route No 00 C O Line Y 0...

Page 248: ...o 3 To send 1 2 Y 09 Incoming Connection Signalling 00 63 Trunk Route No 01 Ring Down Ground Start 15 Ring Down Loop Start 1 2 Y 39 Trunk Release by Reverse Signal from C O 00 63 Trunk Route No 1 To release According to the characteristics of each C O line assign the data for DP DTMF Sender to each route For details of the command refer to Com mand Manual NOTE For Resident System Program refer to ...

Page 249: ...igit Pause on outgoing C O call 1 2 Y 0 27 03 14 3 sec 14 sec 1 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 7 sec Assign the access code to each route 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code 100 163 Trunk Route No 00 63 Assign the trunk appearance line key on a Dterm if provided 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No D000 D255 Trunk No CM20 CM90 END CM41 B ...

Page 250: ...ATTCON DESKCON No Assign the station and trunk numbers as needed to the keys on each DSS Con sole 1 2 DSS Console No 00 31 DSS Key No 00 59 X XXXXXXXX Station No D000 D255 Trunk No Assign a Do Not Disturb Message Wait ing Wake Up and UCD Busy out function key if needed on each DSS Console 1 2 DSS Console No 00 31 DSS Key No 57 59 F1049 Message Waiting Set Reset F1053 Do Not Disturb Set Reset F1054...

Page 251: ... the line lockout indication on the DSS Console 1 2 274 0 Available 1 Not available Assign the UCD Busy Out indication on the DSS Console 1 2 265 0 To provide 1 Not provided Specify the type of busy indication on the BLF of the DSS Console as station base or extension base 1 2 269 0 Station base 1 Extension base END CM08 A ...

Page 252: ...ively 1 2 Y 04 Day Mode Y 05 Night Mode Y 42 Mode A Y 43 Mode B 000 255 Trunk No X XXXXXXXX Station No Assign the transfer destination when the DIT Station is busy not available in the Day Mode and Night Mode respectively 1 2 Y 13 Day Mode Y 14 Night Mode 000 255 Trunk No 01 TAS BUZZER 04 Attendant Console 06 Automatic Camp On 15 Waiting until the DIT station be comes idle Assign the transfer dest...

Page 253: ...n the ring cadence on DIT Call 1 2 179 0 As per CM35 Y 33 1 As per CM08 392 Pattern 2 Specify the timing for an unanswered call to a DIT destination 1 2 Y 0 01 01 30 4 sec 120 sec 4 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 32 36 sec END CM08 A CM41 ...

Page 254: ...r s requirements 1 2 137 For Consultation Hold 0 Change from Internal Ringing CM08 138 to External Ringing CM35 Y 33 when transferring a call 1 External Ringing CM35 Y 33 1 2 138 For Internal call 0 As per CM08 392 Pattern 1 1 As per CM08 396 1 2 179 For DIT call 0 As per CM35 Y 33 1 As per CM08 392 Pattern 2 1 2 180 For DID Remote Access to Sys tem Automated Attendant Call 0 As per CM08 392 Patte...

Page 255: ...0 4 sec ON 2 sec OFF Single Line Tel 1 0 2 sec ON 0 2 sec OFF 0 2 sec ON 0 2 sec OFF 0 2 sec ON 2 sec OFF Specify interval of ringing signal to station on incoming calls if required NOTE For incoming calls to a Trunk Line Appearance key on Dterms the special ringing 0 2 sec ON 0 2 sec OFF will be applied 1 2 Y 33 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 0 4 sec ON 0 2 sec OFF 0 4 sec ON 2 sec OFF NOTE 1 0 4 sec ON ...

Page 256: ...A Specify the lamp color for an incoming ex ternal call NOTE 1 The lamp color for incoming in ternal calls is red 120 IPM flash ing NOTE 2 For indicating the termination of a transferred external incoming call the flashing lamp color de pends on CM08 137 1 2 Y 32 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 Green 120 IPM 1 Red 120 IPM END CM35 START ...

Page 257: ...e Specify lamp indication of Dterm until de tecting the kind of incoming call from Main PBX Centrex The lamp is lit until detection of the ringing frequency 1 2 382 0 Red Steady Light 1 120 IPM Flash As per CM35 Y 32 Specify ringing distinction by detecting the ringing signal from the Main PBX Centr ex 1 2 366 0 Longer Ringing than CM41 Y 2 40 External call Shorter Ringing than CM41 Y 2 40 Interna...

Page 258: ...l NOTE 1 The lamp color for incoming in ternal calls is red 120 IPM flash ing NOTE 2 For indicating the termination of a transferred external incoming call the flashing lamp color de pends on CM08 137 1 2 Y 32 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 Green 120 IPM 1 Red 120 IPM Specify the interval of ringing signal to a Dterm on an incoming call 1 2 Y 33 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 0 4 sec ON 0 2 sec OFF 0 4 sec ON 2 s...

Page 259: ...erm 1 2 Y 18 000 255 Trunk No 0 To provide 1 Not provided Assign the ringing detect timer for incom ing trunk calls 1 2 Y 2 00 06 10 192 ms 320 ms 32 ms increments If no data is set the default setting is 256 288 ms Assign the Main PBX Centrex ringing distinction timer NOTE 1 on next page 1 2 Y 2 40 01 15 128 ms 1920 ms 128 ms increments If no data is set the default setting is 1280 1408 ms Assign...

Page 260: ...low NOTE 2 When Immediate Ringing is not provided on Main PBX be sure to set CM41 Y 2 41 as 00 Assign theTrunk Line Appearance key to a Dterm 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No D000 D255 Trunk No Provide the tone ringer on call termination NOTE When CM30Y 02 03 2nd data is 03 this setting is required 1 2 Y 01 My Line No Key No 0 Disabled 1 Enabled CM41 CM90 END A sec B sec Main PBX Ringing Station termina...

Page 261: ...ne to Dterm if required 1 2 Y 05 X XXXXXXXX Station No 0 Accommodated Assign the station numbers trunk num bers or service feature access keys on each Dterm if required 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No Refer to Command Manual CM90 Specify the type of Dterm accommodated in each DLC card NOTE 1 For 4DLC card assign this data to the first LEN Level 0 of each card For 8DLC card assign this data to first Lev...

Page 262: ...ing Call Preset Answer Preset functions to Dterm if required 1 2 145 0 Available 1 Not available Specify whether the answer key rings on TAS and Pooled Line or not 1 2 116 0 Available 1 Not available Specify the Delayed Ringing timing 1 2 Y 1 09 01 10 2 sec 20 sec 2 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 10 sec Provide Trunk Line Appearance to the trunk number 1 2 Y 18 000 255 Tru...

Page 263: ...ndicate the busy idle status of the extensions accommodated to the Flexible Line Keys on the Dterm 75 without One Touch keys assign the following data Speed Calling Station memory and One Touch Key memory assignment are used to imprement this feature DESCRIPTION DATA Assign Service Restriction Class A to re quired stations 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX Station No XX ZZ XX 00 15 Service Restriction Class A A...

Page 264: ...or programming the dialed number from the station 0 1 Effective Ineffective ZZ 01 10 Number of 10 Slot Memory Blocks NOTE 1000 Slot Memory Block No 4 9 6000 Memory Parcels can not be used to pro vide BLF function on Dterm line key Example If the stored number intended is 10 for Station Number 300 20 for Station Num ber 301 and 30 for Station Number 302 the memory areas assignment is as fol lows Me...

Page 265: ...e 0 9 If the number of Memory Parcels per station exceeds 11 then Abbreviated Code 00 99 The following figure shows the relation between Abbreviated Codes and Memory Parcels CM73 C B 0 In the case of 10 Memory Parcels Memory Parcel Number 10 Slot Memory Block Abbrev Code 1 2 3 4 5 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 9 0 In the case of 20 Memory Parcels Memory Parcel Number 10 Slot Memory Block Abbrev Code 1 9 0 1 9 00 ...

Page 266: ...y Assign Speed Calling Station keys on each Dterm For the key number and the last two digits of the second data assign the same num ber as follows 1st Data 2ndData XXXXXXXX 01 F1101 XXXXXXXX 02 F1102 XXXXXXXX 03 F1103 XXXXXXXX 16 F1116 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No F11XX XX 00 99 Speed Calling Station 00 99 NOTE 1 The initial setting of key layout is for 16 Line Trunk Feature keys key No 01 16 When u...

Page 267: ...sign the Service Restriction Class B for this feature to required stations 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX Station No XX ZZ ZZ 00 15 Service Restriction Class B Allow Dual Hold in the Service Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 64 00 15 Service Restriction Class B as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow CM15 START END CM12 ...

Page 268: ...DWARE REQUIRED Dterm and DLC card DESCRIPTION DATA Assign a Prime line to the Dterm 1 2 X XXXXXXXX My Line No X XXXXXXXX Station No Assign Service Restriction Class A to re quired stations 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX Station No XX ZZ XX 00 15 Service Restriction Class A Allow Dynamic Dial Pad in the Service Re striction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 120 00 15 Service Restriction Class A 0 Allow CM15...

Page 269: ...Dterm and DLC card DESCRIPTION DATA Provide the system with Exclusive Hold 1 2 130 1 Available Specify the Recall timing on Exclusive Hold 1 2 Y 0 06 01 98 4 sec 392 sec 4 sec increments 99 Recall is not performed If no data is set the default setting is 236 240 sec CM41 START END CM08 ...

Page 270: ...EXECUTIVE CALLING 250 A2247 10 EXECUTIVE CALLING PROGRAMMING DESCRIPTION DATA Assign VIP class to the required station 1 2 Y 21 X XXXXXXXX Station No 0 To provide START END CM13 ...

Page 271: ...5 Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign the access code for Executive Right of Way 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A006 Executive Right of Way Assign an Executive Right of Way key to Dterm if required 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No F0006 Executive Right of Way Make the Conference trunk on the MP card in Service 1 2 Y 6 00 15 CFT Circuit No 1 In service...

Page 272: ...EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY Dterm 252 A2247 10 HARDWARE REQUIRED Dterm and DLC card if required ...

Page 273: ...FAULT MESSAGE 253 A2247 10 FAULT MESSAGE PROGRAMMING Refer to Maintenance Manual ...

Page 274: ...t to the number of facsimile call stations that can be assigned to each facsimile station 1 Hot Line DESCRIPTION DATA Assign the fax call station number This number is used as the fax call indicator button on the Dterm Also this is the num ber to which the incoming fax call is direct ed 1 2 000 763 LEN X XXXXXXXX Single Line Station No FX FXXXXXXX My Line No Assign a virtual number to be used as a...

Page 275: ...n called side This is the actual single line port to be connected to the facsimile ma chine X XXXXXXXX Station No Specify the accommodation of the fax call station to Dterm NOTE This command needs to be set when assigning a single line sta tion as a fax call station number by CM10 1 2 Y 05 X XXXXXXXX FAX Call Station No 0 To accommodate 1 Not accommodated Assign the fax call station number as the ...

Page 276: ...XXXXXX Single Line Station No FX FXXXXXXX My Line No Assign a virtual number to be used as a fax call station number Similar to CM10 above but using a virtual extension instead of a real station number 1 2 000 255 Virtual LEN X XXXXXXXX Virtual Extension No Assign the function of fax call station to the station or virtual extension assigned above in either CM10 or CM11 1 2 Y 29 X XXXXXXXX Station ...

Page 277: ...FAX Call Station No This is the extension to which the call is direct ed and will be the fax call indicator on the Dterm 00 03 FAX Call Station Group No as signed by CM51 Specify the accommodation of the fax call station to Dterm NOTE This command needs to be set when assigning a single line sta tion as a fax call station number by CM10 1 2 Y 05 X XXXXXXXX FAX Call Station No 0 To accommodate 1 No...

Page 278: ...e hooking signal sending to outside to the route number as signed by CM30 Y 00 1 2 Y 16 00 63 Trunk Route No 1 Sending Assign the DTMF Signal Width if the data of CM35 Y 01 is 4 or 7 to the route num ber assigned by CM30 Y 00 1 2 Y 26 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 64 ms 1 128 ms Specify the duration of hooking signal to outside 1 2 Y 2 17 02 30 128 ms 1920 ms 64 ms increments If no data is set the defaul...

Page 279: ...ollowing features are used do not assign 5 or more digits station number SMDR PMS CIS Front Desk Terminal Dterm OAI 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X 1st digit of station No 801 1 digit 802 2 digits 803 3 digits 804 4 digits 805 5 digits 806 6 digits 807 7 digits 808 8 digits Assign station numbers to required LEN according to the Numbering Plan specified by CM20 For feature and truk access cod...

Page 280: ...ernal calls 1 2 Y 83 84 00 15 Service Restriction Class C assigned by CM12 Y 07 0 See left table 1 See left table Specify the ring tone for incoming calls to each trunk route 1 2 Y 34 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 1024 1285 Hz 16 Hz 1 480 606 Hz 8 Hz 2 600 700 Hz 3 480 606 Hz 16 Hz Disable the ringing on each line key of a Dterm if required 1 2 Y 01 Day Mode My Line No Key No 0 Disable Refer to DELAYED R...

Page 281: ...02 X XXXXXXXX Station No XX ZZ ZZ 00 15 Service Restriction Class B Allow Off Hook Ringing for incoming calls to Line Trunk Keys on Dterms in the Ser vice Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 Y 02 NOTE This data is effective in the fol lowing status Hook Switch OFF HOOK SPEAKER Lamp OFF 1 2 Y 68 00 15 Service Restriction Class B as signed by CM12 Y 02 0 Restricted 1 Allow CM15 END A CM12 ...

Page 282: ...ccount Code 1 2 362 0 No tone 1 Service Set Tone Assign the Service Restriction Class A for Forced Account Code to required stations 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX My Line No XX ZZ XX 00 15 Service Restriction Class A Allow Forced Account Code in the Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 31 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign the access code for Forced Ac...

Page 283: ...o Assign the purpose of ID Code 1 2 Y 10 0000 2999 ID Code Pattern No 0 Validate the ID Code entered from stations and trunks 1 Validate the ID Code entered from stations 3 Invalidate the ID Code entered from stations and trunks Assign the desiredTrunk Restriction Class for each ID Code Pattern number 1 2 Y 11 0000 2999 ID Code Pattern No 1 Unrestricted RCA 2 Non Restricted 1 RCB 3 Non Restricted ...

Page 284: ...Assign the desired Service Restriction Class A to each ID Code Pattern number The features available in each class are assigned by CM15 1 2 Y 12 0000 2999 ID Code Pattern No 00 15 Service Restriction Class A Assign the desired Service Restriction Class B to each ID Code Pattern number The features available in each class are assigned by CM15 1 2 Y 13 0000 2999 ID Code Pattern No 00 15 Service Rest...

Page 285: ...X Station No XX ZZ XX 00 15 Service Restriction Class A Allow Forced Account Code in the Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 31 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Set the ID Code and its temporary Service Class used for Forced Account Code For the details of the programming refer to AUTHORIZATION CODE with AP01 card page 52 Y 0 Y 1 Y 3 Y A Assign t...

Page 286: ...can be defined The number of codes varies with the number of digits assigned to each code For details refer to APPENDIX D FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS page D1 NOTE 2 When deleting all ID codes stored in the AP01 card at one time do the following oper ation HARDWARE REQUIRED EXPMEM card on MP card or AP01 card if required ST EXE D60 0000 DE DE CCC ...

Page 287: ...p Diversion Group 1 2 Y 2 Group Diversion Group X XXXXXXXX Station No to be included in a Group Diversion Group 00 30 Group Diversion Group No Assign the destination for each Group Di version Group to the required stations 1 2 Y 6 00 30 Group Diversion Group No X XXXXXXXX Diversion Group No Assign the timing for transferring a call us ing this feature 1 2 Y 0 01 01 30 4 sec 120 sec 4 sec increment...

Page 288: ...sign the Service Restriction Class B for Group Listening to the required Dterm 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX Station No XX ZZ ZZ 00 15 Service Restriction Class B Allow Group Listening in the Service Re striction Class B assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 70 00 15 Service Restriction Class B as signed by CM12 Y 02 0 Allow START CM12 CM15 END ...

Page 289: ...HANDS FREE ANSWER BACK Dterm 269 A2260 10 HANDS FREE ANSWER BACK Dterm PROGRAMMING Refer to VOICE CALL ATTENDANT and VOICE CALL Dterm page 568 ...

Page 290: ... 1 Up to 100 Hot Line stations 50 pair can be set 1 2 1 2 Y 00 99 Hot Line Pair No 0 Calling Side X XXXXXXXX Station No Data Sta tion No assigned by CM12 Y 03 1 Called Side X XXXXXXXX Station No Data Sta tion No E000 E007 Attendant Console No NOTE 2 Do not assign station number with first digit 0 Specify the result of Switch Hook Flash on Hot Line station To allow Hot Line stations to transfer a c...

Page 291: ... the Hot Line Outside call For example to assign the 10 Hot Line Outside calls into No 100 through No 109 Memory Slots 2nd data is 100010 Ab breviated Codes are automatically as signed as shown below Abbrev Code Memory Slot No 100 00 Memory Slot No 109 09 1 2 65 For Hot Line Outside XXX YYY XXX 000 299 Starting Memory Slot No YYY 001 100 Number of Memory Slots required CM71 START CM12 A ...

Page 292: ...ER CODE TABLE 1 2 Y 2 000 299 Memory Slot No XXX X Station Name Character by MAT CAT Max 16 characters Assign the Hot Line pairs 1 2 Y 00 99 Hot Line Pair No 0 Calling Station 1 Called Outside Party X XXXXXXXX Station No For Calling Station CXX For Called Outside Party XX Abbreviated Code given by CM71 NOTE Do not assign station number with first digit 0 Specify the result of Switch Hook Flash on ...

Page 293: ...ion of each House Phone Group 1 2 Y 14 00 03 House Phone Group 0 3 X XXXXXXXX Station No of the desti nation E000 Attendant Console For assigning the Attendant Console as destination set E000 to each House Phone Group Specify the result of Switch Hook Flash on stations within each House Phone Group To allow stations within a House Phone Group to transfer a call or access a fea ture set the data to...

Page 294: ...ENDING PROGRAMMING DESCRIPTION DATA Provide the system with Howler Tone sent to locked out stations 1 2 153 1 To provide Assign the HowlerTone Sending feature to the required stations 1 2 Y 04 X XXXXXXXX Station No 1 To provide START CM08 END CM13 ...

Page 295: ...n Class C for the Immediate Ringing to required Single Line Stations 1 2 Y 07 X XXXXXXXX Station No 00 15 Service Restriction Class C Allow Immediate Ringing in the Service Restriction Class C assigned by CM12 Y 07 1 2 Y 80 00 15 Service Restriction Class C as signed by CM12 Y 07 1 Allow CM15 START CM12 END ...

Page 296: ... 00 07 C O Incoming Call 0 7 40 47 Tie Line Incoming Call 0 7 50 53 Special Operator Call 0 3 54 Priority Call 0 55 Priority Call 1 56 Emergency Call 60 Operator Call 61 Recall 62 Serial Call 63 Call Forwarding Don t Answer 64 Call Forwarding Busy Line 65 Call Forwarding Intercept 66 Off Hook Alarm 67 Interposition Calling Transfer Assign the required Attendant Call Selec tion keys and Function ke...

Page 297: ...urce 91 F6201 Destination DEST F6201 Destination 93 F6203 Talk Talk NONE 94 F6204 Hold Hold F6204 Hold 95 F6202 Cancel Cancel F6202 Cancel 96 Answer Answer 97 Release Release NOTE When the DESKCON is used to set hotel features the Reset key should be as signed to one of the feature keys i e key 21 in the Idle state mode A END L6 12 L5 11 L4 10 L3 09 L2 08 L1 07 0 8 9 6 3 5 2 1 4 7 SRC 90 DEST 91 9...

Page 298: ...55 Trunk No 14 Termination to Attendant Console Assign the route data to C O trunks and Tie Line trunks 1 2 1 2 Y 00 Kind of trunk route 00 63 Trunk Route No 00 C O Line 04 Tie Line Y 02 IC OG 00 63 Trunk Route No 1 Incoming trunk 2 Outgoing trunk 3 Bothway trunk Set 1 or 3 to C O Line and 2 or 3 to Tie Line 1 2 1 2 Y 04 Answer Signal on Tie Line 00 63 Trunk Route No of Tie Line 2 Answer Signal ar...

Page 299: ...NE ACCESS page 507 HARDWARE REQUIRED LDT card or ODT card DESCRIPTION DATA Allow trunk to trunk connection 1 2 Y 0 XX ZZ XX 00 63 Incoming Trunk Route No C O Line ZZ 00 63 Outgoing Trunk Route No Tie Line 0 Allow Specify the service for trunk to trunk trans fer before called party answers 1 2 206 0 Available 1 Not available CM08 END CM36 A ...

Page 300: ...gramming DESCRIPTION DATA Assign an Attendant Console number to each ATTCON DESKCON 1 2 000 763 LEN E000 E007 ATTCON No Assign the access code for Individual At tendant Access 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A095 Allow or restrict Individual Attendant Ac cess from a station belonging to another tenant which is not allocated to the Atten dant Console 1 2 143 0 Restrict 1 Allow...

Page 301: ...Trunk No assigned by CM10 D000 D255 XXXX Trunk ID Code Set any desired number 4 digits for Trunk ID Code NOTE By loading Resident System Program Trunk Identification Codes are assigned as fol lows 1 XXX XXX 000 255 Trunk No Assign the Service Restriction Class B for Individual Trunk Access to required sta tions 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX Station No XX ZZ ZZ 00 15 Service Restriction Class B Allow Individ...

Page 302: ... 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A095 Assign the Attendant Call Selection key for this feature on the ATTCON DESKCON 1 2 Y 00 ATTCON No E000 E007 Key No F6067 Inter Position Calling Allow or restrict Inter Position Transferred call to another tenant s Attendant Console If the data is set to 1 a call from any sta tion can be transferred to another Atten dant Console regardless o...

Page 303: ...tion Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign Internal Zone Paging access codes and Meet Me answer codes as required 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access code A130 A137 Paging Access Group 0 7 A138 A145 Meet Me Answer Group 0 7 Assign the Dterms into the Internal Zone Paging Groups NOTE A maximum of 8 internal zone paging is available Up to 16 Dterms can be grouped per zone 1 2 Y 0...

Page 304: ...n Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 49 00 15 Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign an All Zone Internal Paging access code as required 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access code A164 All Zone Internal Paging Access Assign Group for Internal Zone Paging to the required Dterms NOTE A maximum of 6 zones 0 5 in ternal paging groups are avail able Up to 16 Dterms...

Page 305: ...alls with this feature If the data for CM08 178 is set to 0 this feature will be only applied to outgoing calls 1 2 178 0 Not available 1 Available Assign the access code for Last Number Call 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A069 Assign the Last Number Call feature ac cess key onto each Dterm 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No F0069 Last Number Call Assign the Last Number Call Stack D...

Page 306: ...estriction Pattern 01 13 00 14 and 15 are fixed 1 2 Y 01 13 Toll Restriction Pattern No 01 13 1 8 Trunk Restriction Class 0 Restricted 3 Allowed CM81 START CM20 A 0 Restricted 3 Allowed TRUNK RESTRICTION CLASS Y 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 00 TOLL RESTRICTION PATTERN NUMBER ON EACH TRUNK RESTRICTION CLASS 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 00 1 RCA 3 0 3 3 3 0 0 0 3 3 3 ...

Page 307: ...mber assigned by CM8A Y 4005 4007 1 2 Y 0000 0255 Route Pattern No 000 255 1 4 Order of LCR Selection 1 1st 2 2nd 3 3rd 4 4th XXX ZZ XXX 000 255 LCR Pattern No 000 255 ZZ 00 63 Trunk Route No 00 63 For area code deletion designate the dig its to be deleted To delete all digits of the area code 1 2 Y 5000 5255 LCR Pattern No 000 255 151 Deletion of all digits of the area code assigned by CM8A Y 400...

Page 308: ...00 9255 Digit Addition Pattern No 000 255 CCC No digit addition Y 9000 9255 Digit Addition Pattern No 000 255 0 X X X Digits to be added Max 32 digits X 0 9 A B C Fixed Pause If 3 digitToll Restriction is provided assign the Toll Restriction Pattern number to the LCR Pattern number 1 2 Y 5000 5255 LCR Pattern No 000 255 000 00 15 Toll Restriction Pattern No specified by CM81 CM8A B C ...

Page 309: ...on Restricted 1 RCB 023 Non Restricted 2 RCC 024 Semi Restricted 1 RCD 025 Semi Restricted 1 RCE 026 Restricted 1 RCF 027 Restricted 2 RCG 028 Fully Restricted 2 RCH 0 6 digit Toll Restriction Pattern 1 3 digit Toll Restriction Pattern as per CM8A Y 5000 5255 1st Da ta 000 2 Assign the 6 digit Toll Restriction Pat tern number to the LCR Pattern num ber 1 2 Y 5000 5255 020 8000 8049 6 digit Toll Re...

Page 310: ...ximum number of digits to be dialed by calling party The maximum number of digits including the area codes should be assigned to each area code 1 2 Y 5 7 Area Code Development Pattern No 5 7 assigned by CM8A Y A000 X X X Area code dialed Max 8 digits 01 24 1 digit 24 digits 25 79 25 digits 79 digits Provide the Toll Restriction feature to the required trunk routes 1 2 Y 11 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 T...

Page 311: ...A CODE 4005 4007 2000 2007 3000 3003 TIME PATTERN DATE PATTERN AREA CODE DEVELOPMENT PATTERN TENANT PATTERN 1000 1015 5000 5255 LCR PATTERN 0000 0255 ROUTE PATTERN TRUNK ROUTE SELECTION 1ST 2ND 3RD 4TH DIGIT ADDITION TRUNK RESTRICTION PATTERN 00 15 DIGIT DELETION DIGIT ADDITION 9000 9255 CM8A ...

Page 312: ...00 2nd _ _ _ _ _ Route 01 Digits to be sent out to Route 00 811 XXXX Digits to be sent out to Route 01 03 566 XXXX Station dialing numbers 8 11 XXXX 8 LCR Access Code 11 Office Code of Office A XXXX Station No Toll Restriction Not provided PSTN OFFICE A TIE LINE ROUTE 00 ROUTE 01 XXXX STATION PBX ...

Page 313: ... 5000 5000 9000 5001 5001 5001 9001 0 DATA 2 8 A126 Area Code Development pattern 5 Route Pattern 000 1st 2nd No Toll Restriction Area Code deletion 811 addition No Toll Restriction Area Code deletion 03 566 addition CM85 Y AREA CODE 1 5 DATA 2 11 06 Route 00 LCR Pattern 000 Route 01 LCR Pattern 001 For LCR Pattern 000 For LCR Pattern 001 6 digits Including area code Area Code Development Pattern ...

Page 314: ... Toll Restriction No Restriction X Restriction Station Dialing Numbers TRUNK RESTRICTION CLASS 1 9 Local 03 Exclusive of Office A 00 02 04 09 Exclusive of Office B RCA RCB X RCC X X RCD X X RCE X X PSTN OFFICE B TIE LINE ROUTE 00 ROUTE 01 8 12 2XXX STATION PBX Office A 04281 2XXX 8 11 2XXX 811 2XXX To call a station of Office A Office Code or 812 2XXX To call a station of Office B Office Code 0 03...

Page 315: ...LEAST COST ROUTING 3 6 DIGIT 295 A2286 10 Programming for Example 2 Continued on next page CM20 Y ACCESS CODE 1 DATA 2 0 0 A126 LCR Group 0 ...

Page 316: ...0 Route Pattern 002 Route Pattern 003 Route Pattern 001 LCR Pattern 000 Area Code Development Pattern 5 Route Pattern 000 Toll Call to Office A Route Pattern 001 Toll Call to Office B Route Pattern 002 Local Call Route Pattern 002 Toll Call to Area Code 03 excluding Office A Route Pattern 003 Toll Call to Area Code 00 09 excluding Office B 1st 2nd 1st 2nd Route 01 LCR Pattern 002 Route 01 LCR Patt...

Page 317: ... 1 1 812 Addition Area Code 03 5662 is not to be deleted Area Code 042812 is not to be deleted Area Code 1 9 03 is not to be deleted Area Code 00 09 is not to be deleted CM85 Y AREA CODE 1 DATA 2 01 09 1 9 00 5 09 07 15 Toll Call 9 digits Local Call 7 digits International Call 15 digits Area Code Development Pattern 5 ...

Page 318: ...ern number to each area code for the Area Code Development Pattern number assigned by CM8A Y A000 1 2 Y 4005 4007 Area Code Development Pattern No 5 7 X X X Area Code Max 8 digits 3000 3003 Date Pattern No 0 3 Assign the Time Pattern number to each day of the week for the Date Pattern num ber assigned by CM8A Y 4005 4007 1 2 Y 3000 3003 Date Pattern No 0 3 0 SUN 1 MON 2 TUE 3 WED 4 THU 5 FRI 6 SAT...

Page 319: ...nant Pattern No 00 15 If the Tenant Pattern number is assigned by CM8A Y 2000 2007 assign the Route Pattern number to the required Tenant number for the Tenant Pattern number 1 2 Y 1000 1015 Tenant Pattern No 00 15 00 63 Tenant No 00 63 0000 0255 Route Pattern No 000 255 END CM8A A Route Pattern 000 Route Pattern 000 Route Pattern 001 0 00 8 00 20 00 23 30 Y TIME 1 ROUTE PATTERN 2 2000 Time Patter...

Page 320: ...en the Howler Tone is provided CM08 153 1 assign Howler Tone send ing to required stations 1 2 Y 04 X XXXXXXXX Station No 1 To provide Specify the timing for Lockout Alarm 1 2 Y 0 22 01 08 4 sec 32 sec 4 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 28 32 sec Specify the number of stations in Line Lockout to give a MN Alarm 1 2 01 01 99 Number of Stations in Line Lockout If no data is se...

Page 321: ...ESELECTION Dterm PROGRAMMING HARDWARE REQUIRED Dterm and DLC card DESCRIPTION DATA Specify the operation of Line Preselection on a Dterm 1 2 199 0 Only desired line key 1 Speaker key is required after pressing the desired line key START CM08 END ...

Page 322: ...0 47 Tie Line Incoming Call 0 7 Assign the ICI key on ATTCON DESKCON 1 2 Y 00 ATTCON No E000 E007 Key No F6000 F6007 C O Incoming Call 0 7 F6040 F6047 Tie Line Incoming Call 0 7 Assign the indialed number to each LDN key or Tie Line key assigned by CM90 The indialed number should be different from any numbers assigned by CM10 and CM11 1 2 1 2 Y 01 For DID 0 Effective data in CM35 Y 15 1 8 LDN key ...

Page 323: ...Y 01 02 1 8 has been set 1 2 Y 00 Tenant No of LDN 00 Effective data in CM35 Y 15 01 08 LDN key 0 7 assigned by CM50 Y 01 10 Effective data in CM35 Y 15 11 18 Tie Line key 0 7 assigned by CM50 Y 02 00 63 Tenant No 1 2 Y 01 TAS Group No Same as CM58 Y 00 00 63 TAS Group No assigned by CM44 13 1 2 Y 02 Day Mode Destination of LDN Same as CM58 Y 00 00 07 LDN TIE key 0 7 08 To TAS 09 To the station ou...

Page 324: ...ering destination station Same as CM58 Y 00 00 To Attendant Console NANS key 08 To TAS 1 2 Y 07 Night Mode diversion for no an swering destination station Same as CM58 Y 00 Same as CM58 Y 06 If a station is designated by CM58 Y 02 03 assign the station number or abbrevi ated code for outside party to which the call is to be diverted 1 2 Y 08 Day Mode station number Same as CM58 Y 00 X XXXXXXXX Sta...

Page 325: ...ssign the station number of Long Line Circuit AUC card to required LEN NOTE The station number must be signed to the first LEN Level 0 and second LEN Level 1 of each LT slot 1 2 000 763 LEN X XXXXXXXX Station No Remove the PAD no long line station 1 2 Y 09 X XXXXXXXX Station No 0 No PAD CM13 START END CM10 ...

Page 326: ... line keys and feature keys 1 2 Y 00 Password Level 0 6 Y 01 Password Level 1 6 Y 02 Password Level 2 6 Y 03 Password Level 3 6 Y 04 Password Level 4 6 Y 05 Password Level 5 6 Y 06 Password Level 6 Y 10 Password Level 0 Y 11 Password Level 1 Y 12 Password Level 2 Y 13 Password Level 3 Y 14 Password Level 4 Y 15 Password Level 5 Y 16 Password Level 6 00 F8 Command Code exclusive of 03 E7 E9 0 Allow...

Page 327: ... Refer to MATWorX Installation Guide DESCRIPTION DATA Assign a password to each Password Lev el 1 2 0 7 Password Level 0 7 X X X Max 8 digits Password Code A password code for Password Level 7 should be assigned in advance because of providing the password service by CME9 9 The following passwords are not available CCCCCCCC FFFFFFFF Provide the system with Password Fea ture After setting this data...

Page 328: ...Manual Intercom group can consist of 2 to 6 Dterms A maximum of 25 Manual Inter com groups can be assigned per system 1 2 000 255 Virtual LEN A200 A224 A300 A324 A400 A424 A500 A524 A600 A624 A700 A724 Manual Intercom Number A X YY X 2 7 Serial No in a Group YY Manual Intercom Group No START CM11 A MANUAL INTERCOM GROUP No 00 01 A200 A300 A400 A500 A600 A700 A201 A301 A401 A501 A601 A701 24 A224 A...

Page 329: ... Line No of each Dterm to each Manual Intercom number 1 2 Y 11 A200 A724 Manual Intercom No as signed by CM11 X XXXXXXXX My Line No Assign the MANUAL INTERCOM key to each Dterm 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No A200 A724 Manual Intercom No of each Dterm Specify the Manual Intercom access capa bility when a called intercom station has set Do Not Disturb 1 2 238 0 Not Ring on 1 Ring on Allowed END CM12 A C...

Page 330: ...xternal Equip ment Interface of the MP card by setting CM44 Assign the Service Restriction Class A for Paging Access to the required stations 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX My Line No XX ZZ XX 00 15 Service Restriction Class A Allow Paging Access in the Service Re striction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 08 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign the Paging function to th...

Page 331: ...g Access Tone 0 To send 1 Not sent 1 2 096 Hookflash Signal to Paging Equip ment 0 To send 1 Not sent 1 2 149 Automatic Call Back when the paging station is busy through non delay operation 0 Available 1 Not available 1 2 157 Access code for Paging Access and Answer 0 Same 1 Different CM08 A B CM08 157 1 Different CM08 157 0 Same C ...

Page 332: ...a for Paging Trunk to the trunk number assigned by CM10 1 2 Y 00 Trunk Route allocation 000 255 Trunk No 00 63 Trunk Route No 1 2 Y 28 Zone Kind of Paging 000 255 Trunk No X Z X 0 9 Paging Answer Zone 0 9 Z Kind of Paging 0 No answer 2 Non delay answer 4 Non delay and delay answer Assign the Paging Trunk to the trunk route number assigned by CM30 Y 00 1 2 Y 00 00 63 Trunk Route No 05 Paging Trunk ...

Page 333: ...er assigned by CM10 as fol lows Paging Answer Zone Trunk Route 0 50 9 59 1 2 Y 00 Trunk Route allocation 000 255 Trunk No 50 59 Trunk Route No 1 2 Y 28 Zone Kind of Paging 000 255 Trunk No X Z X 0 9 Paging Answer Zone 0 9 Z Kind of Paging 0 No answer 2 Non delay answer 4 Non delay and delay answer Assign the Paging Trunk to the trunk route number assigned by CM30 Y 00 1 2 Y 00 50 59 Trunk Route No...

Page 334: ...k COT card DK card or MP card built in DK Paging Equipment provided locally DESCRIPTION DATA Assign a Paging key to ATTCON DESKCON 1 2 ATTCON No E000 E007 Key No F6150 F6159 Paging key Route No 50 59 Enable pressing the Paging key on ATTCON DESKCON when the attendant is in idle 1 2 445 0 Available 1 Not available CM08 START END CM90 ...

Page 335: ... operates under a specific message protocol and format The system outline of the MCI is shown below The MCI requires the Application Processor AP00 to make a data link with a customer supplied VMS and the analog line circuit LC AUC to interface with the VMS AP00 card The AP00 stores call information for stations and provides the MCI ports for a VMS The AP00 keeps supervising the status of the VMS ...

Page 336: ...and DLC card RS RVS 15 S CA RS RVS 4 S CA or RS NORM 4 S CA Voice Mail System LC DLC DLC PBX LC AUC LC AUC TDSW MP AP00 VMS Single Line Telephone with Message Waiting Lamp Dterm Attendant Console UCD Group or Hunting Group RS 232C Cable TRK NETWORK AP00 MCI I O Port Card DLC Digital Line Circuit Card LC AUC Analog Line Circuit Card MP Main Processor Card TRK COT DTI PRT BRT Card VMS Voice Mail Sys...

Page 337: ...e is not available when the call is received from the CCIS trunk to the VMS When the station trunk Attendant leaves a message in the VMS the VMS sends a Message Waiting lamp ON data for the appropriate station through the PBX After the station retrieves the messages the VMS sends a Message Waiting lamp OFF data for the appropriate station through the PBX The connecting patterns to the VMS are as s...

Page 338: ... CONNECTING PATTERNS STA A STA B STA A calls STA B set Forwarding All Calls Busy Line Don t Answer to the VMS STA A STA A calls the VMS directly STA A STA B After terminating a call from STA A to the VMS and transferring the call to STA B STA A recalls the VMS Continued on next page STA A STA B VMS CF STA A VMS STA A VMS STA B Recall Transfer ...

Page 339: ...MS CONNECTING PATTERNS ATT STA B ATT calls STA B set Call Forwarding All Calls Busy Line Don t Answer to the VMS ATT ATT calls the VMS directly STA A STA B After holding a call from STA C STA A calls STA B set Call Forwarding All Calls Busy Line Don t Answer to the VMS Continued on next page ATT STA B VMS CF ATT VMS STA A STA B VMS CF STA C ...

Page 340: ...G PATTERNS STA A STA C After holding a call from STA C STA A calls the VMS directly STA A STA B After holding a call from TRK STA A calls STA B set Call Forwarding All Call Busy Line Don t Answer to the VMS STA A TRK After holding a call from TRK STA A calls the VMS directly Continued on next page STA A VMS CF STA C STA A STA B VMS CF TRK STA A VMS TRK ...

Page 341: ...ONNECTING PATTERNS TRK STA B A TRK party calls STA B set Call Forwarding All Calls Busy Line Don t Answer to the VMS TRK A TRK party calls the VMS directly TRK STA B After terminating a call from TRK to the VMS and transferring the call to STA B TRK recalls to the VMS Continued on next page STA B VMS CF TRK VMS TRK STA B VMS TRK Transfer Recall ...

Page 342: ...set Call Forwarding All Calls Busy Line Don t Answer to the VMS STA C STA D In CCIS application STA C calls STA D set Call Forwarding All Calls Busy Line Don t Answer to STA B The call is for warded to the VMS by the Multiple Call Forwarding STA C In CCIS application STA C calls the VMS directly Continued on next page STA B VMS CF TRK STA C TRK CCIS STA B VMS CF TRK STA C TRK CCIS STA D CF VMS TRK...

Page 343: ...TA D STA C calls STA B set Call Forwarding All Calls Busy Line Don t Answer to the VMS TRK1 In CCIS application a TRK 1 party dials the VMS directly TRK1 STA D In CCIS application a TRK 1 party calls STA D set Call Forwarding All Calls Busy Line Don t Answer to STA B The call is forwarded to the VMS by the Multiple Call Forwarding STA B VMS CF TRK STA C TRK CCIS STA D VMS TRK3 TRK2 CCIS TRK1 CF CF...

Page 344: ...sage Waiting lamp control data from the VMS the Message Waiting lamps of the called stations turn on or off When the same Message Waiting lamp control data produces on Dterm the call indicator lamp on the Dterm turns on and the MSG is displayed on the Dterm as follows MSG 9 21 AM WED 8 ...

Page 345: ... data pertaining to the station trunks and service features are already pro grammed Station Number Data Loading The AP00 stores the station number data loaded from the MP When station numbers have been added deleted or changed by CM10 the station number data must be reloaded to the AP00 by the following procedure 1 Flip the MB switch of the AP00 to UP position 2 Return the MB switch to DOWN positi...

Page 346: ...nformation Man agement System PMS Property Management System or Hotel printer You can distinguish whether the AP active or not by the RUN lamp indication The RUN lamp flashes on green color when the AP is in active When you install the AP00 at first time you should assign the data shown below DESCRIPTION DATA Assign an AP number to the AP00 card The AP number must match the SENSE switch setting on...

Page 347: ...lization DESCRIPTION DATA Load the initial data into the AP00 card On the AP00 card set the SW1 switch as shown below 1 2 0000 CCC SW1 4 should be set as follows ON The AP No is 04 15 OFF The AP No is 20 31 CMD101 END A AP OFF LINE SW1 ON POSITION TO BE SET 4 3 2 1 ...

Page 348: ...ntrol is only avail able to the stations in the oppo site PBX connected with CCIS via MCI Station dialing MW ac cess codes are not allowed over CCIS 1 2 444 0 Available 1 Not available Specify whether Message Waiting from the VMS is provided for the called station when a forwarded call is terminated to the VMS via CCIS 1 2 376 0 To provide 1 Not provided Provide Message Waiting for a station with ...

Page 349: ...if required 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No F1005 Specify whether the text MessageWaiting control text sending is available is sent to the VMS when the AP00 card is reset 1 2 136 0 To send 1 Not sent Specify the number of digits for station number in the message format to commu nicate with the VMS 1 2 137 0 6 digits 1 8 digits CMD000 CM90 A B ...

Page 350: ...0 INITIAL FIRST DATA 1 MEANING SECOND DATA 2 MEANING PORT 0 PORT 1 PORT 2 PORT 3 20 24 28 32 Data speed 2 3 4 5 NOTE 1 1200 2400 4800 9600 bps NOTE 2 21 25 29 33 Stop bit length 0 1 2 1 1 5 2 bits NOTE 2 22 26 30 34 Data length 0 1 7 8 bits NOTE 2 23 27 31 35 Parity 0 1 2 None Parity Even Par ity Odd Parity NOTE 2 80 100 120 140 Equipment Type 24 MCI 81 101 121 141 Priority for data processing 0 1...

Page 351: ...essage format when the ANI information is sent from network do the following programming DESCRIPTION DATA Provide sending of ANI information from network to the VMS with MCI 1 2 Y 138 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 To send Specify the message format sent to the VMS with MCI as Expanded with ANI format 1 2 36 1 Expanded with ANI CMD001 END CM35 C ...

Page 352: ...aling on BT Connection 1 Step Call 1 2 148 Same Last Digit Redialing on BT Connection 1 Ineffective Provide the system with Single Digit Fea ture Access Code on RBT or Voice Call Connection 1 2 156 0 Available Provide the system with Single Digit Fea ture Access Code on busy Connection 1 2 208 0 Available Provide the system with the automatic cancel of Message Reminder while the called station rin...

Page 353: ... Assign Service Restriction Class A to re quired stations 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX Station No XX ZZ XX 00 15 Service Restriction Class A Allow Message Reminder in the Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 Y 47 Message Reminder Setting Side 1 2 Y 48 Message Reminder Set Side 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign the access code for Message Reminder Search Re...

Page 354: ...below 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX Station No XX ZZ XX 00 15 Service Restriction Class A Allow Message Waiting in the Service Re striction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 24 MW lamp set reset setting side 00 15 Service Restriction Class A 1 Allow 1 2 Y 40 MW lamp control by station at tendant 00 15 Service Restriction Class A 1 Allow Assign the access code for Message Waiting Set Reset Retrieve 1 2 Y 0...

Page 355: ...PM 1 Steady Lighting If Attendant Console is assigned as the Message Front destination by CM51Y 15 set the data for 233 to 0 With this setting Message Waiting is auto matically reset when the attendant an swers 1 2 233 0 Available To reset Message Waiting indication while the Message Front station or attendant rings set the data for 234 to 0 1 2 234 0 Available To reset Message Waiting indication ...

Page 356: ... or 4LCD 4LCF 4LCL 4LCW card Dterm and DLC card if required DESCRIPTION DATA Assign the Message Waiting key to ATTCON DESKCON 1 2 Y 00 ATTCON No E000 E007 Key No F6101 Message Waiting F6104 Reset Select the Dial Tone on setting Message Waiting 1 2 Y 2 12 Dial Tone on setting Message Wait ing 0 Special Dial Tone 1 Dial Tone END CM90 B CM48 INITIAL ...

Page 357: ...MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESS 337 A2337 10 MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESS PROGRAMMING Refer to the followings DICTATION ACCESS page 194 PAGING ACCESS page 377 ...

Page 358: ...5 Semi Restricted 2 RCE 6 Restricted 1 RCF 7 Restricted 2 RCG 8 Fully Restricted RCH Set the outgoing incoming Trunk Route Restriction Data by Trunk Restriction Classes RCA RCH 1 2 Y 51 58 Outgoing Trunk Restriction Data Y 61 68 Incoming Trunk Restriction Data 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 Restricted 1 Allow To be denied access to particular trunk groups from dial repeating Tie trunks specify the combina...

Page 359: ...for SN716 DESKCON 1 2 Y 00 EXX Y Multi Function key No 01 06 ATTCON 01 04 DESKCON XX 00 04 ATTCON Status No 00 Idle State NOTE 2 01 When answering or originating 02 When called station is busy 03 When called station is in DND 04 When accessing Hotel feature Y 0 7 ATTCON No F6100 Room Cut Off F6101 Message Waiting F6102 Do Not Disturb F6104 Reset F6105 Serial Call Set F6106 Flash over trunk F6107 B...

Page 360: ...RAMMING In addition to the programming for CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS page 83 do the fol lowing programming DESCRIPTION DATA Specify the number of times of Call For warding for a call 1 2 14 01 05 Number of times Once to five times If no data is set the default setting is 5 START CM42 END ...

Page 361: ...RAMMING In addition to the programming for CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE page 85 do the fol lowing programming DESCRIPTION DATA Specify the number of times of Call For warding for a call 1 2 14 01 05 Number of times Once to five times If no data is set the default setting is 5 START END CM42 ...

Page 362: ...NG In addition to the programming for CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER page 88 do the following programming DESCRIPTION DATA Specify the timing for Don t Answer after second Call Forwarding 1 2 Y 0 46 01 30 4 sec 120 sec 4 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 32 36 sec START END CM41 ...

Page 363: ...MULTIPLE CONSOLE OPERATION 343 A2337 10 MULTIPLE CONSOLE OPERATION PROGRAMMING Refer to the followings SMART CONSOLE SN708 SN709 SN712 ATTCON page 432 SMART CONSOLE SN716 DESKCON page 434 ...

Page 364: ...IPLE LINE OPERATION Dterm PROGRAMMING HARDWARE REQUIRED Dterm and DLC card DESCRIPTION DATA Specify whether ringing is enabled on call termination to flexible line keys and feature keys 1 2 Y 01 My Line No Key No 0 Disabled 1 Enabled START END CM90 ...

Page 365: ...MULTIPLE TRUNK OPERATION Dterm 345 A2337 10 MULTIPLE TRUNK OPERATION Dterm PROGRAMMING Refer to TRUNK LINE APPEARANCE Dterm page 537 ...

Page 366: ...3 0 Nocturne 1 Minuet Define the type of call to be provided with Hold Tone on the MP card 1 2 Y 0 00 C O Line Call 01 Tie Line Call 02 Internal Call 1400 Hold Tone Source on MP card DESCRIPTION DATA Define the type of call to be provided with Hold Tone 1 2 Y 0 00 C O Line Call 01 Tie Line Call 02 Internal Call 1500 Hold Tone generated by DTG CM48 START END CM08 INITIAL START END CM48 INITIAL ...

Page 367: ...e MP card DESCRIPTION DATA Define the type of call to be provided with Hold Tone NOTE Set the JP1 switch on the MP card to DOWN position for using external tone source 1 2 Y 0 00 C O Line Call 01 Tie Line Call 02 Internal Call 1400 Hold Tone Source through MP card START END CM48 INITIAL ...

Page 368: ... External Hold Tone Source can be provided per tenant 1 2 000 763 LEN DA00 DA09 COT Card No NOTE 2 E800 E831 DK Card No For PIM0 1 E800 E807 For PIM2 3 E808 E815 For PIM4 5 E816 E823 For PIM6 7 E824 E831 NOTE 3 Circuit No 3 of E831 is used for built in External Equip ment Interface on MP card by setting CM44 Set the function of External Hold Tone Source interface to the DK card 1 2 XX Y XX 00 31 C...

Page 369: ... Call 01 Tie Line Call 02 Internal Call 0200 External Hold Tone Source Specify External Hold Tone Source per each tenant 1 2 Y 1 00 63 Tenant No 00 09 External Hold Tone Source No Specify which tenant External HoldTone is sent from 1 2 388 0 Tenant of held station trunk 1 Tenant of holding station CM64 CM08 END CM48 A INITIAL ...

Page 370: ...r PIM2 3 EB032 EB063 For PIM4 5 EB064 EB095 For PIM6 7 EB096 EB127 NOTE 2 EB000 and EB001 are dedi cated to built in Digital An nouncement Trunk of MP card Assign the Service Restriction Class A to required station 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX Station No XX ZZ XX 00 15 Service Restriction Class A Allow Digital Announcement Trunk access Record Replay Delete in the Service Re striction Class A assigned by CM...

Page 371: ...Announcement Trunk Card No EB002 EB127 as signed by CM10 05XX Message on Hold XX 00 63 Message No 1 2 Y 05 00 63 Tenant No 00 63 Message No assigned by CM49 Y 00 To record replay and delete a message assign the appropriate Digital Announce ment Trunk access code respectively 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A100 Record A101 Replay A102 Delete END CM49 A CM20 ...

Page 372: ... tenant One External Hold Tone Source can be provided per tenant 1 2 000 763 LEN DA00 DA09 TNT Card No Define the type of call to be provided with External Hold Tone 1 2 Y 0 00 C O Line Call 01 Tie Line Call 02 Internal Call 0200 External Hold Tone Source Specify External Hold Tone Source per each tenant 1 2 Y 1 00 63 Tenant No 00 09 External Hold Tone Source No TNT Card No DA00 DA09 Specify which...

Page 373: ... card or MP card built in External Equipment Interface External Hold Tone Source provided locally To provide Message on Hold by Digital Announcement Trunk DAT card or MP card built in DAT To provide External Hold Tone Source through the TNT card TNT card or through Pin Jack on MP card External Tone Source provided locally ...

Page 374: ...MUTE KEY Dterm 354 A2346 10 MUTE KEY Dterm PROGRAMMING HARDWARE REQUIRED Dterm 75 and DLC card DESCRIPTION DATA Assign the MUTE Key to the Dterm 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No F5013 MUTE Key START END CM90 ...

Page 375: ...NAILED DOWN CONNECTION 355 A2346 10 NAILED DOWN CONNECTION PROGRAMMING Refer to the Data Interface System Manual HARDWARE REQUIRED DTI card DPC card ...

Page 376: ...es to prime line or My Line Assign the access code for station user name entry from individual station 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A110 Specify the time go back to date and time display often the call answered 1 2 120 0 10 sec later 1 6 sec later Specify the duration to display the name 1 2 121 0 Until call finished 1 As per CM08 120 Assign a trunk name number to each tru...

Page 377: ...inserting a blank space as the first character will cancel the ex isting name HARDWARE REQUIRED Dterm and DLC card DESCRIPTION DATA Enter the desired station user s name to each station number by CM77 Y 0 or CM77 Y 1 1 2 Y 0 By Character Code X XXXXXXXX Station No Character Code 20 7F Max 32 digits See APPENDIX B CHARACTER CODE TABLE 1 2 Y 1 By Character X XXXXXXXX Station No A Z 0 9 Character Max...

Page 378: ...er 1 2 Y 14 When Night Connection Station is busy 000 255 Trunk No 01 To TAS 04 To Attendant Console 06 Automatic Camp On 15 Keep the call ringing until the sta tion becomes idle 1 2 Y 16 When Night Connection Station is no answer 000 255 Trunk No 01 To Attendant Console 03 To TAS 15 Keep the call ringing until the sta tion answers Specify the timing for a call forwarding when the Connection Stati...

Page 379: ...For PIM6 7 EB096 EB127 NOTE EB000 and EB001 are dedi cated to built in Digital An nouncement Trunk of the MP card Assign the Service Restriction Class A for Digital Announcement Trunk Access Record Replay Delete to the required station 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX Station No XX ZZ XX 00 15 Service Restriction Class A Allow Digital Announcement Trunk Access in the Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM...

Page 380: ...ted from 4 to 120 seconds in 4 sec ond increments DESCRIPTION DATA Assign the function of the Digital An nouncement Trunk to Night Announce ment 1 2 Y 00 000 001 Built in DAT on MP card 002 127 Digital Announcement Trunk Card EB002 EB127 No as signed by CM10 03000 Night Announcement Service Specify the duration of an Announcement 1 2 Y 0 45 01 30 4 sec 120 sec 4 sec increments If no data is set th...

Page 381: ...B096 EB127 NOTE EB000 and EB001 are dedi cated to built in Digital An nouncement Trunk of the MP card Assign the Service Restriction Class A for Digital Announcement Trunk Access Record Replay Delete to required sta tion 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX Station No XX ZZ XX 00 15 Service Restriction Class A Allow Digital Announcement Trunk Access in the Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 3...

Page 382: ...tal An nouncement Trunk to Night Announce ment 1 2 Y 00 000 001 Built in DAT on MP card 002 127 Digital Announcement Trunk Card EB002 EB127 No as signed by CM10 03000 For Night Announcement Ser vice Assign the data for interpreting the digit re ceived 1 2 Y 01 Day Mode Y 02 Night Mode Y 03 Mode A Y 04 Mode B X XXXXXXXX Station No to be termi nated D04 Direct In Termination Specify the duration of ...

Page 383: ...NIGHT CONNECTION FIXED NIGHT CONNECTION FLEXIBLE 363 A2356 10 HARDWARE REQUIRED To provide the Night Announcement Service DAT card or MP card built in DAT ...

Page 384: ... Specify the timing for Off Hook Alarm 1 2 Y 0 22 01 08 4 sec 32 sec 4 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 28 32 sec Assign the Service Restriction Class C for an Off Hook Alarm Call to busy destina tion 1 2 Y 07 X XXXXXXXX Station No of destina tion 00 15 Service Restriction Class C Allow the Off Hook Alarm call in the Ser vice Restriction Class C assigned by CM12 Y 07 CM15 CM...

Page 385: ...ueu ing Dterm in the Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 02 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign the access code for setting and re setting this service 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code Different access code from Call Back A000 Set A001 Reset Same access code as Call Back A004 Set A005 Reset Specify the OG Trunk Queuing ca...

Page 386: ...i cated to built in Digital An nouncement Trunk of the MP card Designate the number of queuing in each UCD group 1 2 Y B X XXXXXXXX Pilot station No of the UCD group 0 To provide See CM42 16 1 Not provided Specify the maximum number of queuing in each UCD group 1 2 16 01 99 Number of queuing in each UCD group If no data is set the default setting is no lim it Specify the message duration of UCD Ov...

Page 387: ...31 DK Card No For PIM0 1 E800 E807 For PIM2 3 E808 E815 For PIM4 5 E816 E823 For PIM6 7 E824 E831 NOTE Circuit No 3 of E831 is used for built in External Equip ment Interface on MP card by setting CM44 Assign the function of UCD Overflow Indi cation to the DK card 1 2 XX Y XX 00 31 DK Card No E800 E831 assigned by CM10 Y 0 3 Circuit No 313 MP built in External Equipment In terface 14XX XX 00 15 UC...

Page 388: ... and DLC card To provide the Indicator for Overflowed UCD DK card or MP card built in DK External Indicator provided by the customer Requirement to External Indicator Control Method Ground Battery Max 125 mA Type Visual and or Audible type with volume control DESCRIPTION DATA Assign the Overflowed UCD Call Indica tion LED to the required Dterm 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No F1280 F1295 UCD Group 00 15...

Page 389: ...r Authorization Code 1 2 216 Designation of Processor for Au thorization Code 1 AP01 card Specify the Service Set Tone after dialing the access code for Authorization Code 1 2 362 Service Set Tone after dialing the access code 1 Service Set Tone Set the data for 281 to 1 Maid ID Code is not used 1 2 281 1 Not available Assign the Service Restriction Class A al lowed for Authorization Code feature ...

Page 390: ...striction Class B Set the Authorization Code its access code and temporary Service Class For details of programming refer to AUTHO RIZATION CODE with AP01 card page 52 Y 0 3 1 11 Y 0 Y 1 Y 3 Y A Assign the access code for Maid Status 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A029 Assign the Class of Service for Maid Sta tus 1 2 X XXXX Station No 00 15 Service Class No Assign the Room S...

Page 391: ...from the station 1 Yes Assign the originating function the incom ing call function and the other function to each status code as following table 1 2 1 00 1 Status Code Restricted 00 No originating allowed Room Cut Off 1 Yes 1 2 1 01 1 Status Code Restricted 01 Originating allowed Room Cut Off Reset 0 No 1 2 2 00 2 Status Code Normal 00 No originating allowed Room Cut Off 0 No 1 2 2 01 2 Status Cod...

Page 392: ...codes stored in the AP01 card at one time do the following oper ation D60 0000 CCC NOTE 3 When providing Mask Data for Authorization Codes assign CMD001 160 175 Refer to the STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SMDR page 477 DESCRIPTION DATA Assign the incoming call function to each status code 1 2 X02 X03 X 1 2 Status Code 02 Station cannot be called Do Not Disturb Set 03 Station can be called Do Not...

Page 393: ...ode 00 15 Service Restriction Class A 1 Allow Assign allowed class and restricted class for Maid Status feature in Service Restric tion Class B 1 2 Y 75 Maid Status 00 15 Service Restriction Class B 0 Restricted 1 Allow To the station that uses Pad Lock feature assign the Service Restriction Class A al lowed for Authorization Code feature Moreover to all the station assign the Ser vice Restriction...

Page 394: ...pment No X X X Authorization Code 0000 2999 ID Code Pattern No Set the purpose and the Temporary Ser vice Class of each Authorization Code 1 2 Y 10 Purpose of the Code 0000 2999 ID Code Pattern No 1 Authorization Code Set the Service Restriction Class B of the Temporary Service Class to the allowed class for Maid Status 1 2 Y 13 0000 2999 ID Code Pattern No XX ZZ XX 00 15 Service Restriction Class...

Page 395: ...TE 31 Permission to change the Status code from the station 1 Yes 1 2 2 31 2 Status Code Normal NOTE 31 Permission to change the Status code from the station 1 Yes Assign the originating function the incom ing call function and the other function to each status code as following table 1 2 1 00 1 Status Code Restricted 00 No originating allowed Room Cut Off 1 Yes 1 2 1 01 1 Status Code Restricted 0...

Page 396: ... refer to APPENDIX D FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS page D1 HARDWARE REQUIRED AP00 B card To provide Authorization Code EXPMEM card on MP card or AP01 card if required DESCRIPTION DATA 1 2 2 01 2 Status Code Normal 01 Originating allowed Room cut Off Reset 1 Yes Assign the incoming call function to each status code 1 2 X02 X03 X 1 2 Status code 02 Station cannot be called Do Not Disturb Set 03 Statio...

Page 397: ...PAGING ACCESS 377 A2369 10 PAGING ACCESS PROGRAMMING Refer to the followings MEET ME PAGING STATION page 310 MEET ME PAGING ATTENDANT page 310 ...

Page 398: ...PAGING TRANSFER 378 A2369 10 PAGING TRANSFER PROGRAMMING Refer to the followings MEET ME PAGING STATION page 310 MEET ME PAGING ATTENDANT page 310 ...

Page 399: ...PASSING DIAL TONE 379 A2369 10 PASSING DIAL TONE PROGRAMMING DESCRIPTION DATA Provide the system with this feature 1 2 048 1 To provide START END CM08 ...

Page 400: ... of 03 E7 E9 0 Allowed 1 Assigned NONE Restricted Assign a password to each Password Lev el 1 2 0 7 Password Level 0 7 X X X Max 8 digits Password Code A password code for Password Level 7 should be assigned in advance because of providing the password service by Function No 9 of CME9 The following passwords are not available CCCCCCCC FFFFFFFF Provide the system with Password feature After setting...

Page 401: ... ENTRY Dterm PROGRAMMING HARDWARE REQUIRED Dterm and DLC card DESCRIPTION DATA Specify the pause for Speed Calling Sta tion 1 2 Y 0 38 00 07 1 5 sec 12 sec 1 5 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 1 5 sec START END CM41 ...

Page 402: ...PEG COUNT 382 A2382 10 PEG COUNT PROGRAMMING Refer to the CMB0 B3 of the Command Manual ...

Page 403: ... No XX ZZ ZZ 00 15 Service Restriction Class B Allow Periodic Time Indication Tone in the Service Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 61 00 15 Service Restriction Class B as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign required stations as Ordinary Sta tion If assigned to 0 Analog Data Station this feature will not be applied to the station 1 2 Y 07 X XXXXXXXX Station No 1 Ordinary Station Speci...

Page 404: ...ned by CM10 Assign the Pooled Line keys to each Dterm Pooled Lines 00 63 can answer a call ter minated to tenants 00 63 respectively and can originate a call using trunk routes 00 63 respectively Polled Line Origination Termination 00 Trunk Route 00 Tenant 00 01 01 01 63 Trunk Route 63 Tenant 63 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No F4100 F4163 Pooled Line 00 63 Assign a trunk route number and tenant number ...

Page 405: ...g System in Day Mode Y 03 Terminating System in Night Mode Y 40 Terminating System in Mode A Y 41 Terminating System in Mode B 000 255 Trunk No 03 Trunk Line Appearance TAS 10 Attendant Console TAS 12 Attendant Console Trunk Line Ap pearance TAS Specify whether call terminating is indicat ed on the Pooled Line keys assigned by CM90 F4100 F4163 1 2 116 0 Available 1 Not available END CM30 A CM08 ...

Page 406: ...card To use the PFT card No programming is required HARDWARE REQUIRED AUC card and COT card or PFT card DESCRIPTION DATA Assign the AUC card to the required LEN 1 2 000 763 LEN X XXXXXXXX Station No Assign the COT card to the required LEN 1 2 000 763 LEN D000 D255 Trunk No START END CM10 ...

Page 407: ... the My Line is assigned as the Prime Line 1 2 X XXXXXXXX My Line No X XXXXXXXX Station No NOTE 1 NOTE 2 D000 D255 Trunk No NOTE 1 My Line No or Virtual Line No can be assigned to the Prime Line However the data station and Single Line Telephone cannot be as signed to the Prime Line NOTE 2 By loading the Resident Sys tem Program the My Line number is assigned as Prime Line number for all Dterms ST...

Page 408: ...1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A088 Priority Call 0 A089 Priority Call 1 Specify the destination for Priority Calls 0 and 1 1 2 250 For Priority Call 0 0 Same Station as Off Hook Alarm 1 Attendant Console 1 2 251 For Priority Call 1 0 Same station as Off Hook Alarm 1 Attendant Console When CM08 250 251 is set to 1 assign the Priority Calls 0 and 1 to any Priority Call Keys o...

Page 409: ...ssign the Service Restriction Class B for Privacy Release to required stations 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX Station No XX ZZ ZZ 00 15 Service Restriction Class B Allow Privacy Release in the Service Re striction Class B assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 63 00 15 Service Restriction Class B as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow CM15 START END CM12 ...

Page 410: ...for Privacy to required status 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX Station No XX ZZ ZZ 00 15 Service Restriction Class B Allow Privacy in the Service Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 66 00 15 Service Restriction Class B as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign the DND key to the required Dterm 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No F0022 CM15 START END CM12 CM90 ...

Page 411: ...0 D255 Trunk No Specify the designated seizure of trunks on each station basis 1 2 Y 98 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 Allow 1 Restricted Specify the number of times to be hunt the trunks 1 2 08 01 16 1 time 16 times If no data is set the default setting is 00 no seizure when the designated trunk is busy To assign default setting assign CCC CM35 START END CM12 CM42 ...

Page 412: ...211 For PIM6 7 E212 E215 NOTE 2 E200 is dedicated to built in DTMF Receiver of the MP card Assign the type of telephone set to DTMF stations This data assignment is not required for Dterm stations 1 2 Y 00 X XXXXXXXX Station No 2 DTMF Telephone set Assign DTMF receivers for use with DTMF stations 1 2 Y 0 Make Busy XX Z XX DTMF Receiver Card No 00 MP built in DTMF Receiver 01 15 PN 8RST Z 0 3 Circu...

Page 413: ...e No 0 32 ms 1 64 ms 2 80 ms 3 96 ms 4 160 ms 5 192 ms 6 240 ms 7 128 ms 1 2 Y 26 DTMF Sender Signal Width 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 64 ms 1 128 ms 1 2 Y 46 DTMF Sender Release Timing 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 2 sec 1 4 sec 2 6 sec 3 8 sec 4 12 sec 5 14 sec 6 16 sec 7 10 sec Assign whether or from a DTMF Telephone is used as Switch Hook Flash while hearing Busy Tone 1 2 1 2 050 is used as Switch Hook Fl...

Page 414: ...PUSHBUTTON CALLING 394 A2382 10 HARDWARE REQUIRED 8RST card n or MP card built in DTMF Receiver n Depending on the number of DTMF stations and traffic condition of the system ...

Page 415: ...nd Bothway trunk routes 1 2 Y 01 00 63 Trunk Route No 7 DTMF Assign the Additional Dialing Key Short Long to the ATTCON DESKCON if exter nal devices controlled by DTMF signal are provided 1 2 Y 00 ATTCON No E000 E007 Key No F6112 Short DTMF Signal specified by CM35 Y 26 128 ms 64 ms F6113 Long DTMF Signal specified by CM41 Y 0 14 512 ms CM90 START END CM35 ...

Page 416: ... the type of signaling for Outgoing and Bothway trunk routes to DP And specify the DP Sender characteris tics to match the distant office 1 2 Y 01 00 63 Trunk Route No 2 DP 10PPS 3 DP 20PPS 1 2 Y 23 DP Sender Inter Digital Pause 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 300 ms 1 400 ms 2 500 ms 3 600 ms 4 700 ms 5 900 ms 6 1100 ms 7 800 ms 1 2 Y 25 DP Sender Make Ratio 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 39 1 33 1 2 Y 45 DP Send...

Page 417: ... the required stations 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX My Line No XX ZZ XX 00 15 Service Restriction Class A Allow Paging Access in the Service Re striction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 08 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Specify the timing for canceling the Paging Answer capability 1 2 Y 0 20 01 15 60 sec 900 sec 60 sec increments If no data is set the default settings ...

Page 418: ...end 1 Not sent 1 2 149 Automatic Call Back when paging station is busy through non delay operation 0 Available 1 Not available 1 2 157 Access Code for Paging Access and Answer 0 Same 1 Different 1 2 162 Multiple Radio Paging Access af ter accessing a radio paging trunk with delay type Radio Paging 0 Not available 1 Available CM08 A B When CM08 157 1 Different When CM08 157 0 Same D ...

Page 419: ...079 For Paging Answer Paging Answer Zone 0 9 Assign the data for Radio Paging to the de sired trunk number 1 2 Y 00 Trunk Route Allocation 000 255 Trunk No 00 63 Trunk Route No 1 2 Y 28 Zone Kind of Paging 000 255 Trunk No X Z X 0 9 Paging Answer Zone 0 9 Z Kind of Paging 1 No Answer 3 Non Delay Answer 5 Non Delay or Delay Answer 6 No Answer and Automatic Dialing of Calling party s No CM30 CM20 B ...

Page 420: ...unk Route No 3 Dial Pulses are sent out 1 2 Y 13 Max number of sending digits 00 63 Trunk Route No 000 Only dialed No is sent 001 004 1 digit 4 digits of Radio No and calling station No 005 254 2 digits of Radio Paging No and calling station No NONE 2 digits of Radio Paging No and calling station No NOTE To send a calling station No automatically the data for CM30 Y 28 must be set to X6 CM35 C D ...

Page 421: ...a for Radio Paging to the trunk number assigned by CM10 as fol lows Paging Answer Zone Trunk Route 0 50 9 59 1 2 1 2 Y 00 Trunk Route Allocation 000 255 Trunk No 50 59 Trunk Route No Y 28 Zone Kind of Paging 000 255 Trunk No X Z X 0 9 Paging Answer Zone 0 9 Z Kind of Paging 1 No Answer 3 Non Delay 5 Non Delay or Delay Answer 6 No Answer and Automatic Dialing of Calling party s No CM30 CM20 D E ...

Page 422: ... to Radio Paging Equipment 50 59 Trunk Route No 3 Dial Pulses are sent out 1 2 Y 13 Max number of sending digits 50 59 Trunk Route No 000 Only dialed No is sent 001 004 1 digit 4 digits of Radio No and calling station No 005 254 2 digits of Radio Paging No and calling station No NONE 2 digits of Radio Paging No and calling station No NOTE To send a calling station No automatically the data for CM3...

Page 423: ... For PIM0 1 E800 E807 For PIM2 3 E808 E815 For PIM4 5 E816 E823 For PIM6 7 E824 E831 NOTE 2 Circuit No 3 of E831 is used for built in External Equip ment Interface of MP card by setting CM44 Assign the function of relay control via Dterm to the DK 1 2 XX Y XX 00 31 DK Card No assigned by CM10 Y 0 3 Circuit No 313 MP Built in External Equipment Interface 1500 Relay Control ON OFF Func tion Key via ...

Page 424: ...code for Remote Access to System as MP card 1 2 217 0 MP card Assign the ring cadence on a Remote Ac cess to System 1 2 180 0 As per CM08 392 Pattern2 1 As per CM35 Y 33 Assign the ID Code Development number for Remote Access to System 1 2 Y A0 2 0 9 ID Code Development No 00 09 NOTE CM2AY 00 09 is determined by this data Assign the ID Code for Remote Access to System 1 2 Y 00 09 ID Code Developme...

Page 425: ...2999 ID Code Pattern No 00 15 Service Restriction Class A Assign the desired Service Restriction Class B to each ID Code Pattern number The features available in each class are assigned by CM15 1 2 Y 13 0000 2999 ID Code Pattern No 00 15 Service Restriction Class B Assign the desired Service Restriction Class C to each ID Code The features available in each class are assigned by CM15 1 2 Y 14 0000...

Page 426: ...lable Remote Access to System desti nation in Night Mode 000 255 Trunk No 00 C O Line release 01 Forwarded to TAS 03 Forwarded to Attendant Console 04 Forwarded to DIT station assigned by CM30 Y 04 05 06 DT connection for redial 08 C O line release 15 C O line release Assign the release signal condition to a in coming trunk route assigned by CM30 Y 00 1 2 Y 05 00 63 Trunk Route No 1 Release signal...

Page 427: ...uding Authorization Codes and Forced Account Codes can be defined MP without EXPMEM card Approximately 1000 codes MP with EXPMEM card Approximately 3000 codes Number of the codes varies with the number of digits assigned to each code For de tails refer to APPENDIX D FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS page D1 ...

Page 428: ...ncoming C O Calls to required trunks 1 2 Y 02 Day Mode Y 03 Night Mode Y 40 Mode A Y 41 Mode B 000 255 Trunk No 16 Remote Access to System Specify the handling of busy not available Remote Access to System destination in Day or Night Mode when calling an inter nal station 1 2 Y 30 Handling of busy not available Remote Access to System desti nation in Day Mode Y 31 Handling of busy not available Re...

Page 429: ...trunk route assigned by CM30 Y 00 1 2 Y 05 00 63 Trunk Route No 1 Release signal arrives Specify the combination of trunk routes al lowing the Trunk to Trunk connection 1 2 Y 0 XX ZZ XX 00 63 Incoming Trunk Route ZZ 00 63 Outgoing Trunk Route 0 Allowed 1 Restricted Specify the maximum number of digits for Remote Access to System 1 2 13 01 10 1 digit 10 digits NONE 10 digits If Check Code is provid...

Page 430: ...ervice Restriction Class A for Digital Announcement Trunk access to the required ID Code Pattern number 1 2 Y 12 0000 2999 ID Code Pattern No assigned by CM2A Y 00 09 00 15 Service Restriction Class A Allow Digital Announcement Trunk access in the Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM2A Y 12 1 2 Y 33 00 15 Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM2A Y 12 1 Allow Assign the Service Restricti...

Page 431: ...XPMEM card on MP if required DAT card if required DESCRIPTION DATA To record and replay a message from an outside user assign the Digital Announce ment Trunk access code respectively 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A100 Record A101 Replay END CM20 A ...

Page 432: ...REMOTE SYSTEM DATA CHANGE 412 A2412 10 REMOTE SYSTEM DATA CHANGE PROGRAMMING Refer to Maintenance Manual HARDWARE REQUIRED Refer to MATWorX Installation Guide ...

Page 433: ...REMOVE AND RESTORE SERVICE PROGRAMMING DESCRIPTION DATA Set or cancel make busy to stations and trunks 1 2 1 2 Y 0 X XXXXXXXX Station No 0 Make busy set 1 Make busy cancel Y 1 000 255 Trunk No 0 Make busy set 1 Make busy cancel START END CME5 ...

Page 434: ...d 1 RCB 3 Non Restricted 2 RCC 4 Semi Restricted 1 RCD 5 Semi Restricted 2 RCE 6 Restricted 1 RCF 7 Restricted 2 RCG 8 Fully Restricted RCH Specify the outgoing call capability on each Trunk Restriction Class RCA RCH assigned by CM12 Y 01 to each route 1 2 Y 51 RCA Y 52 RCB Y 53 RCC Y 54 RCD Y 55 RCE Y 56 RCF Y 57 RCG Y 58 RCH 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 Restricted 1 Allow Specify the Outgoing Call tra...

Page 435: ...striction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 19 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign whether the call to a station set for Return Message Schedule Display gets ringing or Reorder Tone 1 2 334 0 Available Ringing 1 Not available ROT connection Assign the access code for the Return Message Schedule set and cancel re spectively 1 2 Y 0 3 Number Plan Group 0 3 X XXX...

Page 436: ... for internal calls 1 2 Y 07 X XXXXXXXX Station No 00 15 Service Restriction Class C 1 2 Y 83 84 00 15 Service Restriction Class C assigned by CM12 Y 07 0 See left column 1 See left column Specify the ring frequency for incoming calls to each trunk route 1 2 Y 34 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 1024 1285 Hz 16 Hz 1 480 606 Hz 8 Hz 2 600 700 Hz 3 480 606 Hz 16 Hz START END CM08 CM15 CM12 CM35 INITIAL Y RING...

Page 437: ... Dterm for internal calls 1 2 Y 07 X XXXXXXXX Station No 00 15 Service Restriction Class C 1 2 Y 83 84 00 15 Service Restriction Class C assigned by CM12 Y 07 0 See left column 1 See left column Assign one of the ring frequencies for in coming calls via each trunk route except for 600 700 Hz 2nd Data 2 1 2 Y 34 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 1024 1285 Hz 16 Hz 1 480 606 Hz 8 Hz 3 480 606 Hz 16 Hz START EN...

Page 438: ...e No 00 15 Service Restriction Class C Allow Ringing Line Pickup Dterm in the Service Restriction Class C assigned by CM12 Y 07 1 2 Y 82 00 15 Service Restriction Class C assigned by CM12 Y 07 0 Allow Assign the Service Restriction Class C for Ringing Line Pickup by Speaker key if re quired 1 2 Y 86 00 15 Service Restriction Class C as signed by CM12 Y 07 0 Ringing Line Pickup by Speaker key is pr...

Page 439: ...ne set DP to DP stations 1 2 Y 00 X XXXXXXXX Station No 1 DP Specify the Dialing 1 for Switch Hook Flash on DP telephone sets 1 2 151 0 Not available 1 Available Assign the type of signaling DP to Outgo ing and Bothway trunk routes 1 2 Y 01 00 63 Trunk Route No 2 DP 10 PPS 3 DP 20 PPS START END CM12 CM08 CM35 ...

Page 440: ...riority to be seized Up to 7 alternative routes can be set by us ing two Route Advance Block as shown below 1 2 Y 00 31 Route Advance Block as signed by CM20 200 231 0 3 Order of Priority 0 1st 1 2nd 2 3rd 3 4th 100 163 Trunk Route 00 63 200 231 Route Advance block 00 31 START END CM20 CM22 PRIORITY ROUTE DATA Route Advance Block 00 0 00 100 1st 1 01 101 2nd 2 02 102 3rd 3 201 To Route Advance Blo...

Page 441: ...D REPEAT Dterm PROGRAMMING HARDWARE REQUIRED Dterm and DLC card DESCRIPTION DATA Assign the Save Repeat key to the Dterm NOTE Up to three Save and Repeat keys can be assigned per Dterm 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No F1001 F1013 F1014 START END CM90 ...

Page 442: ...to the contact 1 2 Y 03 X XXXXXXXX Station No 04 Hot Line Assign the Attendant Console as the Hot Line destination of the station 1 2 1 2 Y 00 99 Hot Line Pair No 0 Calling Side X XXXXXXXX Station No associated with the contact clo sure 1 Called Side E000 E007 Attendant Console No as signed by CM10 START END CM12 CM52 ...

Page 443: ...SELF DIAGNOSIS 423 A2412 10 SELF DIAGNOSIS PROGRAMMING Refer to the Maintenance Manual ...

Page 444: ...SERIAL CALL PROGRAMMING DESCRIPTION DATA Assign the Serial Call Termination and Se rial Call Set keys on the ATTCON DESKCON 1 2 Y 00 ATTCON No E000 E007 Key No F6062 Serial Call Termination F6105 Serial Call Set START END CM90 ...

Page 445: ...low being moved and changed by Set Relocation operation Set Side 1 2 Y 132 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 0 Allow Assign the access code for Authorization Code 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A086 Set the Authorization Code for Service Re striction Class A assigned by CM15 Y 131 NOTE For setting the Authorization Code refer to AUTHORIZA TION CODE pag...

Page 446: ...8 050 051 069 and 148 to 1 1 2 050 Button as Switch Hook Flash 1 Ineffective 1 2 051 Button as Switch Hook Flash 1 Ineffective 1 2 069 Single Digit Dialing on BT Con nection 1 Step Call 1 2 148 Same Last Digit Redialing on BT Connection 1 Ineffective Provide the System with the Single Digit Feature Access Code on RBT or Voice Call connection 1 2 156 0 Available Provide the System with the Single D...

Page 447: ...6 Message Reminder Set 6 Message Reminder Set NOTE 4 7 Step Call 7 Last one digit NOTE 3 7 None 8 Message Record 8 Message Record NOTE 4 9 None 9 None NOTE 1 This feature cannot be set from Attendant Console NOTE 2 This feature cannot be set from a station having a held call NOTE 3 This feature can be set only from a station having a held incoming call NOTE 4 From a DTMF telephone a hooking operat...

Page 448: ... DESCRIPTION DATA Assign the Single Digit Feature Code to the required service feature 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X Access Code A047 A051 TAS Answer A E 100 163 Trunk Route 00 63 200 231 Route Advance Block 00 31 800 Operator Call 801 Single Digit Station START END CM20 ...

Page 449: ...er D A051 TAS Answer E 100 163 Trunk Route 00 63 200 231 Route Advance Block 00 31 800 Operator Call 801 Single Digit Station No PROGRAMMING 1 Assign digit 1 through 8 to the Single Digit Station No Data 801 respec tively And assign the other access code by CM20 2 Assign the station numbers 2XX 3XX 4XX 1 9 to required LEN by CM10 If the different digit station numbers of the same level are require...

Page 450: ...umbers 2200 2299 4 digits Station Numbers Assign the digit 2 to data 824 2 4 digits Station No and then assign the station numbers to each LEN by CM10 For call ing the station 200 299 press key or wait for ring start after dialing the station number Specify the inter digit timer for Timing Start 1 2 Y 0 13 03 08 3 sec 8 sec 1 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 4 5 sec CM41 END...

Page 451: ...o 00 63 Tenant No 1 2 Y 03 Kind of Telephone X XXXXXXXX Station No 15 Ordinary station Assign the Station Numbering Plan data to the leading one digit of station number NOTE The Single Digit number must be different from the first digit of Trunk Access Code Service Feature Access Code or other station number 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X Leading 1 digit of station No 801 1 digit station No ...

Page 452: ...TTCON If no data is set the default setting is as fol lows To assign Multi Function Keys refer to MULTI FUNCTION KEY ATTENDANT page 339 1 2 Y 00 ATTCON No E000 E007 Key No F6000 F6067 Type of Calls to be as signed F6100 F6245 Functions to be as signed Key No Data Description 01 F6110 MODE 02 F6111 Programming 07 12 F6240 F6245 Loop 1 Loop 6 16 F6061 Recall 17 F6060 Operator Call 18 F6000 C O Incom...

Page 453: ...2 Y 00 0 7 ATTCON No 0 3 ATT GROUP 0 3 Specify the Master ATTCON within the ATT Group assigned by CM60 Y 00 1 2 Y 01 0 7 ATTCON No 0 Master ATT 1 Not Master ATT Specify the tenants to be handled by each ATT Group 1 2 Y 0 3 00 63 Tenant No 0 To be handled 1 Not to be handled CM60 A CM62 END INITIAL INITIAL INITIAL ...

Page 454: ...m ing calls to DESKCON 1 2 Y 02 Day Mode Y 03 Night Mode Y 40 Mode A Y 41 Mode B 000 255 Trunk No 14 Termination to Attendant Console Assign the required Attendant Call Selec tion keys and Function keys to each DESKCON according to the key label To assign Multi Function key refer to MULTI FUNCTION KEY ATTENDANT page 339 1 2 Y 00 ATTCON No E000 E007 Key No F6000 F6067 Type of Calls to be as signed ...

Page 455: ...urce 91 F6201 Destination DEST F6201 Destination 93 F6203 Talk Talk NONE 94 F6204 Hold Hold F6204 Hold 95 F6202 Cancel Cancel F6202 Cancel 96 Answer Answer 97 Release Release NOTE When the DESKCON is used to set hotel features the Reset key should be as signed to one of the feature keys i e key 21 in the Idle state mode A B L6 12 L5 11 L4 10 L3 09 L2 08 L1 07 0 8 9 6 3 5 2 1 4 7 SRC 90 DEST 91 93 ...

Page 456: ...oup 0 3 Specify the Master DESKCON within the ATT Group assigned by CM60 Y 00 1 2 Y 01 0 7 ATTCON No 0 Master ATT 1 Not Master ATT When providing 2nd Ringing feature on the DESKCON make Off Hook Ringing effective 1 2 Y 16 0 7 ATTCON No 0 Effective Specify the tenants to be handled by each ATT Group 1 2 Y 0 3 ATT Group 0 3 00 63 Tenant No 0 To be handled 1 Not to be handled B CM62 CM60 END INITIAL ...

Page 457: ...ned to each Virtual Line station number However the Virtual Line station number should be different from Single Line num ber assigned by CM10 Assign the Station Class data to each Vir tual Line station number 1 2 Y 01 Trunk Restriction Class Y 02 Service Restriction Class Y 03 Kind of Telephone Y 04 Tenant Allocation X XXXXXXXX Virtual Line Station No Refer to CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL page 149 ...

Page 458: ...her Soft Key feature is avail able to each Dterm 1 2 Y 22 X XXXXXXXX My Line No 0 Available 1 Not available Assign Soft Key Pattern to each Dterm 1 2 Y 23 X XXXXXXXX My Line No 0 Soft Key Pattern No 0 1 Soft Key Pattern No 1 2 Soft Key Pattern No 2 3 Soft Key Pattern No 3 START CM12 A ...

Page 459: ...r Dial By Name assignment refer to DIAL BY NAME Dterm page 179 1 2 Y 00 03 Soft Key Pattern No 0 3 as signed by CM12 Y 23 aa bb aa 00 15 Status No 00 Idle state 01 During dialing Holding no call 02 During dialing Holding station trunk 03 During calling Holding no call 04 During calling Holding station trunk 05 Being called 06 When called party is busy Holding no call 07 When called party is busy H...

Page 460: ...cters indicated on each status of the Dterm corresponding to the Soft Key function assigned by CM9A Y 00 03 1 2 Y 10 13 Soft Key Pattern No 0 3 as signed by CM12 Y 23 Same as CM9A Y 00 03 Characters Max 12 characters See APPENDIX B CHARACTER CODE TABLE B END CM9A ...

Page 461: ...ed by CM12 Y 23 12 XX XX 00 15 Soft Key No 00 03 Indicated on 1st display 04 07 Indicated on 2nd display 08 11 Indicated on 3rd display 12 15 Indicated on 4th display F1092 Pause F1093 Re record F1094 End F1095 Erase F1096 Address F1097 Urgent Page 1 2 Y 10 13 Soft Key Pattern No 0 3 as signed by CM12 Y 23 Same as CM9A Y 00 03 Characters Max 12 characters See APPENDIX B CHARACTER CODE TABLE CM9A S...

Page 462: ...SPEED CALLING OVERRIDE SYSTEM 442 A2437 10 SPEED CALLING OVERRIDE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING Refer to SPEED CALLING SYSTEM page 452 ...

Page 463: ... an outgoing call by Speed Calling Sta tion 1 2 035 0 Not provided 1 To provide Specify whether to set dialing as paused data 1 5 sec or called number to C O line when the Dterm dials in the set ting of the Speed Calling Station feature 1 2 168 0 Paused data 1 5 sec 1 Dialed digit Specify whether to set dialing as pro grammable pause by CM41 Y 0 38 or di aled digit when the Dterm dials in the sett...

Page 464: ...00 99 Memory Slot Block No 10 Slot Memory Block ZZ 01 02 Number of 10 Slot Memory Blocks 10 memories 20 memo ries NOTE 1 Speed Calling Station by dial access and by Dterm One Touch keys uses the com mon memory area Be sure to allocate the difference memory area by CM94 from the memory area set by CM73 NOTE 2 1000 Slot Memory Block number 4 9 can be used when the Expansion Memory card PZ M537 is mo...

Page 465: ...term with One Touch key and DLC card DESCRIPTION DATA Assign the access code for sending of a Hooking signal to a Centrex Maximum of two digits are available 1 2 Y 0 3 X XXXX Access code A158 Hooking signal to a Centrex Assign a RECALL key on the Dterm RECALL key is used to return to a former line 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No 90 F1015 RECALL Provide the Centrex trunk route with Centrex function 1 2 ...

Page 466: ...g Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A064 Origination A065 Entry A066 Cancel Specify whether to provide Toll Restriction for an outgoing call by Speed Calling Sta tion 1 2 035 0 Not provided 1 To provide Specify whether to set dialing as paused data 1 5 sec or called number to C O line when the DTMF station or Dterm dials in the setting of the Speed Call ing Station feature 1 2 168 0 Paused data 1 ...

Page 467: ...ber from the station 0 1Effective Ineffective ZZ 01 10 Number of 10 Slot Memory Blocks NOTE 1 1000 Slot Memory Block number 4 9 6000 Memory Parcels can be used when the Expansion Memory card PZ M537 is mounted on the MP card For using this memory area there are several conditions as mensioned below This memory area cannot be used for Speed Calling with Speed Calling keys provided by CM90 F11XX on ...

Page 468: ...the stored number intended is 10 for Station Number 300 20 for Station Num ber 301 and 30 for Station Number 302 the memory areas assignment is as fol lows CM73 B C 0 3 4 1000 Slot Memory Block 0 9 1 Memory Parcel 00 99 01 10 Slot Memory Block Basic 4000 Memory Parcels 9 Option 6000 Memory Parcels 1000 Slot Memory Memory Start Block No Number of 10 Slot Station No Block No 10 Slot Memory Block Mem...

Page 469: ...viated Code 0 9 If the number of Memory Parcels per station exceeds 11 then Abbreviated Code 00 99 The following figure shows the relation between Abberviated Codes and Memory Parcels In the case of 10 Memory Percels In the case of 20 Memory Percels C D Memory Parcel Number 10 Slot Memory Block 0 1 2 3 4 5 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 9 Abbrev Code Memory Parcel Number 10 Slot Memory Block 0 1 9 0 1 9 Abbrev Cod...

Page 470: ... a pause into the Stored No enter C Fixed Pause 1 5 sec or D Programma ble Pause specified by CM 41 Y 0 8 after desired digits Assign the station name to be displayed to each Memory Slot number by character codes or character 1 2 Y 1 X YY Z X 0 3 Basic 4 9 Option 1000 Slot Memory Block No YY 00 99 10 Slot Memory Block No Z 0 9 Memory Parcel No XX XX Station Name Character Code Max 32 digits 16 cha...

Page 471: ...Assign the Speed Calling Station keys on each Dterm if required 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No F11XX XX 00 99 Speed Calling Station 00 99 NOTE The initial setting of key layout is for 16 Line Trunk Feature keys Key No 01 16 When using Key No 17 24 data setting of CM12 Y 24 2nd data 0 is required END CM90 E ...

Page 472: ...System in the Ser vice Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 06 Speed Calling System 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign the Access Code for Speed Call ing System 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A067 Speed Calling System Origina tion Assign the programmable pause for Speed Calling System 1 2 Y 0 38 00 07 1 5 sec 12 sec 1 5 sec inc...

Page 473: ... in Block YYY 001 300 Number of Slots to be allocated in Block For example to provide 20 memory slots starting at Slot 60 Data 060020 Abbreviated Codes for this feature are au tomatically determined by assigning this command on each Tenant as shown be low Example The number of digits for Abbreviated Codes is automatically determined as shown below Less than 100 memory slots per Tenant 2 digits 00 ...

Page 474: ...odes or character 1 2 Y 1 000 299 Memory Slot No XX XX Station Name Character Code Max 32 digits 16 char acters See APPENDIX B CHARACTER CODE TABLE 1 2 Y 2 000 299 Memory Slot No XX XX Station Name Character Max 16 characters Specify Speed Calling System security Stored number displays on Dterm for an outgoing call by Speed Calling System 1 2 043 0 Not displayed 1 To display Specify whether to pro...

Page 475: ...ory Block No 3 0 Available 1 Not available Assign the Access Code for Speed Call ing System 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A152 1000 Slot Memory Block No 0 A151 1000 Slot Memory Block No 1 A068 1000 Slot Memory Block No 2 A150 1000 Slot Memory Block No 3 Assign the stored number to each Memory Slot number 1 2 Y 0 X YY Z X 0 3 Basic 4 9 Option 1000 Slot Memory Block No YY 00 ...

Page 476: ...es or character 1 2 Y 1 X YY Z X 0 3 Basic 4 9 Option 1000 Slot Memory Block No YY 00 99 10 Slot Memory Block No Z 0 9 Memory Parcel No XX XX Station Name Character Code Max 32 digits 16 char acters See APPENDIX B CHARACTER CODE TABLE 1 2 Y 2 X YY Z X 0 3 Basic 4 9 Option 1000 Slot Memory Block No YY 00 99 10 Slot Memory Block No Z 0 9 Memory Parcel No XX XX Station Name Character Max 16 character...

Page 477: ...26 Call Forwarding All Calls Outside 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign the access code for Call Forward ing All Calls Entry and Cancel respec tively 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A010 To entry A011 To cancel Assign the access code for Split Call For warding All Calls 1 2 X XXXX Access Code A180 Split Call Forwarding All Calls Entry A181...

Page 478: ...Follow trunk restriction class 1 No check Assign Call Forwarding All Calls keys to the Dterms as required 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No F0010 Call Forwarding All Calls Set Cancel Assign Split Call Forwarding All Calls keys to the Dterms as required 1 2 My Line No Key No F0A80 Split Call Forwarding All Calls Set Cancel Select the feature available in each tenant when an internal call and a Tie Line C ...

Page 479: ... DATA Select the Dial Tone on setting Split Call Forwarding All Calls 1 2 Y 2 13 Dial Tone on Setting Split Call For warding All Calls 0 Special Dial Tone 1 Dial Tone END CM48 B INITIAL Dial Destination No X 0 9 0 BLOCK No 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 BLOCK No 7 8 Destination for Call Forwarding All Calls 9 Destination for Speed Calling Station BLOCK No 0 Dial Access Code for Split Call Forwarding ...

Page 480: ...15 Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow 1 2 Y 12 Call Forwarding Busy Line Don t Answer Y 29 Call Forwarding Busy Line Out side Don t Answer Outside 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign the access code for Call Forward ing Busy Line 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A014 Call Forwarding Busy Line Entry A015 Call Forwardin...

Page 481: ...Line for a station with Do Not Disturb set 1 2 240 0 Allow 1 Restrict Assign whether or not an extension can set Split Call Forwarding Busy Line Out side by entering only a trunk access code 1 2 386 0 Restricted 1 Allow Assign whether or not the system should check the trunk restriction class of the for warded station during a Call Forwarding Busy Line Outside 1 2 387 0 Follow trunk restriction cl...

Page 482: ...24 C O Incoming Call Y 25 Tie Line Incoming Call 00 63 Tenant No 0 Split Call Forwarding 1 Call Forwarding Assign the destination of Split Call For warding NOTE 1 2 XX Y XX 00 63 Tenant No Y 0 7 Block No X XX YY Y X XX Trunk Access Code 1 2 digits YY Y Called No Max 26 digits X XXXXXXXX Station No 1 8 digits CM78 END CM65 B Dial Destination No X 0 9 0 BLOCK No 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 BLOCK No ...

Page 483: ...29 1 2 Y 10 Call Forwarding Don t Answer Y 27 Call Forwarding Don t Answer Outside 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow 1 2 Y 12 Call Forwarding Busy Line Don t Answer Y 29 Call Forwarding Busy Line Out side Don t Answer Outside 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign the access code for Call Forward ing Don t Answer Entry and Cancellatio...

Page 484: ...n t Answer for a trunk incoming call 1 2 Y 0 01 01 30 4 sec 120 sec 4 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 32 36 sec Specify the timing for Call Forwarding Don t Answer for an internal call or an as sisted call 1 2 Y 0 15 01 30 4 sec 120 sec 4 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 32 36 sec Specify the setting method for Call For warding Don t Answer Outside 1 ...

Page 485: ...F0012 Set Cancel Assign Split Call Forwarding Don t Answer keys to the Dterms as required 1 2 My Line No Key No F0A82 Split Call Forwarding Busy Line Don t Answer Set Cancel Select the feature available in each tenant when an internal call and a Tie Line C O incoming call is terminated 1 2 Y 23 Internal Call or ATT assisted Call Y 24 C O Incoming Call Y 25 Tie Line Incoming Call 00 63 Tenant No 0 ...

Page 486: ...0 7 is spec ified HARDWARE REQUIRED Dterm with LCD and DLC card if required Dial Destination No X 0 9 0 BLOCK No 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 BLOCK No 7 8 Destination for Call Forwarding Busy Line Don t Answer 9 Destination for Speed Calling Station BLOCK No 0 Dial Access Code for Split Call Forwarding Busy Line Don t An swer or Depress Split Call Forwarding Busy Line Don t Answer key Destination a...

Page 487: ...NOTE 90 F6200 Source SRC 91 F6201 Destination DEST 95 F6202 Cancel CANCEL NOTE TALK key is assigned as a Multi Function key during the answer state 1 2 Y 00 ATTCON No E000 E007 Key No F6200 SRC F6201 DEST F6202 CANCEL F6203 TALK START CM90 END LOOP1 LOOP2 LOOP3 LOOP4 LOOP5 LOOP6 01 ANS 97 RLS 96 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 SRC DEST HOLD CANCEL MODE PROG 13 14 15 16 17 18 90 91 92 93 94 95 07 02 03 04 05 0...

Page 488: ...ternal calls 1 Available Assign Service Restriction Class C for Stack Dial Dterm to required stations 1 2 Y 07 X XXXXXXXX Station No 00 15 Service Restriction Class C Allow the LCD display service of Dterm 1 2 Y 96 00 15 Service Restriction Class C as signed by CM12 Y 07 1 With LCD Assign the Stack Dial key 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No F1000 Stack Dial Speed Calling Sta tion DESCRIPTION DATA Assign ...

Page 489: ...N ED00 ED03 CFT Card No Assign the Service Restriction Class B for Conference Leader 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX My Line No XX ZZ ZZ 00 15 Service Restriction Class B Allow Conference trunk access for Confer ence Leader in the Service Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 69 Conference Leader 00 15 Service Restriction Class B 1 Allow Assign the access codes for conference 1 2 Y 0 3 X XXXX Access...

Page 490: ...6 10 party conference Y 00 My Line No Key No X XXXXXXXX Multiple Line No Specify the Multiple Line number set by CM90 to be accommodated to Dterm 1 2 Y 05 X XXXXXXXX Multiple Line No 0 Accommodated Assign the card number of the Conference trunk CFT card to the required LEN NOTE The CFT card number must be assigned to the first LEN Level 0 of each LT slot 1 2 000 763 LEN ED00 ED03 CFT Card No Assig...

Page 491: ...e Camp On Tone sent to a busy station 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 146 Automatic Camp On 0 Available 147 Manual Camp On Result of Switch Hook Flash while hearing Busy Tone 0 Special Dial Tone allowing use of Camp On by Station access code 050 Button as Switch Hook Flash 1 Ineffective 051 Button as Switch Hook Flash 1 Ineffective 069 Single Digit Dialling on BT Con nection 1 Step Call 148 Same L...

Page 492: ...12 Y 02 1 2 Y 16 Transfer Method Y 43 Call Waiting Method Set from calling side Y 44 CallWaiting Method Answer from called side 00 15 Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Specify the timing for the Camp On Recall Timer 1 2 Y 0 26 01 15 16 sec 128 sec 8 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 24 32 sec Assign an access code for Camp On by Station 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbe...

Page 493: ...tation should be set to 5 and other stations should be set to 1 NOTE 1 The maximum number of sta tions per hunt group is 60 And there is no limit to the number of Circular Hunt groups within the system NOTE 2 Each station can belong to only one hunt group NOTE 3 The Attendant Console cannot be member of a hunt group 1 2 1 2 Y 0 X XXXXXXXX Station No to be in cluded in Station Hunt ing Group X XXXX...

Page 494: ... Hunting capability of each sec retary station Set up the order of Secretary Hunting Assign secretary station numbers one by one in order of the desired Secretary Hunting as shown below 1st Operation 1 Station A 2 Station B 2nd Operation 1 Station B 2 Station C 1 2 1 2 1 2 Y 0 00 30 Secretary Station Serial No X XXXXXXXX Secretary Station No Y 1 00 30 Secretary Station Serial No 5 Hunting As per C...

Page 495: ...data to 0 NOTE The maximum number of sta tions that can be included on one Station Hunting group is 60 in cluding the Pilot Station And there is no limit to the num ber of Terminal Hunt groups with in the system 1 2 1 2 Y 0 X XXXXXXXX Station No to be in cluded in Station Hunt ing Group X XXXXXXXX Another Station No to be included in the Same Hunting Group Y 1 X XXXXXXXX Station No 0 Member Statio...

Page 496: ...STATION LINE STATUS DISPLAY 476 A2463 10 STATION LINE STATUS DISPLAY PROGRAMMING Refer to Maintenance Manual ...

Page 497: ...l as simply SMDR terminal The PBX provides two kinds of SMDR One is the Main Processor MP built in SMDR and the another is the SMDR with Application Processor AP00 Call information is sent out from the MP or AP00 to the SMDR terminal when each call is com pleted If the SMDR terminal is not connected to the system or if the SMDR terminal is not ready for receiving information the call information i...

Page 498: ...ive information Busy Status the MP temporarily stores the call information into its internal memory When the number of the call records stored in MP reaches the maximum new call records will be lost The call record memory will be cleared by MP reset SMDR Terminal A Personal Computer is used as the SMDR terminal for receiving and processing the call information that arrives from the MP The SMDR ter...

Page 499: ...cific call to the SMDR terminal Four AP RS 232C ports can be used for the SMDR terminal interface The AP ports per form as DTE The system can accommodate a maximum of one AP00 card SMDR Terminal Asynchronous PC is used as the SMDR terminal for receiving and processing the call infor mation The maximum number of SMDR terminal is two which includes the number or Property Management System PMS termin...

Page 500: ...porarily HARDWARE REQUIRED 1 MP Built in SMDR MP card EXPMEM card PZ M537 on MP card if required RS RVS 4 S CA A B RS RVS 15 S CA A or RS NORM 4 S CA A SMDR terminal 2 SMDR with AP00 AP00 B card EXPMEM card PZ M537 on AP00 card if required RS RVS 4 S CA A B RS RVS 15 S CA A or RS NORM 4 S CA A SMDR terminal No EXPMEM card on AP00 provided EXPMEM card on AP00 provided When CMD001 179 is set to 0 No...

Page 501: ...ECORDING SMDR PROGRAMMING SUMMARY 481 A2477 10 PROGRAMMING SUMMARY Programming Summary for SMDR START END MP built in or AP AP Initilization SMDR with AP00 Programming Built in SMDR Programming MP AP page 483 page 486 page 487 ...

Page 502: ...All the system data pertaining to the station trunks and service features are already pro grammed Station Number Data Loading The AP00 stores the station number data loaded from the MP When station numbers have been added deleted or changed by CM10 the station number data must be reloaded to the AP00 by the following procedure 1 Flip the MB switch of the AP to UP position 2 Return the MB switch to...

Page 503: ...opposite SMDR terminal specifications 1 2 Y 01 Data length 0 RS 0 Port 0 7 bits 1 8 bits 1 2 Y 02 Parity check 0 RS 0 port 0 Effective 1 Ineffective 1 2 Y 03 Kind of parity 0 RS 0 Port 0 Even parity 1 Odd parity 1 2 Y 04 Stop bit 0 RS 0 Port 0 One stop bit 1 Two stop bits 1 2 Y 05 DTR signal 0 RS 0 Port 0 Low 1 High 1 2 Y 06 RTS signal 0 RS 0 Port 0 Low 1 High 1 2 Y 08 Data speed 0 RS 0 Port 1 120...

Page 504: ... data is set the default data is 20 24 sec Specify the method of charging a trans ferred call The following table shows the station to which call charging is to be made in the case of various transfer patterns 1 2 424 Charging method 0 Charging to the first transferring station or the final destination sta tion 1 Split charging to both the transfer ring station and the transfer desti nation statio...

Page 505: ...quired trunk routes 1 2 Y 49 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 To provide 1 Not provided Specify whether the SMDR service is ef fective only for incoming calls with Account Code or not 1 2 426 SMDR for incoming call 0 Effective for all incoming calls 1 Effective only for incoming calls with Account Code Specify whether or not the ANI Caller ID is sent to SMDR NOTE When this data is assigned to 1 SMDR service...

Page 506: ...tive or not by the RUN lamp indication The RUN lamp flashes on green color when the AP is in active When you install the AP00 at first time you should assign the data shown below DESCRIPTION DATA Assign an AP number to the AP00 card The AP number must match the SENSE switch setting on the AP00 card 1 2 Y 0 04 15 20 31 AP No 04 AP00 card On the AP00 card set SW1 switch as shown below SW1 4 should b...

Page 507: ... 00 Sun 01 Mon 02 Tue 03 Wed 04 Thu 05 Fri 06 Sat 1 2 2 Time HH MM SS HH 00 23 Hour MM 00 59 Minute SS 00 59 Second Provide the SMDR service for outgoing calls to the required stations 1 2 Y 06 X XXXX Station No 1 To provide Provide the SMDR service for outgoing calls to the required trunk routes 1 2 Y 14 00 63 Trunk Route No 1 To provide Assign a Trunk Access Code for SMDR 1 2 Y 44 00 63 Trunk Ro...

Page 508: ...nt 1 To send Specify whether call start year and call end year are sent to the SMDR terminal Australia Only 1 2 238 0 Not sent 1 To send Specify the condition code 1 2 for Advice of charge in SMDR NEAX2400 IMS For mat Australia Only 1 2 276 0 Condition Code 1 is 1 cent unit Condition Code 2 is 0 1 cent unit 1 Condition Code 1 is 0 1 cent unit Condition Code 2 is 1 cent unit Specify the measured ra...

Page 509: ... table For SMDR NEAX2400 IMS Format NOTE For the Port 1 and Port 3 data speed 9600 bps can not be set CMD001 B C AP00 INITIAL FIRST DATA 1 MEANING SECOND DATA 2 MEANING PORT 0 PORT 1 PORT 2 PORT 3 20 24 28 32 Data Speed 2 3 4 5 1200 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps NOTE 21 25 29 33 Stop Bit Length 0 1 2 1 bit 1 5 bits 2 bits 22 26 30 34 Data Length 0 1 7 bits 8 bits 23 27 31 35 Parity 0 1 2 None Par...

Page 510: ...NG PORT 0 PORT 1 PORT 2 PORT 3 20 24 28 32 Data Speed 2 3 4 5 1200 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps 9600 bps NOTE 21 25 29 33 Stop Bit Length 0 1 2 1 bit 1 5 bits 2 bits 22 26 30 34 Data Length 0 1 7 bits 8 bits 23 27 31 35 Parity 0 1 2 None Parity Even Parity Odd Parity 80 100 120 140 Equipment Type 4 5 Computer 0 Computer 1 81 101 121 141 Priority for Data Processing 0 1st 82 102 122 142 Message Format 4 N...

Page 511: ...or SMDR which is set to 4 by CMD001 80 100 120 140 NOTE 1 When the data is set to 1 27000 external alarm of memory over flow is available if CM44 2nd data 3001 is assigned 1 2 29 0 Not Record 1 27000 1 call 27000 calls NOTE 2 The amount of call record number set by CMD003 23 24 25 26 28 29 30 must not exceed the following number CMD003 CMD001 D E 1st digit 2nd digit 3rd digit 4th digit Amount of C...

Page 512: ...int out all of the stored call records CMD102 deletes all of the stored records 1 2 0000 CCC On the AP00 card set the SW1 switch as shown below SW1 4 should be set as follows ON The AP No is 04 15 OFF The AP No is 20 31 The buffering method when the number of the stored SMDR information has reached to the predetermined value 1 2 41 0 No new data is stored 1 New data is stored by deleting the oldes...

Page 513: ... or Attendant Con sole 1 2 X XXXX Station No 000 063 Group No 1 2 00 07 ATTCON No 0 7 000 063 Group No Assign the Charging Station Class number to each station number 1 2 X XXXX Station No 00 15 Station Class No Specify the direction for sending of billing information on C O outgoing calls 1 2 XX 16 Sending of billing information of C O outgoing calls to the PMS SMDR terminal set to 4 by CMD001 80...

Page 514: ...tgoing trunk routes 1 2 00 63 Trunk Route No 000 511 Development Table No Specify the call information sending func tion to each dialed number 1 2 XXX Y XXX 000 511 Call Development Table No assigned by CMD026 Y 0 9 A B Dialed Digit XXX3 Refer to next digit assignment XXX 000 511 Next Develop ment Table No 9 Send to SMDR Assign a Call Development Table number to each outgoing trunk route 1 2 00 63...

Page 515: ...ming calls to the required stations 1 2 Y 05 X XXXX Station No 0 To provide 1 Not provided Provide SMDR service for incoming calls to the required trunk routes 1 2 Y 49 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 To provide Specify SMDR service for incoming calls with or regardless of Account Code en try 1 2 70 0 Effective for incoming calls with Account Codes only 1 Effective for all incoming calls CM13 H I CM35 CMD0...

Page 516: ...D016 1 2 X XXXX Station No 00 15 Service Class No 1 2 XX 30 Sending of billing information of C O Tie Line incoming calls to the SMDR terminal set to 4 by CMD001 80 100 120 140 XX Service Class No assigned by CMD015 0 Not sent 1 To send 1 2 XX 55 Sending of billing information of C O Tie Line incoming calls to the SMDR terminal set to 5 by CMD001 80 100 120 140 XX Service Class No assigned by CMD0...

Page 517: ...the direction for sending of billing information on tandem calls 1 2 77 Sending of billing information of tandem calls to the SMDR terminal set to 4 by CMD001 80 100 120 140 78 Sending of billing information of tandem calls to the SMDR terminal set to 5 by CMD001 80 100 120 140 0 Not sent 1 To send Specify the contents for tandem call infor mation 1 2 79 0 Only outgoing call information 1 Both out...

Page 518: ...ure to assign different numbers to the last 4 digits for each 5 digit station number DESCRIPTION DATA Specify the storing of 5 digit station num ber in station database of AP00 1 2 252 1 Store last 4 digits of 5 digit station number All the fixed first digit to the last 4 digits of 5 digit station number on SMDR output 1 2 71 1 To add Specify the first digit number to be added to 5 digit station n...

Page 519: ...ee PUSHBUTTON CALLING page 392 1 2 Y 00 Telephone types X XXXXXXXX Station No 1 DP 10PPS 2 DTMF 3 DTMF DP 1 2 Y 04 Tenant X XXXXXXXX Station No 00 63 Tenant No 1 2 Y 03 Tenant X XXXXXXXX Station No 15 Ordinary Station Assign the Station Numbering Plan data to the leading one two three or four digits of station number 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Leading 1 4 digits of Station No 801 1 ...

Page 520: ...2499 10 DESCRIPTION DATA If the multiple Tenant is provided specify the station to station call capability be tween Tenants 1 2 Y 1 XX ZZ XX Tenant No of Calling Station ZZ Tenant No of Called Station 0 Restricted 1 Allowed END CM63 A ...

Page 521: ...STATION TO STATION CALLING OPERATOR ASSISTANCE 501 A2499 10 STATION TO STATION CALLING OPERATOR ASSISTANCE PROGRAMMING Refer to SMART CONSOLE SN708 SN709 SN712 ATTCON page 432 ...

Page 522: ...A Provide the system with Step Call feature NOTE This feature is mutually exclusive with the SINGLE DIGIT FEA TURE ACCESS CODE page 426 1 2 1 2 1 2 069 On internal call 1 Step Call 163 On Tie Line incoming call 1 Available 208 NOTE 1 Not available CM08 START END ...

Page 523: ...WARE REQUIRED LDT ODT card DESCRIPTION DATA Specify the combination of Trunk Routes allowing the Tandem connection Incoming Trunk Route must provide re lease signal for Tandem Connection See CM35 Y 05 1 2 Y 0 XX ZZ XX 00 63 Incoming Trunk Route ZZ 00 63 Outgoing Trunk Route 0 Allow 1 Restricted CM36 START END ...

Page 524: ...3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A000 A099 801 818 A100 A152 100 163 300 323 Tenant Block 00 23 When Tenant Block 00 23 is assigned by CM20 assign a trunk route and Tenant number to the Tenant Block 1 2 Y 00 23 Tenant Block 00 23 00 63 Tenant No 100 163 Trunk Route 00 63 When an External Key for Day Night Mode change or Class of Service change is re quired assign the DK card to requir...

Page 525: ... assigned by CM60 Y 00 00 63 Tenant No 0 To be handled 1 Not to be handled Specify whether Inter Tenant connection is available for station to station calling In coming Call Termination and TAS answer 1 2 Y 0 TAS Answer XX ZZ XX Tenant No of TAS Answer Station ZZ Tenant No of Trunk 0 Allow 1 Restricted 1 2 Y 1 Station to Station Calling XX ZZ XX Tenant No of Calling Station ZZ Tenant No of Called ...

Page 526: ...M08 101 1 2 103 0 As per CM08 104 1 2 104 1 Three Way Connection among stations and trunk call Make the Conference trunk on the MP card in service 1 2 Y 6 Make Busy 00 15 CFT Circuit No 1 In service Specify purpose of each Conference trunk on the MP card as For both attendant and station 1 2 Y 7 Purpose of CFT 00 15 CFT Circuit No 1 For both attendant and stations CM45 CM08 END START ...

Page 527: ...h Tie Line Trunk route 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code 100 163 Trunk Route No 00 63 Assign a Trunk Route and Tenant number to each Trunk 1 2 Y 00 000 255 Trunk No 00 63 Trunk Route No 1 2 Y 01 000 255 Trunk No 00 63 Trunk Route No Assign Trunk Route data to the Trunk Route number 1 2 Y 00 00 63 Trunk Route No 04 Tie Line 1 2 Y 01 00 63 Trunk Route No Incoming Outgoing 2 DP DP...

Page 528: ...2nd DT sending on call termina tion 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 No Tone 1 2nd Dial Tone 1 2 Y 13 Maximum Number of Sending Digits 00 63 Trunk Route No 001 254 1 digit 254 digits If no data is set sender is released when timed out or called station answer Assign the appropriate data for the char acteristic of distant PBX NOTE This data should be set to each route according to the data for CM35 Y 09 as s...

Page 529: ...11 0 sec 14 12 0 sec 15 3 0 sec When CM35 Y 01 is 2 assign data for the DP Sender characteristics 1 2 Y 23 DP Sender Inter Digital Pause 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 300 ms 1 400 ms 2 500 ms 3 600 ms 4 700 ms 5 900 ms 6 1100 ms 7 800 ms 1 2 Y 25 DP Sender Make Ratio 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 39 Make Ratio 1 33 Make Ratio 1 2 Y 45 DP Sender Release Timing 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 2 sec 1 4 sec 2 6 sec 3 8 sec...

Page 530: ... 46 DTMF Sender Release Timing 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 2 sec 1 4 sec 2 6 sec 3 8 sec 4 12 sec 5 14 sec 6 16 sec 7 10 sec Specify the desired station ring rate and Dterm Tone Ringer NOTE For details refer to DISTINC TIVE RINGING page 234 1 2 Y 33 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 0 4 sec ON 0 2 sec OFF 0 4 sec ON 2 sec OFF 1 0 4 sec ON 0 2 sec OFF 0 4 sec ON 2 sec OFF 2 1 sec ON 2 sec OFF 3 See CM08 392 NOTE 1...

Page 531: ...0 2 wire E M Trunk 1 4 wire E M Trunk 1 2 Y 104 Polarity of E M Trunk 00 63 Trunk Route No 1 E wire Open M wire Open 2 E wire Ground M wire Battery 3 E wire Ground M wire Ground Specify the restriction of incoming call ter mination to different Tenant 1 2 Y 2 XX ZZ XX Tenant No of called station ZZ Tenant No of Trunk 0 Restricted 1 Allow Provide DTMF Receivers for Tie Line In coming Calls if requi...

Page 532: ...ixed PAD See Table 1 or Table 2 T R Transmit Receive Gain Loss START CM35 A Table 1 Fixed PAD for Australia CONNECTION PATTERNS A B PAD DATA OF B TRUNK DATA 4 T R DATA 5 T R DATA 6 T R DATA 7 T R Station ODT 0 0 0 0 0 0 Tone ODT 0 0 0 0 0 0 COT LDT ODT 0 0 8 8 8 8 ODT ODT 0 0 8 8 3 3 DTI BRT ODT 0 0 8 8 3 3 Station LDT 0 6 0 6 0 6 Tone LDT 0 6 0 6 0 6 LDT LDT 0 6 6 6 6 6 ODT LDT 0 6 6 6 0 6 DTI BR...

Page 533: ... 3 Tone ODT 4W E M 0 0 0 0 COT LDT ODT 4W E M 2 2 0 0 ODT 4W E M ODT 4W E M 0 0 0 0 DTI ODT 4W E M 0 0 0 0 Station COT LDT ODT 2W E M 0 6 0 6 Tone COT LDT ODT 2W E M 0 0 0 0 COT LDT ODT 2W E M COT LDT ODT 2W E M 0 0 0 0 ODT 4W E M COT LDT ODT 2W E M 0 0 0 0 DTI COT LDT ODT 2W E M 0 0 0 0 Table 3 PAD Data Patterns PAD DATA PATTERMS CONNECTING PATTERNS A TRUNK B TRUNK CM35 Y 19 2ND DATA 0 CM35 Y 19 ...

Page 534: ... 0 6 02 8 8 6 6 03 6 6 0 0 04 0 0 0 6 05 0 6 0 0 06 6 0 0 0 07 0 0 0 0 08 15 Not Used PATTERNS 2ND DATA Table 5 Programmable PAD for Other Countries T R Transmit Receive Gain Loss PAD DATA OF B TRUNK T R dB REMARKS ODT 4W E M ODT 2W E M COT LDT DTI BRT 00 15 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 2 02 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 3 03 2 2 3 3 3 3 0 6 04 3 3 0 0 0 0 3 8 05 12 11 6 6 6 6 3 3 06 16 11 0 0 0 5 6 6 07 6...

Page 535: ...Duration of Calling 28 sec 32 sec 1 2 Y 0 35 Number of Times of Call Attempt 01 07 Once 7 times If no data is set the default setting is 3 times 1 2 36 Interval time of Call Attempt 11 31 48 sec 124 sec 4 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 120 124 sec 1 2 37 Duration of Calling 05 31 20 sec 124 sec 4 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 28 32 sec Assign the ...

Page 536: ...t and cancel 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A024 Set A025 Cancel Designate the type of tone source to be connected when answering a Timed Re minder call 1 2 Y 1 00 Tone source of Timed Reminder 1400 Hold Tone source on MP card Assign the Timed Reminder feature ac cess key to a Dterm if required 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No F0024 Specify the timing for Timed Reminder Start 1 2 ...

Page 537: ... before abandonment 1 2 03 01 05 Number of attempted Timed Re minder call If no data is set the default setting is 05 Specify the maximum number of Timed Reminder calls that can be set at the same time 1 2 04 01 32 Max number of stations If no data is set the default setting is 16 END A CM42 ...

Page 538: ... 02 1 Allow Assign the access code for Timed Re minder set and cancel 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A024 Set A025 Cancel Assign the COT card and DK to the re quired LEN NOTE The DK card number must be as signed to the first LEN Level 0 and the third LEN Level 2 of each LT slot 1 2 000 763 LEN DB00 DB09 Interface Card No for Ex ternal Announcement Machine E800 E831 DK card N...

Page 539: ... Before 5 minutes of preset time Specify the duration of a Timed Reminder call 1 2 Y 0 23 01 08 4 sec 32 sec 4 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 28 32 sec Specify the duration of Message Reply Timer for Timed Reminder 1 2 Y 0 52 01 99 4 sec 396 sec 4 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 60 64 sec Specify the number of Timed Reminder call attempts before aba...

Page 540: ...on Class A for Timed Reminder set and cancel 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX My Line No XX ZZ XX 00 15 Service Restriction Class A Allow Timed Reminder in the Service Re striction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 13 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign the access code for Timed Re minder set and cancel 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A024 Set A025 Ca...

Page 541: ...ration of message replay for Timed Reminder 1 2 Y 0 52 01 99 4 sec 396 sec 4 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 60 64 sec Specify the number of Timed Reminder call attempts before abandonment 1 2 03 01 15 Number of attempted Timed Re minder call If no data is set the default setting is 05 Specify the maximum number of Timed Reminder calls that can be set at the same time 1 2 0...

Page 542: ...rnal Music Source MP card To provide the External Announcement Machine COT card DK card or MP card built in External Equipment Interface External Announcement Machine provided locally To provide the internal digital announcement soure DAT card or MP card built in DAT ...

Page 543: ...sion or the Toll Denial 1 2 119 0 Toll Diversion Routed to ICPT key on ATTCON 1 Toll Denial Routed to Reorder Tone Assign a Trunk Restriction Class to each station 1 2 Y 01 X XXXXXXXX Station No X Z Trunk Restriction Class X 1 8 In Day Mode Z 1 8 In Night Mode Specify the route access capability of each Restriction Class See RESTRICTION FROM OUTGOING CALLS page 414 1 2 Y 51 58 00 63 Trunk Route No...

Page 544: ...r Direct Outward Dialing to the trunk number assigned by CM10 1 2 Y 00 Route Allocation 000 255 Trunk No 00 63 Trunk Route No 1 2 Y 01 Tenant Allocation 000 255 Trunk No 00 63 Trunk Route No 1 2 Y 08 Restriction on Night Mode 000 255 Trunk No 0 Restricted 1 Allowed Assign the data for Direct Outward Dialing to the Route number assigned by CM30 Y 00 1 2 Y 00 Kind of Route 00 63 Trunk Route No 00 DD...

Page 545: ...iming set by CM41 Y 0 03 1 2 Y 05 Release Signal Condition 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 No Release Signal from C O 1 Release Signal from C O 1 2 Y 08 Dial Pulse Sending 00 63 Trunk Route No 3 To send 1 2 Y 09 Signaling 00 63 Trunk Route No 15 Ring Down Loop Start 1 2 Y 13 Maximum number of sending digits 00 63 Trunk Route No 001 254 Maximum number of sending digits 1 2 Y 39 Trunk Release by Reverse Sign...

Page 546: ... Make Ratio Y 26 DTMF Signal Width Y 45 DP Sender Release Timing Y 46 DTMF Sender Release Timing Y 0 27 03 14 3 sec 14 sec 1 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 7 sec Assign the access code to each route 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code 100 163 Trunk Route No 00 63 Assign the maximum number of sending digits dialed after C O access code 1 2 Y 0 7 Area Code ...

Page 547: ... 1 RCB 3 Non Restricted 2 RCC 4 Semi Restricted 1 RCD 5 Semi Restricted 2 RCE 6 Restricted 1 RCF 7 Restricted 2 RCG 8 Fully Restricted RCH Assign the data for Dial Pulse sending to the Route number assigned 1 2 Y 08 Dial Pulse Sending 00 63 Trunk Route No 3 To send Provide the Toll Restriction feature to re quired trunk routes 1 2 Y 11 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 To provide Specify outgoing route acces...

Page 548: ...he maximum number of digits including the area codes should be assigned to each area code 1 2 Y 0 4 Area Code Development Pattern No 0 4 assigned by CM35 Y 76 X X X Area Code dialed Max 8 digits 01 24 1 24 digits 25 79 25 79 digits CM81 A B CM85 TRUNK RESTRICTION CLASS Y 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 00 TOLL RESTRICTION PATTERN NUMBER ON EACH TRUNK RESTRICTION CLASS 01 02 03 04 05 0...

Page 549: ...e is changed according to the Tenant Date and Time assign the re quired patterns Tenant Time and Date to the area code 1 2 Y 4000 4004 Area Code Development No 0 4 Area Code Max 8 digits B000 B015 Trunk Restriction Pattern 00 15 To add a Tenant Pattern STEP 1 Assign the area code to be re stricted and a Tenant Pattern number to the Area Code De velopment Pattern No as signed by CM35 Y 76 1 2 Y 400...

Page 550: ...he TR Pattern number as signed by Step 3 1 2 Y 5000 5255 TR Pattern No 000 00 15 Trunk Restriction Pattern No 00 15 To add a Time and Date Pattern STEP 1 Assign the area code to be re stricted and a Date Pattern num ber to the Area Code Development Pattern number assigned by CM35 Y 76 1 2 Y 4000 4004 Area Code Max 8 digits 3000 3003 Date Pattern No 0 3 STEP 2 Assign a Date and Time Pattern number ...

Page 551: ...0 2007 Time Pattern No 0 7 XX ZZ Time to Change XX 00 23 Hours ZZ 00 30 Minutes 0000 0255 Route Pattern No 000 255 If Tenant Pattern is required set 1000 1015 Tenant Pattern No 00 15 STEP 4 Assign the TR Pattern number to the Route Pattern number as signed by Step 3 1 2 Y 0000 0255 Route Pattern No 000 255 1 XXX 00 XXX 000 255 TR Pattern No STEP 5 Assign the Trunk Restriction Pat tern number assig...

Page 552: ...2 RCG 8 Fully Restricted RCH Assign the Service Restriction Class B for the TAS to required stations 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX Station No XX ZZ ZZ 00 15 Service Restriction Class B Allow TAS service in the Service Restric tion Class B assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 53 00 15 Service Restriction Class B assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign the TAS to the terminating system in Night Mode for required trunks A...

Page 553: ...gn the access code for each type of TAS TAS Answer A E assigned by CM53 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A047 TAS Answer A A048 TAS Answer B A049 TAS Answer C A050 TAS Answer D A051 TAS Answer E Specify the tenants allowing TAS Answer between them 1 2 Y 0 XX ZZ XX 00 63 Tenant No of TAS Answer station ZZ 00 63 Tenant No of Trunk 0 Allow 1 Restricted CM20 CM63 END CM53 A 1 Y 0 ...

Page 554: ...PIM4 5 E816 E823 For PIM6 7 E824 E831 Assign the TAS Group number assigned by CM30 Y 17 to circuit number of DK card NOTE MP built in External Equipment Interface is not available for Ex ternal TAS Indicator Connection 1 2 XX Y XX 00 31 DK Card No assigned by CM10 E800 E831 Y 0 3 Circuit No 13XX XX 00 63 TAS Group No 00 63 assigned by CM30 Y 17 Specify the indication pattern on External TAS Indica...

Page 555: ...l Method Ground Battery 24 V Max 125 mA Type Visual and or Audible type with volume control To provide the telephone set for TAS Indication LC card Conventional telephone sets DESCRIPTION DATA Assign theTAS Buzzer number telephone set for TAS Indication to required LEN The TAS Buzzer number must correspond to the TAS group number assigned by CM30 Y 17 E600 E663 TAS Group 00 63 1 2 000 763 LEN E600...

Page 556: ...p Busy Lamps on ATTCON assign the trunk group number to required key NOTE 1 Max 6 keys per ATTCON can be assigned Any six trunk group number out of trunk group num ber 01 62 can be assigned NOTE 2 Key number 1 6 should not be assigned to provide a Trunk Group Busy Lamp 1 2 Y 00 ATTCON No E000 E007 Key No F12 XX XX 01 62 Trunk Group No assigned by CM30 Y 09 For providing external Trunk Group Busy L...

Page 557: ...y No D000 D255 Trunk No Assign a Hold key for holding the Trunk Line Appearance call to each Dterm as re quired By this assignment the held Trunk Line Appearance call can be Transferred by voice call and can be answered by the Trunk Line Appearance key on the desti nation station 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No F0058 Specify whether a Dial Tone is sent when the call is held by the Hold key for Trunk Li...

Page 558: ...My Line No Key No F0059 Trunk Answer Key Assign Trunk Answer to be used for analog telephones 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A059 Trunk Answer Assign Trunk Hold to be used for analog telephones 1 2 X XXXX Access Code A058 Trunk Hold Assign ID code for each C O trunk 1 2 Y 19 000 255 Trunk No ABCD Trunk ID code Assign Answer preference 1 2 114 0 Answer by 2 digit Trunk ID cod...

Page 559: ... of Trunks Trunk ID Code Display Availability of HOLD Key CM90 Y 00 2nd Data F0058 0 Provided Available 1 Not provided Not assigned Not available Assigned CCIS trunk Not available ISDN trunk CM35 Y 146 is set to 0 Trunk ID Code is displayed Available CM35 Y 146 is set to 1 Calling called sub address is displayed Not available Other trunks CM35 Y 75 is set to 0 DID incoming LDN is displayed Not ava...

Page 560: ...ncoming trunk route ZZ 00 63 Outgoing trunk route 0 Allow 1 Restricted Provide the system with Ring Transfer for Call Transfer All Calls to a trunk when a station holds another station or trunk 1 2 253 0 Available Provide the system with forced release when a tandem call duration passes a pre determined time 1 2 029 0 To disconnect 1 To continue Allow or restrict forced release of tandem connectio...

Page 561: ...h Trunk to Trunk Connection transferred by a station or an attendant when no answer signal arrives and release signal arrives from the outgo ing trunk route 1 2 028 0 Available 1 Not available Specify the forced release timing for tan dem connection when the called party does not answer This data is available when no release sig nal arrives from incoming trunk route 1 2 Y 0 55 01 13 12 sec 60 sec ...

Page 562: ... to each combi nation of the trunk routes 1 2 Y 00 XX ZZ XX 00 63 Incoming trunk route ZZ 00 63 Outgoing trunk route 00 14 AMP pattern No 00 14 15 Not use the AMP trunk Assign the gain value of each AMP pat tern 1 2 Y 01 00 14 AMP pattern No 00 14 X Z X AGC Automatic Gain Control 0 0 dBr 1 4 dBr 2 4 dBr 3 Through assigned by Fixed Gain Z Fixed Gain 0 12 dB 1 8 dB 2 4 dB 3 0 dB Assign the Echo Canc...

Page 563: ...ch AMP pattern 1 2 Y 05 00 14 AMP pattern No 00 14 0 0 sec 1 2 sec Specify the channels connected to each AMP pattern 1 2 Y 06 00 14 AMP pattern No 00 14 0 Incoming route Tie Line Outgoing route C O Line 1 Incoming route C O Line Outgoing route Tie Line Specify the timing of AMP trunk connec tion on each AMP pattern 1 2 Y 07 00 14 AMP pattern No 00 14 0 When dialing is finished 1 When answering EN...

Page 564: ... NOTE The trunk associated with at least one side of the call must be programmed for answer and or release signal s to ensure the trunks do not lock up As for the data to be assigned to each trunk refer to TRUNK TO TRUNK CONNECTION page 540 DESCRIPTION DATA Provide the system with this feature 1 2 206 0 Available 1 Not available START CM08 END ...

Page 565: ...TRUNK TO TRUNK THIRD PARTY CANCELLATION 545 A2536 10 TRUNK TO TRUNK THIRD PARTY CANCELLATION PROGRAMMING Refer to CONSULTATION HOLD ALL CALLS page 168 ...

Page 566: ...5 For the held call from C O Line 0 Reconnected by Switch Hook Flash 1 Disconnected Specify the transferred C O call from a station or an attendant is placed into queu ing mode when call UCD stations are busy NOTE This data is only effective when CM08 212 is set to 1 1 2 227 0 Thiscallisplacedintoqueuingmode NOTE 1 Recall to the transferring station when the call is transferred from station or Att...

Page 567: ... station numbers 200 201 202 into one UCD Group 1st Operation 1 200 2 201 2nd Operation 1 201 2 202 3rd Operation 1 202 2 200 1 2 Y 0 X XXXXXXXX Station No X XXXXXXXX Another Station No to be linked Assign the Pilot Station and Member Sta tion 1 2 Y 1 X XXXXXXXX UCD Station No 0 Member Station 1 Pilot Station Assign the UCD Group number 1 2 Y 2 X XXXXXXXX UCD Station No 00 15 UCD Group 00 15 CM17 ...

Page 568: ... X XXXXXXXX Pilot Station No of UCD Group 0 Not provided 1 To provide 1 2 Y 7 DID Automated Attendant Call X XXXXXXXX Pilot Station No of UCD Group 0 Not provided 1 To provide 1 2 Y B Designation of number of queuing in each UCD group X XXXXXXXX Pilot Station No of UCD group 0 To provide See CM42 16 1 Not provided No limit Specify the maximum number of queuing in each UCD group before busy tone is...

Page 569: ...is set the default setting is 32 36 sec Assign the access code for UCD Station Busy Out Set and Reset 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A044 Busy Out Set A045 Busy Out Reset Assign the UCD Busy Out key on the Dterm if required 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No F0044 UCD Busy Out Assign the Release key on the Dterm if required 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No F1020 Release CM20 END CM41 C CM...

Page 570: ... queuing in each UCD group If no data is set the default setting is 01 NOTE Depending on the number of queuing station trunk lamp indi cation pattern on Dterm is differ ent as shown below N Number of queuing station trunk Assign the Overflowed UCD Call Indica tion LED to the required Dterm 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No F1280 F1295 UCD Group 0 15 CM42 CM90 START END CM08 CONDITIONS LAMP INDICATION 2nd...

Page 571: ...tor is different as shown below N Number of queuing station trunk Assign the DK card to the required LEN NOTE The DK card number must be as signed to the first LEN Level 0 and the third LEN Level 2 of each LT slot 1 2 000 763 LEN E800 E831 DK Card No For PIM0 1 E800 E807 For PIM2 3 E808 E815 For PIM4 5 E816 E823 For PIM6 7 E824 E831 NOTE Circuit No 3 of E831 is used for built in External Equip men...

Page 572: ...X 00 31 DK Card No assigned by CM10 E800 E831 Y 0 3 Circuit No 313 MP Built in External Equipment Interface 14XX XX 00 15 UCD Group No assigned by CM17 Specify the UCD Overflow Indicator indi cation pattern 1 2 00 01 30 IPM 1 sec ON OFF 02 60 IPM 0 5 sec ON OFF 03 120 IPM 0 25 sec ON OFF 07 Steady on NONE 120 IPM 0 25 sec ON OFF CM59 END CM44 A ...

Page 573: ... Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 103 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign the Service Restriction Class A for monitored stations NOTE Monitoring telephone conversa tions may be illegal under certain circumstances and laws Consult a legal advisor before imple menting the monitoring of tele phone conversations 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX Station No ...

Page 574: ...0 DESCRIPTION DATA Assign the access code for monitor if re quired 1 2 Y 0 3 Number Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A033 Monitor Assign monitoring function key to the re quired Dterms 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No F0033 Monitor CM90 CM20 A END ...

Page 575: ...r visual or audible type provided by the customer DESCRIPTION DATA Assign Priority Queuing per trunk route 1 2 Y 60 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 To provide 1 Not provided Assign Digit Conversion on DID call if re quired 1 2 Y 18 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 To provide 1 Not provided Assign Priority Queuing per DID incoming number 1 2 Y 11 000 999 Number Conversion Block No assigned by CM76 Y 00 0 Not provided...

Page 576: ...roup 1 A128 LCR Group 2 A129 LCR Group 3 Assign an Area Code Development Pat tern number to each LCR Group 1 2 Y A000 0 3 LCR Group 0 3 4005 4007 Area Code Development Pattern No 5 7 Assign a Route Pattern number to each area code for the Area Code Development Pattern number assigned by CM8A Y A000 1 2 Y 4005 4007 Area Code Development Pattern No 5 7 X X Area Code Max 8 digits 0000 0255 Route Patt...

Page 577: ... 0255 Route Pattern No 000 255 1 4 Order of LCR Selection 1 1st 2 2nd 3 3rd 4 4th XXX ZZ XXX 000 255 LCR Pattern No 000 255 ZZ 00 63 Trunk Route No 00 63 Assign the digits to be deleted from the calls to distant offices To delete all digits of an area code 1 2 Y 5000 5255 LCR Pattern No 000 255 151 Deletion of all digits of area code assigned by CM8A Y 4000 4007 0 To delete To delete the designate...

Page 578: ...nk routes when adding a digits to those received from a distant office 1 2 Y 17 00 63 Trunk Route No 00 0 Addition 01 1 Addition 02 2 Addition 03 3 Addition 04 4 Addition 05 5 Addition 06 6 Addition 07 7 Addition 08 8 Addition 09 9 Addition 10 2 digits Addition as per CM50 Y 00 0 Assign the data for digit deletion to the re quired trunk routes for deleting the first one or two digits received from...

Page 579: ...No 5 8A Y 4005 8A Y 4005 8A Y 4005 21 22 23 0000 0000 0000 Assignment of Route Pattern No 00 to Area Code 21 22 and 23 8A Y 0000 1 00000 Assignment of the order of LCR Selection 1st for Route Pattern No assigned by CM8A Y 4005 8A Y 5000 100 9000 Assignment of Digit Addition Pattern No 000 8A Y 9000 0 8 Assignment of the digit code to be added for each area code PBX OFFICE A OFFICE B OFFICE C 21 20...

Page 580: ...A Y 4005 21 0001 Assignment of Route Pattern No 001 to the Area Code 21 of Office B 8A Y 4005 838 8000 Assignment of Intra Office Termination to the office code 838 8A Y 0000 1 00001 Assignment of the order of LCR selection 1st for Route Pattern No assigned by CM8A Y 4005 PBX OFFICE A OFFICE B 838 XXXX 821 XXXX DIAL NO 821 XXXX 8838 XXX TRUNK ROUTE 01 Trunk Route to Office B Tie Line Access Code A...

Page 581: ...ttern No 5 7 Assign an Route Pattern number to each area code for the Area Code Development Pattern number assigned by CM8A Y A000 1 2 Y 4005 4007 Area Code Development Pattern No 5 7 X XXXXXXXX Area Code Max 8 dig its 0000 0255 Route Pattern No 000 255 Assign an area code station number for Intra Office Terminations if required 1 2 Y 4005 4007 Area Code Development Pattern No 5 7 X XXXXXXXX Area ...

Page 582: ...00 63 Trunk Route No 00 63 Assign the digits to be deleted when delet ing the digits of area code sent to a distant office To delete all digits of an area code 1 2 Y 5000 5255 LCR Pattern No 000 255 151 Deletion of all digits of area code assigned by CM8A Y 4005 4007 0 To delete To delete the designated digit of an area code 1 2 Y 5000 5255 153 Designation of digit to be deleted 00 No digit deleti...

Page 583: ...unk routes when adding a digits to the digits received from a distant office 1 2 Y 17 00 63 Trunk Route No 00 0 Addition 01 1 Addition 02 2 Addition 03 3 Addition 04 4 Addition 05 5 Addition 06 6 Addition 07 7 Addition 08 8 Addition 09 9 Addition 10 2 digits Addition as per CM50 Y 00 0 Assign the data for digit deletion to re quired trunk routes for deleting the first one or two digits received fr...

Page 584: ...Y 4005 8A Y 4005 8A Y 4005 72 73 8 0000 0000 0000 Assignment of Route Pattern No 000 to the Area Code 72 73 8 8A Y 4005 715 8004 Assignment of 4 Digit Intra Office Station to the Area Code 715 8A Y 0000 1 00000 Assignment of the order of LCR Selection 1st for Route Pattern No assigned by CM8A Y 4005 PBX OFFICE A OFFICE B OFFICE C 72XX 714X 715XX 72XX 73XX 8XXX 73XX 8XXX Trunk Route to Office A Are...

Page 585: ... 5 8A Y 4005 740 0001 Assignment of Route Pattern No 001 to the Area Code 740 of office B 8A Y 4005 735 8004 Assignment of 4 Digits Intra Office Station to the Area Code 735 8A Y 0000 1 00001 Assignment of the order of LCR selection 1st for Route Pattern No assigned by CM8A Y 4005 PBX OFFICE A OFFICE B 7350 7400 DIAL NO 7400 7350 TRUNK ROUTE 01 Trunk Route to Office B Area Code of Office B Area Co...

Page 586: ...UNIVERSAL SENDER 566 A2566 10 UNIVERSAL SENDER PROGRAMMING Refer to DIRECT INWARD DIALLING DID page 222 and LEAST COST ROUTING 3 6 DIGIT page 286 ...

Page 587: ...TERS PROGRAMMING DESCRIPTION DATA Specify the Timing Parameters according to the user s requirements If no data is set Displayed NONE the standard timing which is initially set is ap plied 1 2 Y 0 1 2 3 See the COMMAND MANUAL See the COMMAND MANUAL START END CM41 ...

Page 588: ...Not provided Busy Tone 1 To provide 271 0 Not provided Busy Tone 1 To provide Provide the system with the Single Digit Feature Access Code on RBT Connec tion To activate the Single Digit Feature Ac cess Code set CM08 050 051 069 and 148 to 1 NOTE A single digit access code 1 is fixedly assigned to this feature 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 156 0 Available 050 Button as Switch Hook Flash 1 Ineffective 051 Bu...

Page 589: ...w Assign the Service Restriction Class C for Voice Call Mike Off called side to the re quired Dterm if required 1 2 Y 07 X XXXXXXXX My Line No 00 15 Service Restriction Class C Allow Voice Call Mike Off called side in the Service Restriction Class C assigned by CM12 Y 07 1 2 Y 99 00 15 Service Restriction Class C assigned by CM12 Y 07 0 Available Assign the Voice Call key to the required Dterm if ...

Page 590: ...fth LEN Level 4 and the seventh LEN Level 6 of each LT slot 1 2 000 763 LEN EB002 EB127 Digital Announcement Trunk Card No For PIM0 1 EB002 EB031 For PIM2 3 EB032 EB063 For PIM4 5 EB064 EB095 For PIM6 7 EB096 EB127 NOTE EB000 and EB001 are dedi cated to built in Digital An nouncement Trunk of the MP card Assign the Service Restriction Class A for Announcement Service to the required stations 1 2 Y...

Page 591: ...e dial tone which is sent when a station goes off hook while the service is set for the station as Special Dial Tone 1 2 Y 2 12 Dial Tone on setting Message Wait ing 13 Dial Tone on setting Call Forward ing All Calls 14 Dial Tone on setting Do Not Disturb 0 Special Dial Tone Allow Voice Guide set by CM48 Y 2 12 13 14 in the Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 1 2 Y 116 00 15 Service Restr...

Page 592: ...001 Built in DAT on MP card 002 127 Digital Announcement Trunk No EB002 EB127 assigned by CM10 17XX Voice Guide XX 00 63 Message Assign the Message number when service setting is completed or canceled to station 1 2 Y 13 01 Message sent when service is set 02 Message sent when service is can celed 00 63 Message No Message ReplayTimer for Announcement Service 1 2 Y 0 53 01 99 4 sec 396 sec 4 sec in...

Page 593: ... MW lamp 1 2 Y 03 X XXXXXXXX Station No 0 To provide Provide VMS service for a station port in terfaced with the VMS VMS station 1 2 Y 10 X XXXXXXXX Station No 0 To provide Provide Message Waiting service for a VMS station port 1 2 Y 13 X XXXXXXXX Station No 0 To provide Assign the of Service Restriction Class A for Message Waiting to a station with a MW lamp and a VMS station port 1 2 Y 02 X XXXX...

Page 594: ...prepause timing Prepause timing is assigned by CM41 Y 0 44 NOTE 2 If C is inserted in the access code it can be used as a pause 1 5 sec To provide a program mable pause insert D instead of C Programmable Pause CM41 Y 0 38 1 2 Y 00 3 Access Code to be sent out before a Mail Box No NOTE 1 4 Access Code to be sent out after a Mail Box No XX XXXX Access code to be sent out to a VMS X 0 9 A B C D Pause...

Page 595: ...tation No 564D53 VMS character code Y 1 By Character X XXXXXXXX Station No VMS Character Assign the VMS station as the destination of a call from a station which is set Mes sage 1 2 Y 15 00 63 Tenant No X XXXXXXXX VMS Station No Assign the MW lamp on a Dterm if re quired 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No F1005 To access the VMS from ATTCON DESKCON assign Out Pulse PB signal short long key 1 2 Y 00 ATTCON...

Page 596: ... is designated by CM90 the PB signal width is set to 128 ms Fixed 1 2 Y 0 14 01 50 64 ms 3200 ms 64 ms increments If no data is set the default setting is 512 ms Assign Password Privacy for the Tenant number of the VMS ports NOTE This is effective for ports as signed as VMS ports in CM13 Y 10 1 2 Y 30 00 63 Tenant No of VMS ports 0 Allow 1 Not allowed END CM65 C CM41 ...

Page 597: ...o each Virtual Line station number However the Virtual Line station number should be different from Single line num ber assigned by CM10 Accommodate the Virtual Line to the Dterm 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No X XXXXXXXX Virtual Line station No Provide the system with Message Waiting Indication for sub line 1 2 140 0 MW Indication for My Line and sub line 1 MW Indication for My Line only Provide Messa...

Page 598: ...pecify the timer of Attendant Recall for Camp On 1 2 Y 0 00 Attendant Recall Timer 01 14 2 4 sec 33 6 sec 2 4 sec increments 15 24 38 4 sec 124 8 sec 9 6 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 31 2 33 6 sec Specify the destination VMS station num ber when a Camp On call is not answered The first data should be the tenant number of the destination station called 1 2 Y 18 Destinatio...

Page 599: ...t Feature Access Code is allowed or not while hearing RBT 1 2 156 Single Digit Feature Access Code while hearing RBT 0 Available 1 Not available Specify whether dialing of the Single Digit Feature Access Code is allowed or not while hearing BT 1 2 208 Single Digit Feature Access Code while hearing BT 0 Available 1 Not available Specify the destination VMS station num ber by transferring with Singl...

Page 600: ...763 LEN EB002 EB127 Digital Announcement Trunk Card No For PIM0 1 EB002 EB031 For PIM2 3 EB032 EB063 For PIM4 5 EB064 EB095 For PIM6 7 EB096 EB127 NOTE EB000 and EB001 are dedi cated to built in Digital An nouncement Trunk of the MP card Assign the Service Restriction Class A for the Voice Message Waiting System 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX My Line No XX ZZ XX 00 15 Service Restriction Class A Allow Voice ...

Page 601: ...oice Message Waiting Service System Record A116 Voice Message Waiting Service System Replay A118 Voice Message Waiting Service System Delete A119 Voice Message Waiting Service System Resetting of Station No to be sent A120 Voice Message Waiting Service System Retrieve Assign the function of the Digital An nouncementTrunk card forVoice Message Waiting System 1 2 Y 00 000 001 Built in DAT on MP card...

Page 602: ...2 000 763 LEN EB002 EB127 Digital Announcement Trunk Card No For PIM0 1 EB002 EB031 For PIM2 3 EB032 EB063 For PIM4 5 EB064 EB095 For PIM6 7 EB096 EB127 NOTE EB000 and EB001 are dedi cated to built in Digital An nouncement Trunk of the MP card Assign the Service Restriction Class A for the Voice Message Waiting Individual 1 2 Y 02 X XXXXXXXX Station No XX ZZ XX 00 15 Service Restriction Class A As...

Page 603: ...g Individu al Resetting of Station No to be sent A120 Voice Message Waiting Individu al Retrieve Assign the function of the Digital An nouncement Trunk for Voice Message Waiting Individual 1 2 Y 00 000 001 Built in DAT on MP card 002 127 Digital Announcement Trunk Card No EB002 EB127 as sign by CM10 09 Voice Message Waiting Service In dividual Assign the Message Waiting Lamp feature key to the Dte...

Page 604: ...t Feature Access Code while calling station hears busy tone 1 2 208 0 Available Assign the called side for the Voice Mes sage Waiting Individual 1 2 Y 100 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign the access code for the Voice Mes sage Waiting Individual 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A146 Message Waiting Message Re minder Search A147 Message Wa...

Page 605: ...m whispering side with a Whisper Page key if required 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No F0A88 Whisper Page Specify whether the call termination to My Line is restricted or allowed while the sta tion user makes a call with a Sub Line or trunk line on the Dterm 1 2 268 0 Restricted 1 Allow Specify Busy Idle status check method as Station Base or Extension Base NOTE When CM08 268 and CM08 269 is set to 0 Wh...

Page 606: ...2 Y 04 00 15 MFC trunk No XX Z XX 04 15 20 31 AP No assigned by CM05 Z 0 3 Circuit No Assign the MFC PAD control level to Back ward signals 1 2 Y 1 0 MFC PAD control PAD Level 0 8 dBm 1 10 dBm 2 11 5 dBm 3 9 13 dBm 4 7 Not used Assign the sensitive level of MFC Sender and Receiver 1 2 Y 1 1 Sensitive level of MFC Sender and Receiver PAD Level 00 26 dBm 01 27 dBm 02 28 dBm 03 29 dBm 04 30 dBm 05 31...

Page 607: ... the MFC Sender and Receiver to each circuit NOTE The first data AP number 0 3 corresponds to the AP numbers X Y Z W 04 15 20 31 as signed by CM05 as shown be low CM31 Y 2 CM05 Y 0 AP number 0 AP number X AP number 1 AP number Y AP number 2 AP number Z AP number 3 AP number W X Y Z W 1 2 Y 2 0 3 AP No 0 All circuit are assigned as Sender 1 Circuit No 0 1 Sender Circuit No 2 3 Receiver 2 Circuit No...

Page 608: ...signals depending on the specification of each country 1 2 Y 3 Backward GA 00 15 01 15 NONE Assign the sending Backward GB signals depending on the specification of each country 1 2 Y 4 Backward GB 00 15 01 15 NONE Assign the Pulse Form Pulse Type 1 Pulse Type 2 signals NOTE 1 For details of Pulse Form Pulse Type 1 Pulse Type 2 signals re fer to the Command Manual 1 2 Y A 05 Pulse Form signal 06 P...

Page 609: ...n idle charge Assign the meaning of sending Backward GB signal when terminating by Tandem Connection or converting received digits 1 2 471 0 Called station control 1 Called station idle charge Select whether to request ANI signal to PSTN or not 1 2 472 0 Available 1 Not available Specify the kind of idle status of called sta tion on DID call 1 2 Y 11 X XXXXXXXX Station No 0 Called Station idle No ...

Page 610: ...1ST DATA 2ND DATA 1ST DATA 2ND DATA 1ST DATA 2ND DATA 00 NONE 00 NONE 00 NONE 01 01 01 01 01 00 01 NONE 02 NONE 02 02 02 15 02 NONE 03 03 03 NONE 03 15 03 NONE 04 NONE 04 02 04 15 04 NONE 05 NONE 05 05 05 15 05 NONE 06 NONE 06 06 06 15 06 NONE 07 NONE 07 02 07 15 07 NONE 08 NONE 08 NONE 08 00 08 NONE 09 NONE 09 NONE 09 15 09 NONE 10 NONE 10 NONE 10 15 10 NONE 11 NONE 11 NONE 11 15 11 NONE 12 NONE ...

Page 611: ...FEATURES FOR AUSTRALIA ONLY OPERATOR MONITORING 591 A2580 10 OPERATOR MONITORING PROGRAMMING DESCRIPTION DATA Provide the system with this feature 1 2 011 1 Available START END CM08 ...

Page 612: ...ERATOR OVERLAPPING 592 A2580 10 OPERATOR OVERLAPPING PROGRAMMING DESCRIPTION DATA Provide the system with this feature 1 2 010 1 Available Specify the sending of hold tone to overlap call 1 2 027 0 To send 1 Not sent START END CM08 ...

Page 613: ...LL METERING PROGRAMMING DESCRIPTION DATA Provide the system with this feature 1 2 064 0 Available Assign the SERIAL CALL SET and SERI AL CALL keys on the DESKCON AT TCON 1 2 Y 00 ATTCON No E000 E007 Key No F6062 Serial Call Termination F6105 Serial Call Set START END CM08 CM90 ...

Page 614: ... Line Appearance TAS 04 Direct In Termination 08 Dial in 09 Automated Attendant 10 Attendant Console TAS 11 Attendant Console Trunk Line Appearance 12 Attendant Console Trunk Line Appearance TAS 14 Termination to Attendant Console 16 Remote Access to System 18 ISDN Indial 31 DID Tie Line and any call which is not handled by the PBX Assign the type of the trunk route 1 2 Y 00 Kind of trunk route 00...

Page 615: ...hod 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 CALLER ID CLASS SM Specify whether the LCD indicates the reason why the calling number is not in formed from the network When CM35 Y 133 is assigned as 0 the reason is indicated as followings A call from a calling party which does not inform the calling number PRIVACY A call from a network or a single line telephone which can not inform the calling number OUT OF AREA A c...

Page 616: ...ork when an incoming call termi nates 1 2 472 Request for ANI CALLER ID sig nal 0 Available Assign the sending method of calling num ber from the network to the AP number assigned by CM05 1 2 Y 07 04 15 AP No 0 CALLER ID CLASS SM Assign the number of digits of the calling number sent from the network 1 2 Y 1 3 Number of Digits from Network 01 31 1 digits 31 digits NONE No data Assign the CALLER ID...

Page 617: ...e partial memory using the commands shown below NOTE Before memory clear set the SW1 1 to SW1 4 on the CIR trunk to all ON Make busy and after memory clear restore them to OFF DESCRIPTION DATA Clear all memory for CMDC and CMDB 1 2 Y 90 All memory clear 0000 CCC DESCRIPTION DATA Clear the memory for the calling number Development Table number assigned by CMDC and the calling number develop ment da...

Page 618: ... Assignment 0 1499 Development Table No Character code See APPENDIX B CHARACTER CODE TABLE Assign the termination destination on Day Mode Night Mode for calling number if re quired A maximum of 12 digits are avail able 1 2 Y 01 Day Mode Y 02 Night Mode 0 1499 Development Table No Destination station No Max 12 digits NOTE If assigning the destination station number as below the terminating system o...

Page 619: ...Specify whether the Call Waiting is set for each calling number or not 1 2 Y 06 Call Waiting 0 1499 Development Table No 0 Not available 1 Available NOTE This data is effective when the 2nd data of CM35Y 59 is 1 Specify whether the UCD Priority Queuing is set for each calling number or not 1 2 Y 07 UCD Priority Queuing 0 1499 Development Table No 0 Not Priority 1 Priority Specify the priority for ...

Page 620: ...d 1 Not sent Specify whether the calling number is sent to the SMDR terminal or not 1 2 463 Send to SMDR terminal 0 To send 1 Not sent Specify whether the Caller ID is sent to the SMDR terminal or not NOTE This is required when using AP00 card for SMDR 1 2 143 Send to SMDR terminal 0 Not sent 1 To send Provide the Dterm with a Display Change key for calling number calling name dis play changing 1 ...

Page 621: ...y CM05 and by the SENSE switch STEP 4 Set the SW1 1 through SW1 4 to ON on the second CIR trunk Clear the memory for CMDC and CMDB by CMDB Y 90 Set the SW1 1 through SW1 4 to OFF on the second CIR trunk STEP 5 Load the office data saved in STEP1 by MAT STEP 6 As for the second CIR trunk restore the AP number X toY by CM05 and by the SENSE switch Jump to STEP17 if no more CIR trunks are provided ST...

Page 622: ...e SW1 1 through SW1 4 to ON on the fourth CIR trunk Clear the memory for CMDC and CMDB by CMDB Y 90 Set the SW1 1 through SW1 4 to OFF on the fourth CIR trunk STEP 15 Load the office data saved in STEP1 by MAT STEP 16 As for the fourth CIR trunk restore the AP number X to W by CM05 and by the SENSE switch STEP 17 Set the MB switches to OFF DOWN on all the CIR trunks HARDWARE REQUIRED COT card 4COT...

Page 623: ... 04 DOD with Multi Frequency Compelled MFC R2 Signaling is performed by using LCR fea ture OUTLINE OF MFC R2 SIGNALING The MFC R2 Signaling is based on interregister signal of system R2 recommended by ITU T This signaling is performed end to end by 2 out of 6 in band multi frequency codes with forward and backward compelled signaling The MFC R2 is designed to use six 6 signaling frequencies in the...

Page 624: ...FC OUTGOING CALL 604 A2594 10 Frequency Combinations for MFC Signals Frequency to be used COMBINATIONS FORWARD SIGNAL FREQUENCIES Hz 1380 1500 1620 1740 1860 1980 BACKWARD SIGNAL FREQUENCIES Hz 1140 1020 900 780 660 540 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ...

Page 625: ...FC OUTGOING CALL 605 A2594 10 Function of MFC R2 on Each Country Available Not available COUNTRIES DID WITH MFC DOD WITH MFC WITHOUT ANI WITH ANI AREGENTINA BAHRAIN BRAZIL CHILE COLOMBIA INDONESIA MALAYSIA MEXICO NORWAY POLAND SINGAPORE THAILAND VENEZUELA ...

Page 626: ... 1 2 Y 04 00 15 MFC trunk No XX Z XX 04 15 20 31 AP No assigned by CM05 Z 0 3 Circuit No Assign the MFC PAD control level to Back ward signals 1 2 Y 1 0 MFC PAD control PAD Level 0 8 dBm 1 10 dBm 2 11 5 dBm 3 9 13 dBm 4 7 Not used Assign the sensitive level of MFC Sender and Receiver 1 2 Y 1 1 Sensitive level of MFC Sender and Receiver PAD Level 00 26 dBm 01 27 dBm 02 28 dBm 03 29 dBm 04 30 dBm 05...

Page 627: ...igits Assign the MFC Sender and Receiver to each circuit NOTE The first data AP number 0 3 corresponds to the AP numbers X Y Z W 04 15 20 31 as signed by CM05 as shown be low CM31 Y 2 CM05 Y 0 AP number 0 AP number X AP number 1 AP number Y AP number 2 AP number Z AP number 3 AP number W X Y Z W 1 2 Y 2 0 3 AP No 0 All circuit are assigned as Sender 1 Circuit No 0 1 Sender Circuit No 2 3 Receiver ...

Page 628: ... Backward GA 00 15 01 15 NONE Assign the sending Backward GB signals depending on the specification of each country 1 2 Y 4 Backward GB 00 15 01 15 NONE Assign the sending Backward GC signals For Mexico only 1 2 Y 5 Backward GC 00 15 01 15 NONE Assign the Pulse Form Pulse Type 1 Pulse Type 2 signals NOTE 1 In Malaysia and Poland no data setting is required NOTE 2 For details of Pulse Form Pulse Ty...

Page 629: ...inated to At tendant Console by receiving Forward GII signal or not 1 2 020 0 1 Assign the meaning of sending Backward GB signal when terminating to Attendant Console 1 2 470 0 1 Assign the meaning of sending Backward GB signal when terminating by Tandem Connection or converting received digits 1 2 471 0 1 Select whether requesting ANI signal to PSTN or not 1 2 472 0 1 Specify the kind of idle sta...

Page 630: ...ding Backward signal when address is completed NOTE For Poland and Venezuela this data must be set to 0 1 2 Y 48 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 Set up speech condition without waiting Forward GII 1 Waiting Forward GII Assign no sending of 2nd Dial Tone on call termination 1 2 Y 10 00 63 Trunk Route No 0 2nd DT is not sent END CM35 B ...

Page 631: ...d GB signals depending on the specification of each country 1 2 Y 7 Backward GB 01 15 00 15 NONE Assign the received Backward GC signals For Mexico only 1 2 Y 8 Backward GC 01 15 00 15 NONE Assign the Forward GI signal meaning the end of digit code 1 2 Y A 02 00 15 NONE Assign the Forward GII signal when origi nating from station Attendant Console or by Tandem connection 1 2 Y A 03 00 15 NONE Assi...

Page 632: ...nal meaning Line Busy Unallocated number Congestion 1 2 473 0 1 NOTE 1 Select whether the Sender Tone is sent or not on DOD call 1 2 475 0 1 NOTE 1 Select whether the supervision of Pulse Form signal is performed or not on DOD call 1 2 478 0 1 NOTE 1 NOTE 1 Refer to the MFC Data As signment Table for Each Country page 615 Specify the originating method sender start operation By setting the data to...

Page 633: ...ust be same 1 2 1 2 477 0 1 NOTE 1 2 478 0 1 NOTE 1 2 NOTE 2 Refer to the MFC Data As signment Table for Each Country page 615 Assign the calling party number station number for ANI function NOTE The calling party number is sent to PSTN as follows XXX XXX YYYY Local office code Station No assigned by assigned by CM50 Y 05 CM12 Y 12 1 2 Y 12 X XXXXXXXX Station No X XXXX Calling party No Station No ...

Page 634: ...No 12 For ATT Group No 3 Table No 13 NOTE 2 For tandem connection assign Local Office Code as follows CM35 Y 03 00 Table No 00 CM35 Y 03 01 Table No 01 CM35 Y 03 14 Table No 14 CM35 Y 03 15 63 No ANI signal Assign the function of sending ANI signal to required stations 1 2 Y 25 X XXXXXXXX Station No 0 To provide 1 Not provided Assign the Backward signal meaning a re quest of next digit toward send...

Page 635: ... BAHRAIN BRAZIL CHILE COLOMBIA INDONESIA 00 10 NONE NONE 10 02 02 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 02 02 02 09 02 NONE 08 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 05 05 05 05 05 06 06 06 06 06 NONE 06 09 05 07 07 07 07 07 NONE 09 08 08 08 08 08 NONE NONE 09 09 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 10 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 11 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 12 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 13 NONE NONE NONE NONE NON...

Page 636: ...1 01 01 01 01 01 01 02 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 02 03 03 03 03 NONE 03 03 03 04 NONE 04 04 04 NONE 04 04 05 NONE 06 05 NONE NONE NONE NONE 06 NONE NONE 06 06 NONE NONE 06 07 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 07 08 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 08 09 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 10 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 11 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 12 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE ...

Page 637: ...NESIA 00 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 01 06 06 01 06 01 01 02 03 03 02 03 03 02 03 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 04 04 04 04 04 04 08 05 07 07 05 07 05 05 06 06 01 06 06 06 01 07 05 05 01 05 02 07 08 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 09 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 10 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 11 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 12 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 13 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 14 N...

Page 638: ...NE NONE 01 01 01 01 NONE 01 01 06 02 02 02 02 NONE 02 02 03 03 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 04 04 04 04 NONE 04 04 04 05 01 05 01 NONE 01 05 07 06 01 01 01 NONE 01 06 06 07 07 04 01 NONE 07 NONE 05 08 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 09 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 10 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 11 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 12 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 13 NON...

Page 639: ...NE 01 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 02 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 03 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 04 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 05 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 06 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 07 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 08 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 09 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 10 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 11 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 12 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 1...

Page 640: ... NOTE 2 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 01 NONE NONE 05 NOTE 2 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 02 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 03 NONE NONE 03 NOTE 2 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 04 NONE NONE 04 NOTE 2 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 05 NONE NONE 01 NOTE 2 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 06 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 07 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 08 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 09 NONE NONE 06 NOTE 2 ...

Page 641: ...BAHRAIN BRAZIL CHILE COLOMBIA INDONESIA 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 02 02 02 NONE 02 00 00 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 05 05 05 05 05 04 06 06 06 06 NONE 06 05 05 07 07 07 07 07 NONE NONE 08 08 08 08 08 NONE 02 09 09 NONE 02 NONE 06 07 10 00 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 11 NONE NONE NONE 04 NONE NONE 12 NONE NONE NONE 04 NONE NONE 13 NONE NONE NONE 04 NONE NONE 14 NONE NONE NONE 04 NONE NONE 15...

Page 642: ...1 01 01 01 02 NONE 00 00 NONE NONE 00 02 03 03 03 03 NONE 03 03 03 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 05 NONE NONE 05 05 NONE NONE NONE 06 NONE 05 06 06 NONE NONE 06 07 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 07 08 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 08 09 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 10 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 04 11 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 12 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 13 NONE NONE NONE NONE ...

Page 643: ...RAIN BRAZIL CHILE COLOMBIA INDONESIA 01 NONE 06 01 NONE 01 01 02 01 04 02 01 07 02 03 02 02 04 02 02 01 04 04 04 04 04 04 NONE 05 07 07 05 07 05 05 06 01 01 01 01 06 06 07 05 05 07 05 NONE 07 08 04 04 NONE 04 NONE 04 09 NONE 05 NONE 01 NONE NONE 10 NONE NONE NONE 01 NONE NONE 11 NONE NONE NONE 04 NONE NONE 12 NONE NONE NONE 04 NONE NONE 13 NONE NONE NONE 04 NONE NONE 14 NONE NONE NONE 04 NONE NONE...

Page 644: ...NE 01 01 01 02 02 02 02 NONE 02 02 07 03 NONE NONE 07 NONE NONE 02 02 04 04 04 04 NONE 04 04 04 05 NONE 05 NONE NONE NONE 05 07 06 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 06 01 07 07 NONE NONE NONE 07 NONE 05 08 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 04 09 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 04 10 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 04 11 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 12 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 13 NONE NONE NONE NONE...

Page 645: ...NONE NONE NONE NONE 02 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 03 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 04 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 05 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 06 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 07 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 08 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 09 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 10 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 11 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 12 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 13 NONE NONE NONE...

Page 646: ...ELA 01 NONE NONE 05 NOTE 2 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 02 NONE NONE 00 NOTE 2 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 03 NONE NONE 03 NOTE 2 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 04 NONE NONE 04 NOTE 2 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 05 NONE NONE 01 NOTE 2 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 06 NONE NONE 09 NOTE 2 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 07 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 08 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 09 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE...

Page 647: ... 1ST DATA 2ND DATA REMARKS ARGENTINA BAHRAIN BRAZIL CHILE COLOMBIA INDONESIA 01 15 15 15 15 15 15 02 15 15 15 15 15 15 03 15 15 00 15 15 15 04 15 15 15 15 15 15 05 15 15 00 15 15 15 06 15 15 15 15 15 15 07 15 15 00 15 15 15 08 15 15 00 15 15 15 09 15 15 00 15 15 15 10 15 15 00 15 15 15 11 15 15 15 15 15 15 12 15 15 15 15 15 15 13 15 15 15 15 15 15 14 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 Continue...

Page 648: ...MALAYSIA MEXICO NORWAY POLAND SINGAPORE THAILAND VENEZUELA 01 00 15 15 15 00 00 15 02 00 15 15 15 00 15 15 03 00 15 15 15 00 15 15 04 00 15 15 15 00 15 15 05 00 15 15 15 00 15 15 06 00 15 15 15 00 00 15 07 00 15 15 15 00 00 15 08 00 15 15 15 00 00 15 09 00 15 15 15 00 00 15 10 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 11 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 12 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 13 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 14 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15...

Page 649: ...INA BAHRAIN BRAZIL CHILE COLOMBIA INDONESIA 00 05 05 05 05 NONE 06 01 15 15 15 15 NONE 15 02 15 15 15 15 15 15 03 01 02 01 01 02 02 04 01 02 06 01 02 02 05 NONE 03 NOTE 2 03 NONE 03 NONE NONE 06 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 07 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 08 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 09 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 10 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 11 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 12 NONE NO...

Page 650: ...ORWAY POLAND SINGAPORE THAILAND VENEZUELA 00 NONE NONE 01 NOTE 3 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 01 NONE NONE 15 NOTE 3 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 02 NONE NONE 15 NONE NONE NONE NONE 03 NONE 02 02 NONE NONE 02 NONE 04 NONE 02 02 NONE NONE 02 NONE 05 03 NONE 03 NOTE 2 NONE 03 NOTE 2 NONE 03 NONE 03 NOTE 2 NONE 03 NOTE 2 06 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 07 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 08 NONE NONE...

Page 651: ... NONE NONE NONE NONE 04 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 05 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 06 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 07 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 08 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 09 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 10 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 11 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 05 12 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 13 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 14 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 15 NONE NONE NONE ...

Page 652: ...NE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 05 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 06 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 07 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 08 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 09 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 10 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 11 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 12 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 13 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE 14 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NO...

Page 653: ...ssignment depends on the specification of Pulse Form Signal of each coun try CM08 1ST DATA 2ND DATA REMARKS ARGENTINA BAHRAIN BRAZIL CHILE COLOMBIA INDONESIA 020 0 0 1 0 0 0 470 1 0 1 NOTE 2 0 1 NOTE 2 1 0 1 NOTE 2 1 471 1 0 1 NOTE 2 0 1 NOTE 2 1 0 1 NOTE 2 1 472 1 1 1 1 1 1 473 0 1 NOTE 2 0 1 NOTE 2 0 1 NOTE 2 1 0 1 NOTE 2 0 1 NOTE 2 474 0 0 0 0 1 0 475 0 1 NOTE 2 0 1 NOTE 2 0 1 NOTE 2 0 0 1 NOTE...

Page 654: ...ment depends on the signal with ANI or not Set the data 1 when the signal is without ANI Set the data 0 when the signal is with ANI HARDWARE REQUIRED MFR card 4RSTB CM08 1ST DATA 2ND DATA REMARKS MALAYSIA MEXICO NORWAY POLAND SINGAPORE THAILAND VENEZUELA 020 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 470 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 NOTE 2 1 471 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 NOTE 2 1 472 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 473 0 1 NOTE 2 0 1 NOTE 2 1 1 0 1 NOTE 2 0 1 NOTE 2 1 4...

Page 655: ...quired and sys tem data programming for the Hotel System and the Property Man agement System PMS HOTEL SYSTEM OUTLINE 636 HOTEL SYSTEM CAPACITY 641 HOTEL SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 641 HOTEL FEATURE LIST 642 HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMING SUMMARY 643 HOTEL SYSTEM PROGRAMMING 644 CHAPTER 2 HOTEL FEATURES ...

Page 656: ...or Dterm ATTCON LC Line Circuit Card for Single Line Telephone MP Main Processor Card PMS Property Management System SMDR Station Message Detail Recording COT COT LC LC PBX C O LINE EXTERNAL TONE SOURCE FOR AUTOMATIC WAKE UP ADMINISTRATIVE TELEPHONE DLC MP HOTEL MOTEL FRONT DESK TERMINAL DLC PMS SMDR Refer to the SMDR in Chapter 1 AP00 HOTEL PRINTER GUEST ROOM TELEPHONE WITH MESSAGE WAITING LAMP H...

Page 657: ...TCON or DESKCON is programmed as a Hotel Console The Hotel Console can access Room Cut Off individual and group Automatic Wake Up Message Waiting or Do Not Disturb individual and group with the function keys in addition to the attendant features and functions Hotel Motel Front Desk Terminal The Dterm can be programmed to function as a Hotel Motel Front Desk Terminal This allows set ting and cancel...

Page 658: ...ion 1 Maid Status This information can be entered from either a guest room telephone or Front Desk Terminal and will automatically be transmitted to the PMS for data update 2 Message Waiting Lamp Status Change This information can be entered from the Attendant Console or Front Desk Terminal It is then automatically transmitted to the PMS for data update If the automatic MW lamp off feature is acti...

Page 659: ... room swap for data update 9 Room occupancy change and room data change for data update 10 Routine activity checks between the PMS and the PBX The PMS can send the following information to the PBX 1 Maid status 2 MW lamp status changes 3 Telephone restriction status changes 4 Check In Out messages 5 Room data image inquiry 6 Wake Up status changes 7 Room change and room swap 8 Room occupancy and r...

Page 660: ...tive station call and the PMS manages a guest station call Hotel Printer The various system messages and the guest room status can be obtained through a locally pro vided Hotel Printer The following information is automatically printed out as a system message Wake Up attempts whether successful or not Remaining messages for the station which is set to Check Out Codes and quantities of the goods re...

Page 661: ...e Physical Interface RS 232C Synchronization Asynchronous Transmission Speed 1200 2400 4800 9600 bps I O port No 0 3 port of AP00 B card Hotel Printer Interface Physical Interface RS 232C Synchronization Asynchronous Transmission Speed 1200 2400 4800 bps I O port No 1 3 port of AP00 B card For the port 1 and port 3 data speed can not be set to 9600 bps DESCRIPTION CAPACITY Guest Administrative Sta...

Page 662: ...K TERMINAL HOTEL CONSOLE PMS Automatic Wake Up Check In Check Out NOTE Direct Data Entry Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb System NOTE Guest Administrative Service Guest Name Display through PMS Guest Room to Guest Room Calling Restriction Hotel Console Hotel Motel Front Desk Termi nal Maid Status Message Registration Message Waiting NOTE PMS Interface Printer Control Front Desk Terminal Room Cut Off ...

Page 663: ...Y Programming Summary for Hotel System PMS INTERFACE Programming SMDR Programming SEE CHAPTER 1 START AP Initialization Hotel Feature Programming YES Have The AP already been NO TO SMDR TO PMS page 645 page 646 END page 682 page 477 Where is the call information sent initialized ...

Page 664: ...Printer All the system data pertaining to the station trunks and service features have already been programmed Station Number Data Loading The AP00 stores the station number data loaded from the MP When station numbers have been added deleted or changed by CM10 the station number data must be reloaded to the AP00 by the following procedure 1 Flip the MB switch of the AP00 to UP position 2 Return t...

Page 665: ...p flashes on green color when the AP is in active When you install the AP00 for the first time you should assign the data showing below DESCRIPTION DATA Assign an AP number to the AP00 card The AP number must match the SENSE switch setting on the AP00 card 1 2 Y 0 04 15 20 31 AP No 04 AP00 card On the AP00 card set SW1 switch as shown below SW1 4 should be set as follows ON The AP No is 04 15 OFF ...

Page 666: ...ame Display thought PMS page 662 Guest Room to Guest Room Calling Restriction page 664 Guest Administrative Service page 665 Hotel Console page 668 Hotel Motel Front Desk Terminal page 669 Maid Status page 673 Message Restriction page 676 Message Waiting page 679 PMS Interface page 682 Printer Control Front Desk Terminal page 686 Room Cut Off page 688 Room Number Display on Station page 690 Room S...

Page 667: ...lass A Allow Automatic Wake Up in the Service Restriction Class A assigned by CM12 Y 02 1 2 Y 13 Guest station Y 20 Administrative station allowing single Wake Up Time operation Y 21 Administrative station allowing multiple Wake Up Time operation 00 15 Service Restriction Class A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Allow Digital Announcement Trunk access Record Replay Delete in the Service Re striction...

Page 668: ...lan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A100 Record A101 Replay A102 Delete Designate the type of tone source for Wake Up call 1 2 Y 1 00 Tone Source of Wake Up Call XX 00 XX 00 No Tone 02 External Tone Source 05 Digital Announcement Trunk 14 Hold Tone Source on MP card 15 Internal Tone Generator When an External Announcement Ma chine is required assign the COT card and DK card to required LEN NOTE The D...

Page 669: ...OTE EB000 and EB001 are dedi cated to built in DAT of MP card When an External Announcement Ma chine is required assign the function for Wake Up to the DK card or MP built in DK 1 2 XX Y XX 00 31 DK Card No E800 E831 assigned by CM10 Y 0 3 Circuit No 313 MP built in External Equipment In terface 0100 External Announcement Ma chine for Wake Up Call Specify the sending Wake Up message to Hotel Print...

Page 670: ...e 1 Not available Assign the function keys for Automatic Wake Up to the Dterm of guest room sta tion or administrative station if provided NOTE This data assignment is not re quired when Wake Up is set by PMS 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No F0024 Automatic Wake Up set reset from guest station F0027 Automatic Wake Up set reset from administrative station with Single Wake Up Time opera tion NOTE F0028 Au...

Page 671: ...1 2 Y 0 23 01 08 4 sec 32 sec 4 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 28 32 sec When providing the DAT specify the dura tion of message replay timer for Automatic Wake Up 1 2 Y 0 52 01 99 4 sec 396 sec 4 sec increments If no data is set the default setting is 60 64 sec Specify the number of Wake Up call at tempts before abandonment 1 2 03 01 05 Number of attempted Wake Up calls I...

Page 672: ...al announcement source DAT card or MP card built in DAT DESCRIPTION DATA Send Wake Up message to PMS when setting Wake Up feature if PMS provided 1 2 134 1 To send Specify the sending of result of Wake Up message when performing Wake Up fea ture 1 2 135 1 To send Assign the Service Class number for CMD016 to required stations if PMS pro vided 1 2 X XXXX Guest Administrative station No 00 15 Servic...

Page 673: ... No 00 15 Service Class No Allow Room Status operation set from Front Desk Terminal 1 2 XX 06 XX 00 15 Service Class No assigned by CMD015 1 Yes Send Check Out Complete message to PMS when PBX receives Check Out mes sage from PMS 1 2 87 1 To send Send the message to PMS if a checked out station is originating a C O call 1 2 88 1 To send Assign a Room Status Code set by Check In operation 1 2 12 1 ...

Page 674: ...e required functions to the Room Status codes set by Check In and Check Out operations 1 2 X00 Room Cut Off is set X01 Room Cut Off is canceled X02 Do Not Disturb is set X03 Do Not Disturb is canceled X04 Wake Up call is canceled X05 Message Waiting Lamp is turned off X06 Check In time is set X07 Check In time is cleared X Room Status Code 0 No 1 Yes CMD031 A END ...

Page 675: ...ta Entry feature to the Ser vice Class assigned by CMD015 1 2 XX 24 XX 00 15 Service Class No assigned by CMD015 1 Available Assign the access code for Direct Data Entry 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A097 Provide the guest room station with the function key for Direct Data Entry if re quired 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No F0097 Direct Data Entry CMD016 CM20 CM90 START CMD015 A ...

Page 676: ... Designate the output unit for Direct Data Entry 1 2 252 0 PMS 1 Hotel Printer 2 PMS and Hotel Printer Designate the printout format of Direct Data Entry 1 2 253 0 Printout Format 1 1 Printout Format 2 See the example below Printout format 1 2nd data 0 Printout format 2 2nd data 1 END CMD001 A 1999 11 01 17 20 MON NO 220 CODE 1 1 CODE 2 2 CODE 3 2 CODE 4 1 1999 11 01 17 20 MON NO 220 CODE 1 QUANTI...

Page 677: ...ss A as signed by CM12 Y 02 1 Allow Assign the access code for Do Not Disturb Set Cancel 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A022 Set A023 Cancel Assign the destination of a call transferred when the called station is in Do Not Dis turb 1 2 Y 10 00 63 Tenant No X XXXX Station No or E000 Attendant Console Assign the Call Forwarding Intercept ICPT key if ATTCON DESKCON is as signed...

Page 678: ... from guest station 1 2 201 0 Available Specify Call Forwarding Busy Line Station Hunting for a station set to Do Not Disturb 1 2 240 0 Available 1 Not available For a system with multiple tenant specify the destination of a call transferred in CM51 Y 10 for the tenant of calling or called station 1 2 241 0 Tenant of called station 1 Tenant of calling station Specify whether Do Not Disturb record ...

Page 679: ...ion message to PMS when setting Do Not Disturb if PMS provided 1 2 114 1 To send Assign the Service Class number for CMD016 to required stations if PMS pro vided 1 2 X XXXX Station No 00 15 Service Class No Send Room Status Code which includes Do Not Disturb record to PMS if PMS pro vided 1 2 XX 05 Room Status Code sending to PMS XX Service Class No assigned by CMD015 1 To send END CMD000 B CMD015...

Page 680: ...n is in Do Not Dis turb mode 1 2 Y 10 00 63 Tenant No X XXXX Station No or E000 Attendant Console Assign the Call Forwarding Intercept ICPT key if the ATTCON DESKCON is assigned as destination by CM51 Y 10 1 2 Y 00 ATTCON No E000 E007 Key No F6065 Call Forwarding Intercept Assign the DND function keys to the Front Desk Terminal if provided 1 2 Y 00 My Line No Key No F1064 Do Not Disturb F1072 Grou...

Page 681: ... destination of a call transferred in CM51 Y 10 for the tenant of calling or called station 1 2 241 0 Tenant of called station 1 Tenant of calling station Specify whether Do Not Disturb record is printed out on Hotel Printer and the report is sent to PMS when setting or resetting Do Not Disturb 1 2 267 0 Available 1 Not available Select the Dial Tone on setting Do Not Dis turb 1 2 Y 2 14 Dial Tone...

Page 682: ...fy the duration to display the name 1 2 121 0 Until call finished 1 As per CM08 120 Assign a trunk name number to each trunk route 1 2 Y 03 00 63 Trunk Route No 00 14 Trunk Name No 15 Kind of trunk route assigned by CM35 Y 00 are displayed 16 63 Trunk Name No Enter the desired station user name to each station number by CM77 Y 0 or Y 1 1 2 Y 0 By Character Code X XXXX Station No 20 7F Character Co...

Page 683: ...nk route by CM77 Y 2 or Y 3 1 2 Y 2 By Character Code 00 14 16 63 Trunk Name No as signed by CM35 Y 03 20 7F Character Code Max 8 digits See APPENDIX B CHARACTER CODE TABLE 1 2 Y 3 By Character 00 14 16 63 Trunk Name No as signed by CM35 Y 03 A Z 0 9 Character Max 4 characters Specify the changing of Guest Name by the room change message from PMS 1 2 69 1 Available CMD000 END CM77 A ...

Page 684: ...d station 0 Connection is restricted When the external key is provided assign the DK card to required LEN NOTE The DK card number must be as signed to the first LEN Level 0 and the third LEN Level 2 1 2 000 763 LEN E900 E963 DK card No For PIM0 1 E900 E915 For PIM2 3 E916 E931 For PIM4 5 E932 E947 For PIM6 7 E948 E963 NOTE Circuit No 3 of E963 is used for built in External Key Inter face of MP car...

Page 685: ... 713 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 Assign required access codes for each Numbering Plan Group To provide its own trunk route for each ten ant assign the Tenant Block 00 23 to de sired trunk route access code 1 2 Y 0 3 Numbering Plan Group 0 3 X XXXX Access Code A000 A097 801 808 A100 A152 100 163 Trunk Route 00 63 300 323 Tenant Block 00 23 When Tenant Block 00 23 is assigned by CM20 assign the trunk r...

Page 686: ...o of TAS answer guest administrative station ZZ Tenant No of Trunk 0 Allowed 1 Restricted 1 2 Y 1 Station to Station Calling XX ZZ XX Tenant No of calling guest admin istrative station ZZ Tenant No of called guest adminis trative station 0 Restricted 1 Allowed 1 2 Y 2 Incoming Call Termination XX ZZ XX Tenant No of called guest adminis trative station ZZ Tenant No of Trunk 0 Restricted 1 Allowed C...

Page 687: ...A ZZ 00 15 Service Restriction Class B 1 2 Y 07 X XXXX Station No 00 15 Service Restriction Class C Allow or restrict each service feature in Service Restriction Class A B C 1 2 Y 00 182 Service Restriction Class A B C as signed by CM12 Y 02 07 0 Allow 1 Restricted Specify service features to be provided with each station 1 2 Y 00 39 X XXXX Station No 0 To provide 1 Not provided CM15 CM13 END CM12...

Page 688: ...N page 432 For DESKCON refer to SMART CONSOLE SN716 DESKCON page 434 For Multi function key refer to MULTI FUNCTION KEY ATTENDANT page 339 DESCRIPTION DATA For ATTCON DESKCON assign the re quired hotel function keys 1 2 Y 00 ATTCON No E000 E007 Key No F6100 Room Cut Off F6101 Message Waiting F6102 Do Not Disturb F6103 Automatic Wake Up Do Not Disturb Override F6104 Reset F6108 Do Not Disturb Overr...

Page 689: ...ute SS 00 59 Second Assign a My Line number for Front Desk Terminal NOTE The number of Front Desk Termi nals is limited to 8 units per sys tem 1 2 000 763 LEN FX FXXXX My Line No Assign the Service Restriction Class B for Front Desk Terminal to required Dterm 1 2 Y 02 X XXXX My Line No XX ZZ ZZ 00 15 Service Restriction Class B Allow Front Desk Terminal in the Service Restriction Class B assigned ...

Page 690: ... Release F1080 Do Not Disturb Override Specify the symbol of the currency printed out 1 2 256 0 1 Not printed will be printed 2 FF France Franc Designate the language of message print ed out 1 2 2 Language of message printed out 1 Other than Japanese Specify the Printer Line Feed Code 1 2 103 0 CR 1 CR and LF CM90 A CMD001 CMD000 07 08 09 10 11 12 01 02 03 04 05 06 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23...

Page 691: ...400 4800 bps 25 33 Stop bit length 2 2 bits 26 34 Data length 0 7 bits 27 35 Parity 1 Even Parity 100 140 Function 16 17 Hotel Printer 0 Hotel Printer 1 101 141 Priority for data processing 1 2nd 102 142 Number of characters per line to be printed out 2 80 characters 103 143 Number of lines per page 0 88 No page No of lines includ ing space within a page Depends on size of printer paper used 104 1...

Page 692: ... the Hotel Printer to each Front Desk Terminal 1 2 X XXXX My Line No of Front Desk Terminal 0 Hotel Printer 0 1 Hotel Printer 1 By system reset press SW1 on the MP card station number information is trans ferred from the MP to the AP When the transfer is completed message SORT COMPLETE is printed out on the Hotel printer SORT COMPLETE printout takes about 4 minutes END CMD035 C ...

Page 693: ...Code A029 Send Maid Status message to PMS when setting Maid Status by guest room tele phones or Front Desk Terminal 1 2 119 0 To send Assign the Service Class number to re quired stations 1 2 X XXXX Station No 00 15 Service Class No Send Room Status Code which includes Maid Status record to PMS if PMS pro vided 1 2 XX 05 Room Status Code sending to PMS XX Service Class No assigned by CMD015 1 To s...

Page 694: ...are to be assigned by CMD001 12 and CMD001 13 1 2 X YY X 1 8 Room Status Code YY Functions 00 Room Cut Off Set 01 Room Cut Off Reset 02 Do Not Disturb Set 03 Do Not Disturb Reset 04 Wake Up Call Reset 05 Message Waiting Reset 06 Check In Time Registration 07 Check In Time Clear 30 Send Room Status to PMS 31 Dialing from Guest Room is al lowed 0 No 1 Yes Assign the Room Status key to the Front Desk...

Page 695: ...MAID STATUS 675 A2668 10 HARDWARE REQUIRED AP00 B card Front Desk Terminal or PMS and RS RVS 15 S CA RS RVS 4 S CA RS NORM 4 S CA ...

Page 696: ...going trunk call NOTE This data is effective when CM35 Y 04 is set to 1 1 2 123 For Australia 0 To send 1 Not sent For other countries 0 Not sent 1 To send Provide SMDR service for outgoing calls to required stations 1 2 Y 06 X XXXX Station No 1 To provide Provide SMDR service for incoming calls to required stations 1 2 Y 05 X XXXX Station No 0 To provide 1 Not provided Specify the type of answer ...

Page 697: ...g calls with Account Code entry 1 2 70 0 Effective for incoming calls with Account Codes only 1 Effective for all incoming calls Send message to PMS if a checked out station is originating a C O call 1 2 88 0 Not sent 1 To send Send information of tandem calls to SMDR 1 2 77 1 To send Assign the charging Service Class num ber to each station number 1 2 X XXXX Station No 00 15 Service Class No Send...

Page 698: ...able number to outgoing trunk routes 1 2 00 63 Trunk Route No 000 511 Development Table No Specify the charging method to each di aled number NOTE The second data should be 9 if SMDR is provided If the system provides the Dterm TIMS and SMDR the second data should be assigned for the Dterm TIMS For Dterm TIMS programming re fer to CIS in CHAPTER 1 page 97 1 2 XXX Y XXX 000 511 Call Development Tab...

Page 699: ...w Provide each station with Message Wait ing Service Dterm or Single Line Tele phone with Message Waiting Lamp 1 2 Y 03 X XXXX Station No 0 To provide Specify guest station or administrative station to each station NOTE CM13 Y 13 data assignment is not required when Message Waiting is set by PMS 1 2 Y 13 X XXXX Station No 0 Administrative station 1 Guest station Assign access code for Message Wait...

Page 700: ...nt rings set the data for 234 to 0 1 2 234 0 Available To reset Message Waiting when the de sired station answers a second call from the Message Front station or attendant set the data for 235 to 0 and set the data for 234 to 1 1 2 1 2 235 0 Available 234 1 Not available Specify whether Message Waiting record is printed out on Hotel Printer and the re port is sent to PMS when setting or reset ting...

Page 701: ...A RS NORM 4 S CA DESCRIPTION DATA Send Message Waiting message to PMS when setting Message Waiting if PMS is provided 1 2 116 1 To send Assign the Service Class number for CMD016 to required stations if PMS is provided 1 2 X XXXX Station No 00 15 Service Class No Send Room Status Code which includes Message Waiting record to PMS if PMS is provided 1 2 XX 05 Room Status Code sending to PMS XX Servi...

Page 702: ...E 682 A2679 10 PMS INTERFACE PROGRAMMING The following shows the minimal programming to establish the PMS interface link After this pro gramming the Status Inquiry Feature Code 70 Function Code F and 0 is available ...

Page 703: ... 85 105 125 145 Station Address SA 49 1 86 106 126 146 Unit Address UA 33 87 107 127 147 Timer for detecting the terminal no answer 8 1 sec 89 109 129 149 Timer for detecting the end of block 70 35 sec 90 110 130 150 Timer for detecting non data communication 70 35 sec 91 111 131 151 Number of times to resend the Selecting Sequence when NAK is returned in Phase 2 3 3 times 92 112 132 152 Number of...

Page 704: ...gal message from PMS 1 2 140 1 To send Assign the function of OPE LED L0 L3 on the AP00 card 1 2 250 See the table below 0 1 2 3 CMD000 CMD001 A CMD001 AP00 INITIAL L3 No 3 port SD L2 No 2 port SD L1 No 1 port SD L0 No 0 port SD L3 No 0 port CS L2 No 0 port CD L1 No 0 port SD L0 No 0 port RD L3 No 1 port CS L2 No 1 port CD L1 No 1 port SD L0 No 1 port RD L3 No 2 port CS L2 No 2 port CD L1 No 2 por...

Page 705: ...rovided AP00 B card RS RVS 15 S CA RS RVS 4 S CA RS NORM 4 S CA DESCRIPTION DATA Assign the Service Class number to re quired stations 1 2 X XXXX Guest Administrative station No 00 15 Service Class No Send detail information of C O outgoing calls to PMS 1 2 XX 16 XX Service Class No assigned by CMD015 1 To send CMD015 CMD016 END B ...

Page 706: ...INITIAL Initial Data 1ST DATA MEANING 2ND DATA 2 MEANING PORT 0 PORT 1 PORT 2 PORT 3 24 32 Data Speed 2 3 4 1200 2400 4800 bps 25 33 Stop bit length 2 2 bit 26 34 Data Length 0 7 bit 27 35 Parity 1 Even Parity 100 140 Function 16 17 Hotel Printer 0 Hotel Printer 1 101 141 Priority for Data Processing 1 2nd 102 142 Number of characters per line to be printed out 2 80 characters 103 143 Number of li...

Page 707: ... to each Front Desk Terminal 1 2 X XXXX My Line No of Front Desk Terminal 0 Printer 0 1 Printer 1 When System Initialization press the SW1 on the MP card is executed Station Number information is transferred from the MP to the AP When the transfer is com pleted message SORT COMPLETE is printed out on the Hotel Motel printer SORT COMPLETE printout takes about 4 minutes CMD035 A END ...

Page 708: ...ion in Room Cut Off condi tion dials outgoing access code 1 2 Y 11 00 63 Tenant No X XXXX Station No or E000 Attendant Console Assign the Call Forwarding Intercept ICPT key if the ATTCON DESKCON is assigned as destination by CM51 Y 11 1 2 Y 00 ATTCON No E000 E007 Key No F6065 Call Forwarding Intercept Assign the function keys required for Room Cut Off on the Front Desk Terminal NOTE This data assi...

Page 709: ... is reset X 1 8 Room Status Code 1 Yes Send Controlled Restriction message to PMS when setting Room Cut Off feature if PMS provided 1 2 115 1 To send Assign the Service Class number for CMD016 to required stations if PMS pro vided 1 2 X XXXX Station No 00 15 Service Class No Send Room Status Code which includes Room Cut Off record to PMS if PMS pro vided 1 2 XX 05 Room Status Code sending to PMS X...

Page 710: ...R DISPLAY ON STATION PROGRAMMING No programming is required HARDWARE REQUIRED Dterm with LCD and DLC card ROOM STATUS PROGRAMMING Refer to Maid Status page 673 HARDWARE REQUIRED AP00 B card Front Desk Terminal SPLIT ACCESS PROGRAMMING Refer to Guest Administrative Service page 665 ...

Page 711: ...rm ATTCON DESKCON DSS Console and Add On Module Refer to this appendix when you assign a key function by CM90 or CM97 Dterm 75 Key Numbers A2 Dterm 65 Key Numbers A5 ATTCON Key Numbers A10 DESKCON Key Numbers A11 DSS Console Key Numbers A12 Add On Module Key Numbers A14 APPENDIX A TERMINAL KEY ASSIGNMENT ...

Page 712: ...EY ASSIGNMENT A2 A2A02 10 Dterm 75 Key Numbers Continued on next page Dterm Key Numbers Recall Feature CNF LNR SPD Speaker Answer Transfer Hold 92 90 91 93 03 04 01 02 05 06 07 08 94 95 96 97 1 4 7 2 5 8 0 9 6 3 NEC DTP 8 1 ...

Page 713: ... A3 A2A02 10 Dterm 75 Key Numbers Continued on next page Dterm Key Numbers Speaker Answer Transfer Hold 07 08 05 06 11 12 09 10 15 16 13 14 03 04 01 02 Recall 90 CNF 92 LNR SPD 93 94 95 96 97 Feature 91 1 4 7 2 8 0 9 6 3 NEC DTP 16D 1 5 ...

Page 714: ...eature CNF LNR SPD Speaker Answer Transfer Hold 92 90 91 93 03 04 01 02 07 08 09 10 13 14 15 16 19 20 21 22 94 95 96 97 05 11 17 23 06 12 18 24 DTP 32D 1 Dterm Key Numbers 24 Line Trunk Feature Keys 8 One Touch Keys 8 One Touch Keys Recall Feature CNF LNR SPD Speaker Answer Transfer Hold 92 90 91 93 03 04 01 02 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 94 95 96 97 Dterm Key Numbers 16 Line Trunk Feature...

Page 715: ...RMINAL KEY ASSIGNMENT A5 A2A02 10 Dterm 65 Key Numbers Continued on next page 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 01 RECALL FNC CNF LNR SPD SPKR ANS TRF HOLD ETJ 8DC 1 Dterm Key Numbers 05 02 06 03 07 04 08 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 ...

Page 716: ...ERMINAL KEY ASSIGNMENT A6 A2A02 10 Dterm 65 Key Numbers Continued on next page 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 01 RECALL FNC CNF LNR SPD SPKR ANS TRF HOLD ETJ 8 1 Dterm Key Numbers 05 02 06 03 07 04 08 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 ...

Page 717: ...SSIGNMENT A7 A2A02 10 Dterm 65 Key Numbers Continued on next page 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 01 RECALL FNC CNF LNR SPD SPKR ANS TRF HOLD ETJ 16DC 1 Dterm Key Numbers 05 02 06 03 07 04 08 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 09 13 10 14 11 15 12 16 ...

Page 718: ...ENT A8 A2A02 10 Dterm 65 Key Numbers Continued on next page 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 RECALL FNC CNF LNR SPD SPKR ANS TRF HOLD ETJ 16DD 1 ETJ 16DS 1 Dterm Key Numbers 01 05 09 13 02 06 10 14 03 07 11 15 04 08 12 16 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 ...

Page 719: ...65 Key Numbers NOTE When using key No 17 24 set CM12 Y 24 2nd data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 RECALL FNC CNF LNR SPD SPKR ANS TRF HOLD ETJ 24DS 1 Dterm Key Numbers 01 07 13 19 02 08 14 20 03 09 15 21 04 10 16 22 05 11 17 23 06 12 18 24 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 ...

Page 720: ... ASSIGNMENT A10 A2A10 10 ATTCON Key Numbers 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 TALK LOOP1 LOOP2 LOOP3 LOOP4 LOOP5 LOOP6 13 14 15 16 17 18 ANS 97 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 RLS 96 90 91 92 93 94 95 RCL LDN0 ATND SRC DEST HOLD CANCEL ...

Page 721: ...6 12 L5 11 L4 10 L3 09 L2 08 L1 07 0 8 9 6 3 5 2 1 4 7 SRC 90 DEST 91 93 95 Answer 96 Hold 94 Release 97 Cancel Talk Position Busy Volume Night 15 01 02 03 04 13 16 17 18 19 20 21 14 24 22 23 LDN TIE Busy ATND NANS Recall EMG BV TRKSL Call Park SC SVC REC Mute PAGE Start ...

Page 722: ...A10 10 DSS Console Key Numbers Continued on next page 00 05 04 03 02 01 54 59 58 57 56 55 48 53 52 51 50 49 42 47 46 45 44 43 36 41 40 39 38 37 30 35 34 33 32 31 24 29 28 27 26 25 18 23 22 21 20 19 12 17 16 15 14 13 06 11 10 09 08 07 DCU 60 1 ...

Page 723: ...NMENT A13 A2A10 10 DSS Console Key Numbers 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 EDW 48 2 ...

Page 724: ...10 10 Add On Module Key Numbers Continued on next page 30 35 34 33 32 31 84 89 88 87 86 85 78 83 82 81 80 79 72 77 76 75 74 73 66 71 70 69 68 67 60 65 64 63 62 61 54 59 58 57 56 55 48 53 52 51 50 49 42 47 46 45 44 43 36 41 40 39 38 37 DCU 60 1 ...

Page 725: ...NT A15 A2A10 10 Add On Module Key Numbers 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 7 2 7 3 7 4 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 8 3 84 85 86 87 88 89 EDW 48 2 ...

Page 726: ... A16 A2A10 10 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY ...

Page 727: ...A2B01 10 APPENDIX B CHARACTER CODE TABLE This appendix contains the character code table to set a station name displayed on Dterm or Attendant Console CHARACTER CODE TABLE B2 APPENDIX B CHARACTER CODE TABLE ...

Page 728: ...digit Example To set John for Station No 2587 do the following operation 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 0 P p 1 1 A Q a q 2 2 B R b r 3 3 C S c s 4 4 D T d t 5 5 E U e u 6 6 F V f v 7 7 G W g w 8 8 H X h x 9 9 I Y i y A J Z j z B K k C L l D M m E N n F O _ o X Y 770 2587 ST DE DE 4A J 6F o 68 h 6E n EXE ...

Page 729: ...ns needed to apply the Dterm TIMS feature PRECAUTIONS C2 PRINT OPERATIONS C2 Target Stations C2 Call Record and Totaled Bill C2 Group Billing C5 Billing Data Accumulation C14 Audit Print and Interim Print C17 AP Memory Management C20 TIMS Optional Prints C23 APPENDIX C Dterm TIMS JOB SPECIFICATIONS ...

Page 730: ...call The TIMS feature covers the calls originated from a local stations or an ATTCON s But the ex ception is the Administration Class stations NOTE 1 NOTE 1 The CMD016 XX45 designates the station class Call Record and Totaled Bill There are two kinds of billing text format the Call Record and the Totaled Bill See Example 1 and Example 2 as Call Record and Totaled Bill for individual station The Ca...

Page 731: ...uded by the CMD000 36 NOTE 3 The CMD000 3 designates whether the 0 01 of the main unit of currency ex Cent centavo etc is required or not NOTE 4 The Call Record Serial Number can be omitted by the CMD000 12 NOTE 5 The CMD000 64 designates whether the Account Code is printed or not NOTE 6 The CMD000 72 designates whether the Authorization Code is printed or not NOTE 7 The CMD000 37 designates wheth...

Page 732: ...n code 1999 8 30 10 48 MON Condition code Clear SERIAL No 0177 EXT 201 ACC OG START DIAL 00103055579 8 30 10 07 AUTH DUR 00 01 04 5 OS 1 10 C Condition code Overseas Call Call Charge Call duration Dialled number Call start time Serial number Calling station number Outgoing Account Code EXT 201 Calling station number 4 60 Call Charge C Condition code Clear ...

Page 733: ...s that the station group data is not as signed the system recognizes as the station is not categorized NOTE 1 When the station is categorized the total amount of the group can be printed Moreover the grand total amount of the whole categorized stations is available by the special group number There are two kinds of special group number 777 and 999 which allows two dif ferent print formats for the ...

Page 734: ...er Beside this what Dterm TIMS Terminal controls which printer can be assigned by the CMD035 The CMD012 is also used for the tenant number assignment for the SMDR service When the system is not provided SMDR or it is provided but the tenant number is not sent to SMDR you can assign the small group data regardless the tenant num ber however you should think about the future NOTE 2 When the data 1 i...

Page 735: ...01 SET Authorization code 1999 8 30 10 58 MON SERIAL No 0189 EXT 202 ACC OG START DIAL 0425841443 8 30 10 08 AUTH DUR 00 01 06 1 20 Total amount of the call charge for the group Call duration Dialled number Call start time Serial number Calling station number Outgoing Account Code SMALL GROUP TOTAL 0 EXT 203 G001 TOTAL 1 20 END Group number ...

Page 736: ...TIONS C8 A2C02 10 Example 4 Totaled Bill for the group number 001 PRINT REC GROUP 001 SET 1999 8 30 10 53 MON 202 1 00 Calling station number Amount SMALL GROUP TOTAL G001 TOTAL END Group number 1 00 203 0 00 Total amount of the call charge for the group ...

Page 737: ...0 55 1 00 TOTAL 4 00 OS TOTAL PRINT 777 ACC SERIAL No 0191 EXT 300 OG START DIAL 0425841442 8 30 09 36 AUTH DUR 00 00 31 5 0 60 ACC SERIAL No 0192 EXT 301 OG START DIAL 00103055579 8 30 10 38 AUTH DUR 00 01 57 2 00 OS ACC SERIAL No 0193 EXT 302 OG START DIAL 0425841442 8 30 10 42 AUTH DUR 00 01 20 1 40 ACC EXT 01 EXT 02 EXT 03 0 0 0 ATTCON number Grand total amount of the call charge for the whole...

Page 738: ...201 ACC OG START DIAL 00103055519 8 30 10 07 AUTH DUR 00 01 04 5 1 10 TOTAL 2 20 TOTAL PRINT 999 EXT 200 OS SERIAL No 0223 EXT 201 ACC OG START DIAL 0425811442 8 30 10 09 AUTH DUR 00 01 04 1 10 G000 TOTAL 2 20 MG200 TOTAL 2 20 LG300 TOTAL 2 20 SERIAL No 0228 EXT 202 ACC OG START DIAL 0425811443 8 30 10 08 AUTH DUR 00 01 06 1 20 G001 TOTAL END Small group number MG201 TOTAL 1 20 LG301 TOTAL 1 20 TO...

Page 739: ...ll 777 PRINT REC GROUP 777 SET 1999 8 30 11 03 MON END TOTAL PRINT 777 00 04 203 2 40 4 80 0 00 01 200 204 0 00 0 00 0 00 02 201 205 0 00 4 60 0 00 03 202 206 0 00 0 00 0 00 11 80 TOTAL Calling station number Call Charge Grand total amount of the call charge for the whole categorized stations ...

Page 740: ...NT REC GROUP 888 SET Medium group number 1999 8 30 13 36 MON END TOTAL PRINT 888 1 20 G000 TOTAL 1 20 MG200 TOTAL 1 20 LG300 TOTAL 0 00 G001 TOTAL 0 00 MG201 TOTAL 0 00 LG301 TOTAL 1 20 TOTAL Small group number Large group number Grand total amount of the call charge for the whole categorized stations ...

Page 741: ...P 999 SET 1999 8 30 11 59 MON END TOTAL PRINT 999 4 60 G000 TOTAL 4 60 MG200 TOTAL 4 60 LG300 TOTAL 200 0 00 201 4 60 0 00 G000 TOTAL 0 00 MG200 TOTAL 202 0 00 203 0 00 4 60 TOTAL Medium group number Calling station number Call Charge Small group number Large group number Grand total amount of the call charge for the whole categorized stations 0 00 LG300 TOTAL ...

Page 742: ...going call NOTE 2 When you provide the TIMS for a hotel the billing data accumulation may be required to make each guest station s total amount of call charges And the total amount can be printed out by check out operation of the Dterm TIMS Terminal Front Desk Terminal NOTE 3 For a business user the billing data accumulation is necessary when they provide the group bill ing The accumulated data of...

Page 743: ...CMD016 XX14 International Call CMD016 XX19 Tie Line NOTE 3 When the check out is executed by the Dterm TIMS Terminal the text defined by the CMD001 14 is printed However if check out is performed by PMS the TIMS printer does not output billing text NOTE 4 The Automatic Audit Print time and date is designated by the following commands CMD004 22 daily Totaled Bill CMD004 24 daily Call Record CMD004 ...

Page 744: ...09 AUTH DUR 00 01 04 1 10 SERIAL No 0196 EXT 201 ACC OG START DIAL 00103055579 8 30 10 11 AUTH DUR 00 01 05 1 10 OS SERIAL No 0197 EXT 201 ACC OG START DIAL 0425811442 8 30 10 39 AUTH DUR 00 01 05 2 10 SERIAL No 0198 EXT 201 ACC OG START DIAL 00103055579 8 30 10 42 AUTH DUR 00 01 08 1 20 OS SERIAL No 0199 EXT 201 ACC OG DIAL 0425811443 8 30 10 43 AUTH DUR 00 01 13 START 0 Serial number Calling sta...

Page 745: ...ies The condition code C will appear when it is an Audit Print See Example 1 2 The Audit Print is available by the Dterm TIMS Terminal operation and or by the weekly or month ly Automatic Print out When you design the TIMS you need special care about clearing the AP memories Otherwise the memory overflow or the unexpected data loss may occur 1 Station Audit print Figure below shows an example When...

Page 746: ...helpful to output the weekly automatic Interim Print Audit Print PRT REC Station No RESET TIMS Printer Call Record 1 of EXT300 Totaled Bill 1 of EXT300 Call Record 1 of EXT301 Totaled Bill 1 of EXT301 Call Record 2 of EXT300 Totaled Bill 2 of EXT300 Call Record 2 of EXT301 Totaled Bill 2 of EXT301 AP Memories PRT REC DET Station No RESET TIMS Printer Call Record Audit Print of EXT300 Totaled Bill ...

Page 747: ...n already Interim Printed as Call Record 1 3 of EXT300 on this example can be cleared by the Audit Display operation by the Dterm TIMS Terminal If there is Call Record which is not Interim Printed existing in AP memories as Call record 4 of EXT300 on this example it will not be cleared by the Audit Display operation NOTE 1 The station group audit display operation is available in the same manner N...

Page 748: ...upervised whether the Interim print has been executed or not on station group Call Record CMD000 123 1 To be cleared the Interim printed Call Record data when station group Audit Display REC DETAIL GROUP Group No RESET has been per formed AP Memory Management The AP memories are used for the following purposes TIMS billing data Call Record and Totaled Bill accumulation Printer port buffer Store th...

Page 749: ...lue the CALL OVER ALARM will be printed See Example 13 NOTE 2 The CMD003 30 specifies the printer port buffer threshold The CMD000 15 desig nates whether the BUFFER MEMORY EVACUATION message is printed or not when the number of stored data has reached this value See Example 14 NOTE 3 The CMD003 29 specifies the SMDR port buffer threshold The sample data assignment when the TIMS billing data accumu...

Page 750: ...ATIONS PRINT OPERATIONS C22 A2C14 10 Example 12 Example 13 Example 14 1999 8 30 11 39 MON BLOCK FULL BLOCK FULL BLOCK FULL 1999 8 30 11 38 MON CALL OVER ALARM CALL OVER ALARM CALL OVER ALARM 1999 8 30 15 08 MON BUFFER MEMORY EVACUATION ...

Page 751: ... indication See Example 16 NOTE 2 Hotel Name on the billing data NOTE 3 Direct Data Entry record Wake Up time record Wake Up result record Do Not Disturb record Message Waiting Lamp record Room Cut Off record Room Status record Check In Check Out record NOTE 1 The commission amount on each call can be assigned by the following command CMD004 60 75 Commission for K Method CMD004 76 91 Commission fo...

Page 752: ...ular station REC 100 SET 201 REC EXT 201 1 00 OK 1999 8 30 20 10 MON SERIAL No 0148 EXT 201 ACC OG START DIAL 00103055579 8 30 20 07 AUTH DUR 00 00 31 Total amount Calling station number 1 00 END SERIAL No 0149 EXT 201 OG I START DIAL OPERATOR 8 30 20 10 Condition code Input OS 0 60 1 60 TOTAL Extra call change ...

Page 753: ...APPENDIX C Dterm TIMS JOB SPECIFICATIONS PRINT OPERATIONS C25 A2C14 10 Example 16 1999 8 30 10 15 LONG TIME 1 M TRUNK 101 EXT 202 ...

Page 754: ... C26 A2C14 10 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY ...

Page 755: ...ns which explains each service feature operating procedure and service conditions BUSINESS FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS HOSPITALITY FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS FEATURES FOR AUSTRALIA ONLY FEATURES AND SPECIFI CATIONS FEATURES FOR OTHER COUNTRIES ONLY FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS APPENDIX D FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS ...

Page 756: ...ality Features and Specifications ND 91285 002 E CCIS Features and Specifications ND 91285 003 E ISDN Features and Specifications ND 91285 004 E Features for Other Countries only Features and Specifications ND 91285 006 E WCS Features and Specifications ND 91285 007 E WCS Features and Specifications for Latin America ND 91285 008 E ...

Page 757: ...ND 91285 001 E ISSUE 1 Model 100MX BUSINESS FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS DECEMBER 1999 NEC Corporation ...

Page 758: ...this document for use by its employ ees and customers The information contained herein is the prop erty of NEC Corporation and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval from NEC Corporation Copyright 1999 NEC Corporation 7 1 Shiba 5 chome Minato ku Tokyo 108 8001 Japan Printed in Japan NEC NEAX and Dterm are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation ...

Page 759: ...E No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 i 1 ii 1 iii 1 iv 1 v 1 vi 1 vii 1 viii 1 ix 1 x 1 xi 1 xii 1 xiii 1 xiv 1 xv 1 xvi 1 xvii 1 xviii 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 1 14 1 15 1 16 1 17 1 18 1 19 1 20 1 21 1 22 1 23 1 24 1 25 1 26 1 27 1 28 1 29 1 30 1 31 1 32 1 33 1 34 1 35 1 36 1 37 1 38 1 39 1 40 1 41 1 42 1 43 1 44 1 45 1 46 1 47 1 48 1 49 1 50 1 51 1 52 1 53 1 54 1 55 1 56 1 57 1 58...

Page 760: ...1 65 1 66 1 67 1 68 1 69 1 70 1 71 1 72 1 73 1 74 1 75 1 76 1 77 1 78 1 79 1 80 1 81 1 82 1 83 1 84 1 85 1 86 1 87 1 88 1 89 1 90 1 91 1 92 1 93 1 94 1 95 1 96 1 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 97 1 98 1 99 1 100 1 101 1 102 1 103 1 104 1 105 1 106 1 107 1 108 1 109 1 110 1 111 1 112 1 113 1 114 1 115 1 116 1 117 1 118 1 119 1 120 1 121 1 122 1 123 1 124 1 125 1 126 1 127 1 128 1 129 1 130 1 131 ...

Page 761: ...43 1 144 1 145 1 146 1 147 1 148 1 149 1 150 1 151 1 152 1 153 1 154 1 155 1 156 1 157 1 158 1 159 1 160 1 161 1 162 1 163 1 164 1 165 1 166 1 167 1 168 1 169 1 170 1 171 1 172 1 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 173 1 174 1 175 1 176 1 177 1 178 1 179 1 180 1 181 1 182 1 183 1 184 1 185 1 186 1 187 1 188 1 189 1 190 1 191 1 192 1 193 1 194 1 195 1 196 1 197 1 198 1 199 1 200 1 201 1 202 1 203 1 20...

Page 762: ...1 214 1 215 1 216 1 217 1 218 1 219 1 220 1 221 1 222 1 223 1 224 1 225 1 226 1 227 1 228 1 229 1 230 1 231 1 232 1 233 1 234 1 235 1 236 1 237 1 238 1 239 1 240 1 241 1 242 1 243 1 244 1 245 1 246 1 247 1 248 1 249 1 250 1 251 1 252 1 253 1 254 1 255 1 256 1 257 1 258 1 259 1 260 1 261 1 262 1 263 1 264 1 265 1 266 1 267 1 268 1 269 1 270 1 271 1 272 1 273 1 274 1 275 1 276 1 277 1 278 1 279 1 28...

Page 763: ...95 1 296 1 297 1 298 1 299 1 300 1 301 1 302 1 303 1 304 1 305 1 306 1 307 1 308 1 309 1 310 1 311 1 312 1 313 1 314 1 315 1 316 1 317 1 318 1 319 1 320 1 321 1 322 1 323 1 324 1 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 325 1 326 1 327 1 328 1 329 1 330 1 331 1 332 1 333 1 334 1 335 1 336 1 337 1 338 1 339 1 340 1 341 1 342 1 343 1 344 1 345 1 346 1 347 1 348 1 349 1 350 1 351 1 352 1 353 1 354 1 355 1 35...

Page 764: ...ND 91285 001 E ISSUE 1 363 1 364 1 365 1 366 1 367 1 368 1 369 1 370 1 371 1 372 1 373 1 374 1 375 1 376 1 377 1 378 1 379 1 380 1 381 1 382 1 383 1 384 1 385 1 386 1 387 1 388 1 389 1 390 1 391 1 392 1 393 1 394 1 395 1 396 1 397 1 398 1 399 1 400 1 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 401 1 402 1 403 1 404 1 405 1 406 1 407 1 408 1 409 1 410 1 411 1 412 1 413 1 414 1 PAGE No ISSUE No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8...

Page 765: ... ATTENDANT SPEED CALLING SYSTEM SET UP 30 ATTENDANT TERMINAL Dterm 32 ATTENDANT TRAINING JACKS 34 AUDIBLE INDICATION CONTROL 35 AUTHORIZATION CODE 36 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT 37 AUTOMATIC CALL DISTRIBUTION ACD MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM MIS 39 AUTOMATIC CAMP ON 40 AUTOMATIC CHANGE OF NIGHT SERVICE 42 AUTOMATIC HOLD Dterm 43 AUTOMATIC IDLE RETURN Dterm 44 AUTOMATIC INTERCOM Dterm 45 AUTOMATIC RECALL ...

Page 766: ...L INDICATOR LAMP Dterm 87 CALL INFORMATION SYSTEM CIS 88 CALL PARK Dterm 90 CALL PARK SYSTEM 91 CALL PARK TENANT 93 CALL PICKUP DESIGNATED GROUP 94 CALL PICKUP DIRECT 95 CALL PICKUP GROUP 96 CALL PICKUP GROUP Dterm 97 CALL PROCESSING INDICATION 98 CALL QUEUING 99 CALL REDIRECT 100 CALL TRANSFER ALL CALLS 102 CALL TRANSFER ALL CALLS Dterm 103 CALL TRANSFER ATTENDANT 104 CALL WAITING ANSWER Dterm 10...

Page 767: ...ACE DDI 147 DIRECT INWARD DIALLING DID 148 DIRECT OUTWARD DIALLING DOD 150 DIRECT STATION SELECTION DSS CONSOLE 151 DO NOT DISTURB CONSOLE 153 DIRECT IN TERMINATION DIT 157 DISTINCTIVE RINGING 158 Dterm 160 DUAL HOLD Dterm 161 DYNAMIC DIAL PAD Dterm 162 ELAPSED TIME DISPLAY Dterm 163 EXCLUSIVE HOLD Dterm 164 EXECUTIVE CALLING 165 EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY 166 EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY Dterm 167 FAULT ME...

Page 768: ...NG TIME OF DAY ROUTING 207 LINE LOCKOUT 208 LINE PRESELECTION Dterm 209 LINE RE CONNECT OTHER LINE Dterm 210 LINE RE CONNECT SAME LINE Dterm 211 LISTED DIRECTORY NUMBER DISPLAY ATTENDANT 212 LONG LINE CIRCUIT 213 MAINTENANCE ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL MAT 214 MANUAL INTERCOM Dterm 216 MEET ME PAGING ATTENDANT 217 MEET ME PAGING STATION 218 MESSAGE CENTER INTERFACE MCI 219 MESSAGE REMINDER Dterm 222 M...

Page 769: ...AGING ACCESS 268 PAGING TRANSFER 269 PASSING DIAL TONE 270 PASSWORD 271 PAUSE ENTRY Dterm 272 PEG COUNT 273 PERIODIC TIME INDICATION TONE 274 POOLED LINE ACCESS Dterm 275 POWER FAILURE TRANSFER 276 PRIME LINE PICKUP Dterm 277 PRIORITY CALL 278 PRIVACY ON ALL LINES Dterm 279 PRIVACY RELEASE Dterm 280 PRIVACY Dterm 281 PRIVATE LINES 282 PUSHBUTTON CALLING 284 PUSHBUTTON CALLING ATTENDANT ONLY 285 PU...

Page 770: ...L DIAL TONE 322 SPEED CALLING OVERRIDE SYSTEM 323 SPEED CALLING ONE TOUCH Dterm 324 SPEED CALLING STATION 326 SPEED CALLING SYSTEM 328 SPEED CALLING SYSTEM Dterm 329 SPLIT CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS 330 SPLIT CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE 332 SPLIT CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER 334 SPLITTING 336 SPLITTING Dterm 337 STACK DIAL ATTENDANT 338 STACK DIAL Dterm 339 STATION ATTENDANT CONTROLLED CONFERENCE 6 1...

Page 771: ...SPLAY 376 TRUNK LINE APPEARANCE Dterm 377 TRUNK TO TRUNK CONNECTION 379 TRUNK TO TRUNK TRANSFER BEFORE ANSWER BY ATTENDANT CONSOLE 381 TRUNK TO TRUNK THIRD PARTY CANCELLATION 382 UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION UCD 383 UNIFORM NUMBERING PLAN 386 UNIVERSAL SENDER 390 VARIABLE TIMING PARAMETERS 391 VOICE CALL ATTENDANT 394 VOICE CALL Dterm 395 VOICE GUIDE 397 VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION 399 VOICE MESSAGE SYSTE...

Page 772: ...Page viii ND 91285 001 E Revision 1 0 DECEMBER 1999 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY ...

Page 773: ... X E Analog Port Adapter Dterm X Announcement Service X E Attendant Camp On with Tone Indication X Attendant Console Lockout Password X Attendant Delay Announcement X Attendant Lockout X Attendant Loop Release X Attendant Night Transfer X Attendant Override X Attendant Speed Calling System Set Up X E Attendant Terminal Dterm X Attendant Training Jacks X Audible Indication Control X Authorization C...

Page 774: ...ll X Brokerage Hot Line Dterm X Brokerage Hot Line Outside Dterm X Busy Lamp Field Fixed X Busy Lamp Field Flexible X Busy Verification X Call Back X Call Back Don t Answer X Call Back Dterm X Call Back Multiple Assignment X Call Forwarding All Calls X Call Forwarding All Calls Dterm X Call Forwarding All Calls Outside X E Call Forwarding Busy Line X Call Forwarding Busy Line Dterm X Call Forwardi...

Page 775: ... Call Pickup Group Dterm X Call Processing Indication X Call Queuing X Call Redirect X Call Transfer All Calls X Call Transfer All Calls Dterm X Call Transfer Attendant X Call Waiting Answer Dterm X Call Waiting Display X Call Waiting Lamp X Call Waiting Station X Call Waiting Terminating X Called Number Display Attendant X Called Station Status Display Dterm X Caller ID Display X Calling Number D...

Page 776: ... Dial Access to Attendant X Dail by Name Dterm X Dial Intercom Dterm X Dial Monitor Dterm X Dialled Number Identification Service DNIS X Dictation Access X Digital Display Station X Digital Display Trunk X Direct Digital Interface DDI X Direct Inward Dialling DID X Direct Outward Dialling DOD X Direct Station Selection DSS Console X Direct in Termination DIT X Distinctive Ringing X Dterm X Dual Ho...

Page 777: ...unt Code X E Group Diversion X Group Listening Dterm X Hands Free Answer Back Dterm X Hands Free Dialling Monitoring Dterm X Hot Line X Hot Line Outside X House Phone X Howler Tone Sending X I Hold Indication Dterm X I Use Indication Dterm X Immediate Ringing X Incoming Call Identification X Incoming Central Office Call to Tie Line Connection X Individual Attendant Access X Individual Trunk Access...

Page 778: ...ctory Number Display Attendant X Long Line Circuit X Maintenance Administration Terminal MAT X Manual Intercom Dterm X Meet Me Paging Attendant X E Meet Me Paging Station X E Message Center Interface MCI X Note Message Reminder Dterm X E Message Waiting Lamp Setting Attendant X Message Waiting Lamp Setting Station X E Microphone Control Dterm X Miscellaneous Trunk Access X Miscellaneous Trunk Rest...

Page 779: ...lusive Hold Dterm X Non Square Line Assignment Dterm X Non Volatile Generic Program X Off Hook Alarm X On Line Maintenance X Outgoing Trunk Queuing X Outgoing Trunk Queuing Dterm X Overflow Announcement UCD X Overflow UCD X Pad Lock X Paging Access X E Paging Transfer X E Passing Dial Tone X Password X Pause Entry Dterm X Peg Count X Periodic Time Indication Tone X Pooled Line Access Dterm X Power...

Page 780: ...io Paging X Relay Control Function Key Dterm X E Remote Access to System X E Remote PIM X Note Remote System Data Change X Remove and Restore Service X Reserve Power X Note Resident System Program X Restriction from Outgoing Calls X Return Schedule Dterm X Ring Frequency Control Dterm X Ringing Line Pickup Dterm X Rotary Dial Calling X Route Advance X Save and Repeat Dterm X Security Alarm X E Sel...

Page 781: ...ing Station X E Speed Calling System X Speed Calling System Dterm X Split Call Forwarding All Calls X Split Call Forwarding Busy Line X Split Call Forwarding Don t Answer X Splitting X Splitting Dterm X Stack Dial Attendant X Stack Dial Dterm X Station Attendant Controlled Conference 6 10 Party Conference X Note Station Camp On X Station Hunting Circular X Station Hunting Secretarial X Station Hun...

Page 782: ...nial Toll Diversion X Toll Restriction Total Digit Count X Toll Restriction 3 6 Digit X Trunk Answer from Any Station TAS X E Trunk Group Busy Display X E Trunk Line Appearance Dterm X Trunk to Trunk Connection X Trunk to Trunk Transfer before Answer by Attendant Console X Trunk to Trunk Third Party Cancellation X Uniform Call Distribution UCD X Uniform Numbering Plan X E Universal Sender X X Vari...

Page 783: ...g the FLASH key or momentarily depressing the hookswitch OR Dial a station number to transfer the call SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 The maximum number of digits in an ACCOUNT CODE is 10 when using the SMDR format other wise the maximum is 16 There is no limitation to the number of ACCOUNT CODEs used per sys tem The feature access code for ACCOUNT CODE entry can be one to three digits 2 A station user can ...

Page 784: ...CCOUNT CODE into the system instead of the station STATION APPLICATION DESK CONSOLE SMART CONSOLE OPERATING PROCEDURE To enter an ACCOUNT CODE 1 While connected to an outside line depress the START key only if an outgoing call 2 Enter the ACCOUNT CODE feature access code 3 Enter the ACCOUNT CODE 4 Dial the desired station number SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Refer to ACCOUNT CODE ...

Page 785: ...m user with the capability to enter an ACCOUNT CODE during talk with C O Line OPERATING PROCEDURE When using function key 1 Talk with C O Line 2 Depress ACCOUNT key 3 Enter ACCOUNT CODE When using one touch key 1 Talk with C O Line 2 Depress one touch key which is assigned ACCOUNT CODE SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Refer to ACCOUNT CODE ...

Page 786: ... a C O trunk and are counted and stored until the line is released SMDR or CIS information can be obtained after the line is released This service is available for station where metering pulse are sent after the local call line is released STATION APPLICATION Not applicable OPERATING PROCEDURE No manual operation is required SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 This service is effective when a PN 2COTD is used fo...

Page 787: ...TRK receives Hold Tone 2 Dial Station B STA B number 3 STA B answers 4 STA A and STA B talk 5 Press Conf key 6 Three party conference among STA A STA B and TRK is established 7 Press Transfer key receive Special Dial Tone STA B and TRK are hold position 8 Dial Station C STA C number 9 STA C answers 10 STA A and STA C talk 11 Press Conf key 12 Four party conference is established among STA A STA B ...

Page 788: ...ERVICE CONDITIONS 1 The amount of ADD ON MODULE units is limited to 32 units for every Firmware Processor FP installed for a system total of 32 units 2 Only one ADD ON MODULE can be connected to a Dterm providing a maximum of up to 49 line trunk keys 24 line trunk keys on Dterm and 25 line trunk keys on ADD ON MODULE 3 A Dterm and an associated ADD ON MODULE unit must be contained in the same PIM ...

Page 789: ...set to any line trunk keys on the ADD ON MODULE 11 For details on any keys usable for the SPEED CALLING STATION function refer to the SPEED CALLING STATION feature One of the last 3 keys can be used as Day Night key 12 A DLC Card must be provided when using the ADD ON MODULE The ADD ON MODULE unit uses one port of the card 13 Up to 25 lines and trunks can be assigned for the ADD ON MODULE The dela...

Page 790: ...ess the BUSY OUT key 2 The corresponding LED lights From Agent Station Single Line Telephone or Dterm which talks with C O Line 1 Momentarily press the hookswitch Single Line Telephone or press Transfer key Dterm receive Special Dial Tone 2 Dial the BUSY OUT set access code receive Service Set Tone 3 Momentarily press the hookswitch Single Line Telephone or press Transfer key Dterm 4 Agent Station...

Page 791: ...nate calls while in BUSY OUT mode 3 The agent station can be set a busy out during talk with an incoming outside call When that call is completed the station is busied out 4 BUSY OUT status for each UCD station can be indicated by the associated LED on the DSS CON SOLE 5 The agent can set cancel a busy out from a Sub Line of a Dterm by dialing the BUSY OUT set cancel access code The BUSY OUT key i...

Page 792: ...icable CONTENTS OF FAULT ALARM INDICATIONS AC DC POWER PZ PW121 EXTERNAL ALARM DISPLAY Dterm ALARM MJ MN MJ MN MJ MN System Initialization X X X X Number of stack overflows was more than a fixed number X X X X X Note 2 X Note 2 MP FP AP Communication Failure X X X X X Note 2 X Note 2 FP AP Down X X X X X Note 2 X Note 2 DTI Line Failure X X X X X Note 2 X Note 2 DCH Link Failure X X X X X Note 2 X...

Page 793: ...peration of the Main Processor MP is indicated by a green flashing 120 int run LED located on the MP 4 Normal operation of each AC DC power supply is indicated by a steadily lit green LED located on the AC DC power supply 5 In case that PBX is stopped at predetermined time when PBX starts fault message is stored and alarm is sent 6 Alarm indication to Dterm lamp a The maximum number of Dterms per ...

Page 794: ...he key with the desired letter to display the first letter on the key The display will indicate the numerical designation Subsequent depressions will advance through the letters on that key The following table can be used as a guide to indicate the key and the number of depressions required to display numbers letters spaces and periods 4 When the desired letter is displayed depression of the Trans...

Page 795: ...nge a name A Dterm can register or change the name assignment of that individ ual Dterm 2 User names can be assigned to stations that do not have an LCD display using the MAT or CAT 3 The trunk route name display is provided on a trunk route basis The maximum amount of characters in the trunk name display is four The maximum number of trunk routes assignable is 63 Only the MAT or CAT can be used t...

Page 796: ...og terminal without keypad via the ANALOG PORT ADAPTER 1 Lift the handset of a Dterm receive Dial Tone 2 Dial the desired station number receive Ringback Tone The LED of the Prime Line on the Dterm lights green 3 After the called party answers lift handset of the analog terminal to switch over to the analog terminal 4 Replace the handset of the Dterm 5 Converse To originate a call from a Single Li...

Page 797: ...dem with NCU NCU Network Connection Unit 2 In Single Port mode the Dterm and the analog terminal can not be used simultaneously When the Dterm and the analog terminal goes off hook simultaneously the analog terminal has precedence 3 In Dual Port mode the Dterm and the analog terminal can be used simultaneously 4 A Dterm analog terminal can not be identified on LED in Single Port mode When the anal...

Page 798: ... STATION APPLICATION All stations OPERATING PROCEDURE To access 1 Lift the handset receive Dial Tone 2 Dial the applicable ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE access code 3 Receive the message To erase an announcement 1 Lift the handset receive Dial Tone 2 Dial the ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE delete access code receive Feature Dial Tone 3 Dial the ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE group number 4 Restore the handset To record 1 Lift...

Page 799: ...e lines can access the ANNOUNCEMENT SERVICE 5 Each time a station is connected to an announcement card the message will be from 64 seconds The station will then be disconnected 6 The duration of an announcement is limited to 64 seconds 7 The system can be equipped with up to 128 DAT circuits for all announcement features There are 2 circuits on MP card 2 circuits on each 2DAT card and 4 circuits o...

Page 800: ... to a DAT Card for this purpose Secondary connections are made to the message even if the message is in the middle of a cycle d The announcement is repeated until the call is removed from hold 10 A voice message can be sent to incoming C O calls during day or night mode a Different messages can be programmed on each C O Line b Different messages can be programmed for Day Night c More than one conn...

Page 801: ...ceive Busy Tone 3 Press CANCEL key automatically returned to the trunk party To reenter the call that has been CAMPED ON from the Attendant before being recalled 1 Press the LOOP key corresponding to held call 2 The busy station number and name are displayed for six seconds in the left side of the console s display For SMART CONSOLE only if provided by system data 3 Converse with the held party OR...

Page 802: ...the following features are activated on the busy station ATTENDANT OVERRIDE CALL TRANSFER STATION CAMP ON THREE WAY CALLING PRIVACY RELEASE VOICE CALL CONSULTATION HOLD DATA LINE SECURITY EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY CALL HOLD EXCLUSIVE HOLD NON EXCLUSIVE HOLD PAGING TRANSFER When CAMP ON is denied the Attendant will receive Reorder Tone 3 Calls that remain camped on for longer than the predetermined ti...

Page 803: ...NSWER key and receive Service Set Tone The LCD displays SET LKOUT The mode of the console is changed from normal to lockout condition 5 Depress the RELEASE key To cancel ATTENDANT CONSOLE LOCKOUT 1 Depress MODE key and the associated red LED lights 2 Dial a predetermined password number 3 Depress the ACTIVE key and the associated green LED lights The LCD display changes from LKOUT to ACTIVE 4 Depr...

Page 804: ...alls on the loop keys can be handled Unanswered calls Camped on calls Automatic Recalls Held Call on LOOP key 5 If there is a call park which has been set by the Attendant the console cannot be set to lockout condi tion In this case the operator hears Reorder Tone and the LCD shows CALL PARK 6 When the console is put into the lockout condition if there are any uncompleted calls in loops with LOOP ...

Page 805: ...able OPERATING PROCEDURE No manual operation required SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Up to eight calls can be connected to one circuit of a DAT card at one time 2 This feature is provided on a trunk route basis C O Tie DID 3 A maximum of 128 Digital Announcement circuits can be assigned on a tenant system basis 4 The announcement can be supplied to a call once or several times periodically This is selectabl...

Page 806: ... Attendant the ability to re enter an established trunk station connection without being recalled by the station STATION APPLICATION DESK CONSOLE SMART CONSOLE OPERATING PROCEDURE No manual operation is required SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 This feature is by definition mutually exclusive with ATTENDANT OVERRIDE BUSY VERIFICATION ...

Page 807: ...ERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Unanswered calls will be routed to the Attendant within the predetermined timing via AUTOMATIC RECALL See VARIABLE TIMING PARAMETERS 2 If all ATTENDANT LOOP circuits are busy when AUTOMATIC RECALL is activated unanswered calls will be routed to Attendant when idle LOOPs become available CW Call Waiting shows on the LCD or SMART CONSOLE to indicate a call is waiting to be answer...

Page 808: ...hen active permits the Attendant to camp on to a busy called station Upon camp on the Attendant may release the call from the console 9 Release is denied when the Attendant attempts to transfer a trunk to a fully restricted station or to a sta tion which already has a trunk camped onto it In this case the RELEASE key is ineffective ...

Page 809: ...ing party will receive busy tone 2 This service feature may be provided together with NIGHT CONNECTION FLEXIBLE or NIGHT CONNECTION FIXED to a night station NIGHT CONNECTION station can also be assigned as Night station for ATTENDANT NIGHT TRANSFER 3 If the Night station is set for CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS operator calls terminated to that station will be forwarded to the designated station 4 The...

Page 810: ... 0 2 2 ATTENDANT NIGHT TRANSFER CONT D SERVICE CONDITIONS CONT D 10 Operator call after CONSULTATION HOLD is transferred to the Night station 11 Individual Attendant calls are not transferred to the Night station assigned by ATTENDANT NIGHT TRANSFER ...

Page 811: ...to disengage SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 This feature may be utilized during Trunk to Trunk calls COT Tie Lines 2 ATTENDANT OVERRIDE can be set when the busy trunk is talking with another trunk or station as two party conversation Therefore ATTENDANT OVERRIDE may be denied if the busy trunk mode is a Dialling mode b Consultation Hold All Calls c Talk to another Attendant In each of the above instances th...

Page 812: ...ssed in this status the Attendant Console can go back to the idle status At this time both CANCEL and ANS keys are invalid After the above operation select SPD operation 4 Depress the SPD key The SPD key LED red comes on 5 Dial the block 5 digits The selected block number is displayed as follows along with the currently registered trunk access code and telephone number 000012 0 12345 56 SPD 6 Dial...

Page 813: ...MAINTE NANCE ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL MAT or CUSTOMER ADMINISTRATION TERMI NAL CAT 5 Stations may be denied access to SPEED CALLING via CLASS OF SERVICE assignments in system data SPEED CALLING may also be allowed or denied on either a system or tenant wide basis 6 TOLL DENIAL TOLL DIVERSION and TOLL RESTRICTION 3 6 DIGIT may or may not be applied to SPEED CALLING as desired 7 LEAST COST ROUTING 3 ...

Page 814: ...key LED lights steady green incoming indication stops LCD shows trunk name and number 3 Press Transfer key and dial station number to be transferred to or press desired DSS key LCD shows called station number 4 Press RLS key or go on hook To hold a call 1 Press Hold key LOOP key flashes green 2 Go on hook or press RLS key To retrieve a held call 1 Go off hook 2 Press flashing LOOP key LED indicati...

Page 815: ...ND is lit steady green while it is set but is dis played only when the Attendant Terminal user activates the Message Waiting mode or Do Not Disturb mode 9 Direct trunk line appearances may be assigned to the Attendant Terminal Operation is the same as for a normal Attendant Terminal Attendant Console type operation is not available with direct trunk line appearances 10 For operator calls from Tie ...

Page 816: ...ped with two headset jacks Two jacks are located on the bottom of the console and can be used for training new operators STATION APPLICATION DESK CONSOLE OPERATING PROCEDURE Normal call handling procedures apply SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 When the console jacks are used for training both headsets can be used for listening and talking ...

Page 817: ...STATION APPLICATION DESK CONSOLE SMART CONSOLE OPERATING PROCEDURE The Attendant Console is equipped with a volume control which can raise or lower the internal speaker level The AUDIBLE INDICATION may also be turned off when required SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Each Attendant Console can adjust the AUDIBLE INDICATIONS to the ambient noise level of its sur roundings or completely disable this feature whe...

Page 818: ...imited to 8 digits If Forced Account Code is utilized the same number of digits must be assigned to AUTHORIZATION CODE and FORCED ACCOUNT CODE Number of codes Up to 1 000 codes combined with FORCED ACCOUNT CODE and REMOTE ACCESS CODE b In the case of system without AP01 card Number of digits 1 digit 8 digits Number of codes The maximum number of codes depends on the numbering scheme and digit numb...

Page 819: ...te a message 1 Go off hook and receive Dial Tone 2 Dial the DAT delete access code and DAT card number 3 Receive Service Set Tone 4 Restore handset SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 If the called station is busy or does not answer or the number dialed is a feature access code or trunk access code any one of the following operations can be set a The C O Line can be released b A 2nd message and Dial Tone or Dial...

Page 820: ...eceiver is found Ringback Tone from the C O Lines is supplied to the calling party until the AUTOMATED ATTENDANT answers 6 AUTOMATED ATTENDANT is assigned to trunks on a per tenant basis 7 When the calling party cannot send DTMF digits any one of the following operations can be selected in programming a The C O Line can be released b An alternate call terminating destination Attendant Console TRUN...

Page 821: ...d red alarms and hard copy summary reports STATION APPLICATION Not Applicable OPERATING PROCEDURE Refer to the CallCenterWorX System Manual SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 ACD MIS requires the ACD MIS software application processor personal computer and a parallel printer The personal computer and parallel printer are user provided 2 Only one supervisor terminal is allowed per ACD system The use of an extern...

Page 822: ...DIRECT IN TERMINATION calls can overflow these calls can be directed to either the Attendant TAS indication or can be automatically Camped On All of which can be assigned by the office data 4 Relation with other services is as follows a CALL BACK CAMP ON service can be set to a party which has set or has been set with CALL BACK service CALL BACK service can be set to a party to which CAMP ON servi...

Page 823: ... CALL HOLD service CAMP ON service can be set to the party to which CALL HOLD service has been set CALL HOLD set can be set to the party to which CAMP ON service has been set The party with which the station is talking is placed into CALL HOLD state and starts engag ing in a call on the trunk which has been under CAMP ON state CALL HOLD service can be set to the party to which CAMP ON service has ...

Page 824: ...s to be provided on each trunk basis a Ring Down Incoming Call b LDN DID Tie Incoming Call c CALL FORWARDING to Attendant Incoming Call Note 1 d ICPT Note 1 Note 1 Provided a night destination is programmed for the trunk on which the call was made 2 The timing for providing this service is from 32 to 36 seconds after the call status has changed from Trunk Incoming Call to Attendant Call Note 2 The...

Page 825: ...d with the call on hold SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 The Answer key s LED will flash for incoming calls on trunk line keys and Camped On calls 2 The priority of calls answered via the Answer key is as follows a Voice Call b Call to Prime Line including Camp on c Call to Trunk Line Appearance d Call to Secondary Extension lowest key No has priority 3 When a Dterm user is initiating a voice call or monitori...

Page 826: ...is tant end disconnecting STATION APPLICATION All Dterms OPERATING PROCEDURE No manual operation is required SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 AUTOMATIC IDLE RETURN only applies when the call was made using the Speaker key 2 The call can be either an internal or external call If it is an external call a release signal from the C O Lines must be supplied 3 AUTOMATIC IDLE RETURN can be allowed or denied on a sys...

Page 827: ...es the mode from ringing to Voice Announcement or vice versa The called party must depress AUTOMATIC INTERCOM key and lift handset to answer ringing call SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Only two Dterm can share an AUTOMATIC INTERCOM path 2 The maximum number of AUTOMATIC INTERCOM paired stations per system is 32 16 Automatic Intercoms 3 More than one AUTOMATIC INTERCOM can appear on a Dterm 4 AUTOMATIC INTER...

Page 828: ...timing is flexible in system programming as follows a Attendant Recall Camp On No Answer 2 4 to 124 8 seconds Default 31 2 33 6 b Attendant Held calls 2 4 to 124 8 seconds Default 31 2 33 6 2 If the Attendant re enters a held or camped on trunk timing is reset when the trunk is returned to a hold or transfer the timer will restart 3 When a recall occurs to the Attendant Console a buzzer will sound...

Page 829: ... 24 28 d Camp On Recall 8 to 128 second Default 24 32 2 When the Dterm user reenters a held or transferred call timing is reset If the call is returned to a hold or transfer condition the timer will restart again 3 When a held or transferred call returns to the Dterm a continuous ring of 0 5 seconds on 0 5 seconds off and an LED green flash of 240 IPM occurs until the call is retrieved The signal ...

Page 830: ...TIONS 1 One BGM can be selected out of 10 music programs Only one per station can be selected at a time 2 Effective ineffective of this service feature is determined according to the Service Feature Class assigned to each station 3 Hardware requirements are as follows COT or TNT card per BGM The BGM equipment is to be furnished by the customer The input source is 10 to 0 dBm 600 ohms COT or 8 dBm ...

Page 831: ...power outage is planned ex building maintenance STATION APPLICATION Not applicable OPERATING PROCEDURE Refer to the Maintenance Manual SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 This feature is available for both internal and external batteries 2 This feature is effective on a system wide basis ex all the batteries connected to the system are released or reconnected at the same time when this feature is activated 3 If ...

Page 832: ...boss through the Sub Line of station 201 3 The secretary receives a message from the calling party and sets the MW lamp on the boss s sta tion To set a MW indication 1 Depress Speaker key 2 Depress MW set key or Dial MW set access code 3 Depress the line key of station 200 on which the MW indication is to be set 4 The MW lamp of station 200 comes on To cancel MW indication 1 Depress Speaker key 2 ...

Page 833: ...endant Console and any other sta tion at the same time However the controlled station cannot identify the controlling party 7 The LCD on the secretary s station displays the following messages 8 MW cannot be activated on a virtual line When activation is attempted on a virtual line the LCD dis plays RESTRICT and the Re order Tone is heard 9 This feature can be used to control the MW lamp at any co...

Page 834: ...ON HOLD and BRO KER S CALL is established 4 The boss can alternate between callers by depressing the Answer key For a BOSS SECRETARY OVERRIDE when the boss in using a Single Line Telephone and the secre tary has a call on the primary extension of the secretary s Dterm 1 The secretary depresses the boss line key appearance on the secretary s Dterm The party that was connected to the secretary is pl...

Page 835: ...ARY OVERRIDE is denied if the boss is connected to the Attendant Console 6 If provided in the system the held caller will hear MUSIC ON HOLD 7 BOSS SECRETARY OVERRIDE is denied to the secretary if the secretary has activated or is engaged in any of the followings ATTENDANT OVERRIDE CALL TRANSFER BUSY VERIFICATION CONSULTATION HOLD ALL CALLS CALL WAITING ORIGINATING DIAL ACCESS TO ATTENDANT EXECUTI...

Page 836: ...L LCD dis plays boss and secretary ICM xxxx 4 Boss answers the call LCD displays xxxx 5 Secretary hangs up calling party talks to boss To cancel 1 Secretary depresses the line key 2 Secretary talks to calling party SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Secretary must have boss Prime Line appearing on the Dterm in a multiline operation 2 Secretary must have a Dterm for this operation 3 This service feature is only ...

Page 837: ... boss line is forwarded to secretary 9 BOSS SECRETARY TRANSFER is denied to the secretary if the secretary is activating or engaged in any of the followings ATTENDANT OVERRIDE CALL HOLD CALL TRANSFER BUSY VERIFICATION BOSS SECRETARY OVERRIDE Dterm CALL WAITING TERMINATING CONSULTATION HOLD ALL CALLS CALL WAITING ORIGINATING EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY VOICE CALL Dterm THREE WAY CALLING PRIVACY RELEASE ...

Page 838: ...e The first party is placed on CONSULTATION HOLD 2 Dial the CALL HOLD feature access code and receive extension Dial Tone 3 Dial the new number and the second party answers 4 Depress the FLASH key or momentarily depress the hookswitch The second party is placed on CONSULTATION HOLD 5 Dial the CALL HOLD feature access code and the second party is placed on CALL HOLD The first party is reconnected 6...

Page 839: ...k and off hook SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 If one Dterm is used for this application one of the line key must be assigned as the My Line 2 HOT LINEs cannot be assigned to a Hunt or UCD Group 3 Single Line Station VIRTUAL LINE SOFTWARE LINE APPEARANCE can be assigned to BRO KERAGE HOT LINE 4 CALL FORWARDING is allowed if the destination station has set CALL FORWARDING but CALL FORWARDING OUTSIDE cannot be...

Page 840: ...ss another subline key without going on hook and off hook SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 The Virtual Line or a Single Line Telephone can be assigned for the HOT LINE station 2 When a station user is confronted with a situation in which all trunks are busy or all senders are busy at the time of calling under this service Reorder Tone is heard at the HOT LINE stations 3 Outside connection in BROKERAGE HOT LIN...

Page 841: ...ogramming is done on a per console basis When the SMART CON SOLE with DIRECT STATION SELECTION DSS CONSOLE is used the busy status of the stations which are assigned in DSS can be indicated on DSS STATION APPLICATION DESK CONSOLE with DSS SMART CONSOLE with DSS SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 If this feature is to be used 0 zero cannot be used as a valid first digit in the system as display prob lems will oc...

Page 842: ...EASE key to disengage SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 This feature may be used during Station to Station and Station to Trunk calls COT or Tie Lines 2 In cases except above instances the Attendant will receive Reoder Tone 3 BUSY VERIFICATION and ATTENDANT LOCKOUT are mutually exclusive features 4 This feature can be denied on DICTATION ACCESS and PAGING ACCESS connections 5 STATION HUNTING Circular Secretari...

Page 843: ...Upon answering called station will be rung To cancel CALL BACK 1 Lift handset receive Dial Tone 2 Dial CALL BACK cancellation code receive Service Set Tone 3 Hang up SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 If CALL BACK is not answered by calling station within 30 seconds ringing will stop and CALL BACK will be automatically cancelled 2 As with certain other CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL features CALL BACK may be assig...

Page 844: ...RE To set CALL BACK DON T ANSWER 1 Dial Desired station number receive Ringback Tone 2 Dial 2 receive Service Set Tone To cancel CALL BACK DON T ANSWER 1 Lift handset receive Dial Tone 2 Dial CALL BACK cancellation code receive Service Set Tone SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 This feature can be set from Dterm and DDP Decadic Dial Pulse Telephone only 2 Other service conditions which are described in CALL BA...

Page 845: ...ired station number receive Busy Tone 2 Depress CALL BACK key receive Service Set Tone The LCD displays SET xxxx where xxxx is Called Station 3 Hang up 4 When desired station becomes idle calling station will be rung The LCD displays CALL BACK xxxx where xxxx is Called Station and is flashing 5 Upon answering called station will be rung 6 Called station s LCD displays CALL BACK xxxx where xxxx is ...

Page 846: ...E Refer OPERATING PROCEDURE of CALL BACK SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Stations are assigned Allowed or Restricted of this feature according to CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL programming in system data 2 All CALL BACK which are setting to plural stations will be automatically cancelled if the calling sta tion operates the cancellation 3 Any other service conditions are same as CALL BACK 4 There are 128 statio...

Page 847: ... 2 When CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS has been set special dial tone is heard 3 Replace the handset To cancel from an individual station 1 Lift the handset receive Dial Tone 2 Dial the CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS cancellation code receive Service Set Tone To set from an Attendant Console 1 Press an idle LOOP key 2 Dial the CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS access code receive Special Dial Tone 3 Dial the origin...

Page 848: ... forwarded Single Line Telephone only 4 When the operator answers a forwarded trunk call system data programming can provide a called sta tion number display on the Attendant Console 5 CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS data remains in the data memory even if the system is reinitial ized or in the event of a power failure 6 When the station user has set CALL FORWARDING and lifts the handset the station can...

Page 849: ...eaker key receive Dial Tone 2 Press the CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS FWD feature key receive Special Dial Tone 3 Dial the desired target station number receive Service Set Tone The LED will light The LCD displays SET xxxx where xxxx is Target Station or SET OPR OPR means Operator 4 Replace the handset or press Speaker key To cancel 1 Lift the handset or press Speaker key receive Dial Tone 2 Press FWD...

Page 850: ...ber 4 If forwarding is accepted Service Set Tone will be heard 5 If forwarding is denied Reorder Tone will be heard To cancel 1 Lift the handset receive Dial Tone 2 Dial the CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS OUTSIDE cancellation code same as CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS receive Service Set Tone SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Stations may be assigned this feature via CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL programming in sys tem d...

Page 851: ... Console 8 An internal station call to a station set for CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS OUTSIDE will fol low the restriction class of the station set CALL FORWARDING When Call Forwarding to outside is executed an object of the billing is as follows Station set Call Forwarding Billing Object Single Line Telephone Dterm Station set Call Forwarding Virtual station Originating station trunk ...

Page 852: ...LL FORWARDING BUSY LINE access code receive Special Dial Tone 3 Dial the originating station number 4 Dial the desired target station number receive Service Set Tone To cancel from an Attendant Console 1 Press an idle LOOP key 2 Dial the CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE cancellation code receive Special Dial Tone 3 Dial the originating station number receive Service Set Tone SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 If a cal...

Page 853: ...e calling station will queue to the UCD group and will not forward 10 If a calling station or Attendant Console receives Busy Tone after being CALL FORWARDED BUSY LINE the caller can activate EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY CALL WAITING ORIGINATING CALL WAITING TERMINATING ATTENDANT OVERRIDE BUSY VERIFICATION CALL BACK or other services available on busy tone to the initially called station 11 There is no ...

Page 854: ...one 3 Dial the desired target station number receive Service Set Tone The LCD displays SET xxxx where xxxx is Target Station The LED of the associated feature key lights 4 Replace the handset or press Speaker key 5 If the target station is the operator the LCD displays SET OPR OPR means Operator To cancel CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE 1 Lift the handset or press Speaker key receive Dial Tone 2 Press t...

Page 855: ...s accepted Service Set Tone will be heard 5 If forwarding is denied Reorder Tone will be heard To cancel CALL FORWARDING 1 Lift the handset receive Dial Tone 2 Dial the CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE OUTSIDE cancellation code same as CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE receive Service Set Tone SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Stations may be assigned this feature via CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL programming in sys tem data 2...

Page 856: ... Console 8 An internal station call to a station set for CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE OUTSIDE will fol low the restriction class of the station set CALL FORWARDING When CALL FORWARDING to outside is executed an object of the billing is as follows Station set Call Forwarding Billing Object Single Line Telephone Dterm Station set Call Forwarding Virtual station Originating station trunk ...

Page 857: ...n idle LOOP key 2 Dial the CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER access code receive Special Dial Tone 3 Dial the originating station number 4 Dial the desired target station number receive Service Set Tone To cancel from an Attendant Console 1 Press an idle LOOP key 2 Dial the CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER cancellation code receive Special Dial Tone 3 Dial the originating station number receive Service Set...

Page 858: ...8 CALL FORWARDING on a system basis allows direct incoming trunk calls which encounter a DON T ANSWER condition to be forwarded to a predetermined station or the Attendant Console 9 The operator answering a CALL FORWARDING call can identify the called station number on the Attendant Console display 10 CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE can be set simultaneously with this feature to result in CALL FORWARDIN...

Page 859: ... To set 1 Lift the handset or press Speaker key receive Dial Tone 2 Press the CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER feature key receive Special Dial Tone 3 Dial the desired target station number receive Service Set Tone The LCD displays SET xxxx where xxxx is Target Station To cancel 1 Lift the handset or press Speaker key receive Dial Tone 2 Press the CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER feature key receive Speci...

Page 860: ...ding is accepted Service Set Tone will be heard 5 If forwarding is denied Reorder Tone will be heard To cancel CALL FORWARDING 1 Lift the handset receive Dial Tone 2 Dial the CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER OUTSIDE cancellation code same as CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER receive Service Set Tone SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Stations may be assigned this feature via CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL programming in sy...

Page 861: ...t Console 8 An internal station call to a station set for CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER OUTSIDE will follow the restriction class of the station set CALL FORWARDING When CALL FORWARDING to outside is executed an object of the billing is as follows Station set Call Forwarding Billing Object Single Line Telephone Dterm Station set Call Forwarding Virtual station Originating station trunk ...

Page 862: ...eceive Dial Tone 2 Dial CALL FORWARDING I M HERE from a transfer destination station feature code receive Special Dial Tone 3 Dial the source station number receive Service Set Tone To cancel from the destination 1 Lift handset receive Dial Tone 2 Dial CALL FORWARDING I M HERE from a transfer destination station feature code receive Special Dial Tone 3 Enter source station number receive Service S...

Page 863: ...This feature requires Digital Announcement Trunk DAT circuits of MP card or 2DAT 4DAT card MP card includes 2DAT circuits and 2DAT 4DAT card provides 2 4 DAT circuits 2 Plural calls at a time may be connected to each DAT If a second call should arrive while the first is being processed the caller will receive the announcement half way 3 This feature is only available on DID and Tie Line calls 4 Th...

Page 864: ...This service feature allows a target station user to ring another station which has set CALL FOR WARDING ALL CALLS to it STATION APPLICATION All stations OPERATING PROCEDURE No manual operation is required SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 This service feature is allowed to all stations and the Attendant Console ...

Page 865: ... T ANSWER Dterm SPLIT CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS SPLIT CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE SPLIT CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS OUTSIDE CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE OUTSIDE CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER OUTSIDE STATION APPLICATION All stations OPERATING PROCEDURE For the operating procedure of the CALL FORWARDING SET RESET BY MAT CAT refer to the CME6 in the Command Manual SERVICE CONDITI...

Page 866: ...the hookswitch receive Special Dial Tone 2 Dial CALL HOLD code new call is now held 3 Original call is automatically returned Note By repeating the above steps station users can converse alternately with two parties SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Lines freed through use of this feature may also be used for answering incoming calls via the CALL PICKUP GROUP or TRUNK ANSWER FROM ANY STATION features 2 If the ...

Page 867: ...CONT D SERVICE CONDITIONS CONT D 6 There are 128 stations per the system which may simultaneously use this feature 7 When a station has a CAMP ON Call flashing the switchhook and dialling the CALL HOLD feature results in the station connecting to the camped on party ...

Page 868: ... new call and return to original call 1 Go on hook releasing new call 2 Original call rings back to Dterm To hold a new call and return to original call 1 Depress Transfer key receive Special Dial Tone 2 Dial CALL HOLD code new call is now held original call is automatically returned Note By repeating the above steps Dterm users may alternately converse with two parties A feature line key may be p...

Page 869: ...sible light on corner of the terminal flashes This feature helps assure that stations won t miss important calls STATION APPLICATION All Dterms OPERATING PROCEDURE No manual operation is required SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 It is required to specify whether call termination is indicated on the CALL INDICATOR LAMP or not on each line key ...

Page 870: ...ess DET key d Dial the station number e Depress SET key 2 Confirm whether the call records are printed out normally or not 3 Clear the call records by the Audit Report without printout a Depress CR key b Depress DET key c Dial the station number d Depress RESET key When printing out the call records on group basis 1 Print out the call records by the Interim Printout a Depress PRT key b Depress CR ...

Page 871: ...feature Maximum 8 Dterms can be used as control terminal 2 The maximum number of Call Information records a AP without expansion memory card standard Max 1 000 calls per system b AP with expansion memory card optional Max 27 000 calls per system 3 A maximum number of stations can be used up to 512 stations 4 The system can support the following charging method a Metering Pulse b H Method c K Metho...

Page 872: ...s held on CALL PARK key To retrieve a parked call 1 Depress CALL PARK key the parked call is reconnected SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 A maximum of 8 CALL PARK keys can be assigned 2 CALL PARK keys on the Dterms within the same one tenant are all connected in multiple For example if a trunk call is held on No 1 CALL PARK key of a Dterm belonging to a certain tenant Call Hold is indicated on No 1 CALL PARK ...

Page 873: ... PARK No is displayed 5 Replace the handset OR 1 Press the CALL PARK SYSTEM key receive Service Set Tone 2 Replace the handset From an Attendant Console 1 Dial the CALL PARK code DERSK CONSOLE or press the CALL PARK SYSTEM key SMART CONSOLE receive Service Set Tone 2 The trunk party receives Hold Tone 3 The CALL PARK No is displayed 4 Press RELEASE key From a Dterm without an LCD and from a Single...

Page 874: ...K No on which the call is parked Park No 00 to 19 4 The parked call is reconnected to the retrieving line SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 A maximum of 20 calls can be parked within a system at a time 2 Any internal or external call can be placed into CALL PARK SYSTEM 3 If a parked call remains unanswered for 60 seconds the station that has activated the CALL PARK is recalled 4 The CALL PARK SYSTEM key is ava...

Page 875: ...m a Single Line Telephone 1 Momentarily the hookswitch receive Special Dial Tone 2 Dial CALL PARK code No tone 3 Dial PARK No 1 8 receive Service Set Tone If PARK No is busy receive Busy Tone 4 Replace handset To retrieve a parked call 1 Lift handset receive Dial Tone 2 Dial CALL PARK retrival code receive Special Dial Tone 3 Dial PARK No which parked the call parked call is then reconnected SERVI...

Page 876: ...tion of an incoming call to another station a station user answering sta tion lifts the handset of the self station set and receives Dial Tone 2 The answering station user dials the special code for CALL PICKUP DESIGNATED GROUP and then dials a station number within the Call Pickup Group to which the called station belongs 3 The answering station user talks with the caller SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Thi...

Page 877: ...n SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 This feature is provided on a per line basis based on the station CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVID UAL 2 A station in a fully restricted class cannot answer a central office call using CALL PICKUP DIRECT 3 If the ringing call is a result of CALL BACK OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUEING recall it cannot be picked up by any station 4 This feature can be accessed from the Attendant Console 5 A bus...

Page 878: ...UAL will be unable to answer incoming Central Office calls using this feature 3 A CALL PICKUP GROUP is defined as those stations having the ability to pickup one another s calls utilizing the CALL PICKUP feature 4 An individual station may be assigned to only one group 5 A maximum of 60 stations may be assigned per group There is no limit to the number of groups per system 6 If the CALL PICKUP cod...

Page 879: ...tation within pickup group rings 2 Lift handset receive Dial Tone 3 Depress CALL PICKUP key call is connected to your station The LCD displays PICK xxxx yyyy where xxxx is Called Station and yyyy is Calling Station or Trunk To answer an incoming call CONSULTATION HOLD 1 Station within pickup group rings 2 Depress Transfer key receive Special Dial Tone OR Depress CALL HOLD key receive Dial Tone 3 D...

Page 880: ...OLE SMART CONSOLE OPERATING PROCEDURE No manual operation is required SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Each Attendant Console is provided with 6 dedicated switched loop keys Each loop key is associated with an LED to display the status of the call on that loop The indicators may be on off or flashing and green or red 2 When the ATTENDANT LOOP RELEASE feature is activated the status of the call is removed from...

Page 881: ...e indicated key 3 Automatic Call Distribution is not used in multi console operation All incoming call indications appear at each console so that the call can be answered by any console See MULTIPLE CONSOLE OPERATION and INCOMING CALL IDENTIFICATION 4 If an incoming call has been answered simultaneously by more than one Attendant only the Attendant that operated the answer key first will be connec...

Page 882: ... Dterm comes into CRD Call Redirect mode for six seconds the CRD key lamp lights 2 While the CRD mode while the CRD key lamp lights press the line key of the incoming held call The call is transferred to the pre assigned destination station and the CID key lamp goes out SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 A maximum of 8 Dterms can operate the CALL REDIRECT simultaneously per system including the terminal which i...

Page 883: ...trunk access key and the destination is on UCD queue When the call is terminating to or held on a trunk access key and the destination is setting CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS OUTSIDE BUSY LINE OUTSIDE 7 A call which is set EXCLUSIVE HOLD by the other station cannot be transferred by the CRD key 8 A voice call and a call from an Attendant Console cannot be transferred by the CRD key 9 The system regar...

Page 884: ...ounce transfer while keeping the first party in a CON SULTATION HOLD ALL CALLS condition When the station user hangs up the first and third parties will be automatically connected SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 The station performing the CALL TRANSFER can drop off the connection before the called party answers If the called station does not answer within the predetermined time ring signal is returned to the...

Page 885: ...ttendant assistance STATION APPLICATION All Dterms OPERATING PROCEDURE To transfer a call in progress 1 While connected with the first party depress Transfer key receive Special Dial Tone 2 Dial third party receive Ringback Tone 3 At this point the station user can either wait and announce the call or hang up before the transfer is completed SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Refer to CALL TRANSFER ALL CALLS ...

Page 886: ... O trunk call SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 This feature is available for incoming and outgoing C O trunk calls and Station to Station calls 2 When Attendant Console is in the Night mode the transferring station will receive Reorder Tone 3 CALL TRANSFER ATTENDANT feature allows a station user while participating in a two party connection a two party connection can be comprised of two stations or a station ...

Page 887: ...y STATION APPLICATION All Dterms OPERATION PROCEDURE CAMP ON or CALL WAITING to a busy Dterm is activated 1 Station user hears Call Waiting Tone during a call in progress 2 The user depresses Answer key and is connected to the waiting call 3 To return to the original call the Dterm user depresses the Answer key once again SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Service conditions are essentially the same as those of...

Page 888: ...anged by system data The number of waiting calls 1 to 96 calls will display next to CW on the LCD 3 When multiple consoles are installed and tenant service is provided the CALL WAITING DISPLAY will show on all consoles assigned to the same tenant group 4 The following types of unanswered incoming calls to an Attendant Console are counted as calls wait ing LDN Listed Directory Number LDN Calls ATND...

Page 889: ...momentarily depress the hookswitch or Answer key can be used to return to the original call and second call will be held OR 1 CALL WAITING tone is heard during call in progress 2 Called station hangs up priority ringing is sent 3 Lift handset to answer SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Once CALL WAITING STATION is activated to a given station other stations attempting CALL WAITING STATION to this station will ...

Page 890: ... called station is connected to the Attendant Console 9 CALL WAITING STATION cannot be used in conjunction with DIAL ACCESS TO ATTENDANT 10 If a station has set CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS a call will wait at the target station 11 CALL WAITING at the called station can be restricted by CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL In this case the calling station receives Busy Tone and can set CALL BACK 12 STATION HU...

Page 891: ...the CALL WAITING by using the CALL HOLD feature or by dis connecting from the original call in which case the CALL WAITING will automatically ring the called station SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 ATTENDANT CAMP ON and CALL HOLD must be allowed in CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVID UAL programming to activate CALL WAITING TERMINATING 2 The CALL WAITING features are limited to one call waiting per line When the CALL W...

Page 892: ...effective when a DID call has been routed to an Attendant as a result of CALL FOR WARDING ALL CALLS CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER or CALL FORWARDING INTERCEPT ANNOUNCEMENT and the operator has answered that call 2 If the operator depresses the SRC key while the called station number is displayed the operator can transfer the call to a desired station by keying the destinat...

Page 893: ...ess Speaker key dial desired station 2 The LCD display indicates the status of the called station SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 If the called station is idle the display flashes its number until the call is answered 2 If the called station is busy the LCD displays BUSY xxxx where xxxx is Called Station 3 If the called station is in DO NOT DISTURB the LCD displays DND xxxx where xxxx is Called Station 4 If ...

Page 894: ...calling party s information of the incoming held call for more six seconds If the line key which is pressed while CID mode has no incoming held call CID mode is cancelled 3 When the CID key is pressed again in CID mode the CID key lamp goes out and CID mode is can celled 4 When the CID key is pressed during conversation the LCD displays the calling party s information of the incoming held call for...

Page 895: ...ALL WAITING CAMP ON call information set to the call in progress on the Dterm b Incoming held call information in order of the line key number younger to older number 5 When a call is transferred by CONSULTATION HOLD the display shows the following information a Before the transfer operation finishes the LCD displays the information of the station which holds the call b After the transfer operatio...

Page 896: ...g call to appear on the Dterm s LCD display This display will flash while the call is ringing then remain steady when the call is answered STATION APPLICATION All Dterms with an LCD OPERATING PROCEDURE No manual operation is required SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 When a call terminates on a line other than the My Line the LCD displays the incoming station deter mined by LINE PRESELECTION ...

Page 897: ...code for CHOICE OF NIGHT SERVICE 3 Dial 0 4 Dial 0 1 XXX Day Night Trunk No 5 Depress ANSWER key Display XXX XX Trunk No Existing Data of incoming C O terminating method 6 Dial XX XXX incoming C O Trunk No terminating method code Note 7 Depress START key 8 With the same operation from 4 performed it can be continuously changed every Trunk Number To change incoming C O terminating method from SMART...

Page 898: ...NS 1 Incoming C O terminating method can be changed every one C O Trunk 2 Changing incoming C O terminating method is only valid when Attendant Console is idle If an incoming C O call appears on Attendant Console while changing incoming C O terminating method the incoming C O call is being queued on Call Waiting 3 It is not possible to change incoming C O terminating method from plural Attendant C...

Page 899: ...ction Class c Group 3 Service Feature Class 2 Telephone Class Group 1 determines the type of terminal and the signalling arrangement necessary A maximum of 4 classes are available 3 Trunk Route Restriction Class Group 2 provides 8 groups separate restriction patterns for each group are programmed in system data 4 16 types of Service Feature Classes Group 3 are available for access to the following...

Page 900: ...NT D SERVICE CONDITIONS CONT D 5 Telephone Class Trunk Route Restriction Class and Service Feature Class are independent with no interaction between them 6 Trunk Route Restriction Class Group 2 can be overriden by a new trunk Route Restriction Class using the AUTHORIZATION CODE feature ...

Page 901: ...e 3 Dial code number for unit desired SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Amplifiers speakers and CODE CALLING units must be provided by the customer 2 Loop Start Central Office trunks are used for interfacing CODE CALLING equipment 3 External equipment control relay card PN DK00 or built in DK00 in MP is required when it is neces sary to control power on and off of external equipment 4 The calling station s num...

Page 902: ...o trunk data if no LDN redirection destination is provided SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 A maximum of seven LDNs can be specified for common route indial These LDNs cannot be sepa rated on the basis of tie route and indial route 2 If no destination is specified or if an invalid destination is used then the call will act as if the facility was not available and divert according to trunk data 3 Calls redirec...

Page 903: ...ports on time slot allocations STATION APPLICATION Not applicable OPERATING PROCEDURE Refer to the Comand Manual and MATWorX User s Guide SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 To understand the meaning of information displayed on the MAT screen or printed out press the MAT function key F1 and a help message will display on the MAT screen 2 The total number of LEN numbers that can be displayed at one time for list ...

Page 904: ...on Example STATION APPLICATION All stations OPERATING PROCEDURE 1 Lift handset includes Speaker key operation on Dterm Dial Tone is heard 2 Dial the access code for SPEED CALLING SYSTEM STATION 3 Dial the abbreviated code by system 4 Dial the remaining digits of the number SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 This service is available with SPEED CALLING SYSTEM STATION 2 This service can be used if the calling sta...

Page 905: ...TATION HOLD state has been entered To return to original call 1 In any of the following cases the calling station can return to the original call by depressing the switchhook a Second station is busy b Calling station cannot gain access to second station due to restriction or any other reason c Second station does not answer 2 If the second party hangs up the calling station will automatically be ...

Page 906: ...Tone 4 Second station answers CONSULTATION HOLD state has been entered To return to original call from a Dterm 1 In any of the following cases the calling station can return to the original call by depressing the Transfer key a Second station is busy b Calling station cannot gain access to second station due to restriction or any other reason c Second station does not answer 2 If the second statio...

Page 907: ...to CAT mode 2 The number of Dterms which can be concurrently set to CAT mode for handling the office data is lim ited to max two sets 3 The CAT can be operated only while the PBX is on line status 4 Two commands CM00 Office Data All Clear and CM01 Office Data Partial Clear cannot be used on the CAT 5 When starting up the system only by the CAT without MAT the CAT should be made valid first by star...

Page 908: ...ed 3 This feature will be activated by system data programming See CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVID UAL 4 The DATA LINE SECURITY feature functions on originating and terminating calls 5 The DATA LINE SECURITY cannot prevent disruptions from interfering with data transmission when the disruption occurs outside the system 6 The following connections are restricted when DATA LINE SECURITY is active since tra...

Page 909: ... NIGHT key again restores normal CLASS OF SERVICE From SMART CONSOLE To change DAY to NIGHT mode 1 Dial the MODE feature access code or depress the MODE key and the associated red LED lights The LCD displays DAY for day mode and the LED of the DAY key lights green 2 Depress the NIGHT key and the associated LED lights red The LCD changes from DAY to NIGHT 3 Depress the ANS key and receive Service S...

Page 910: ...ERVICE may be assigned on a per station basis 2 DAY NIGHT CLASS OF SERVICE may be assigned to different trunk restriction classes 3 Refer to CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL for further details 4 DAY NIGHT CLASS OF SERVICE may not be assigned to different service restriction classes 5 This feature can be activated by a master Attendant ...

Page 911: ...epress the assigned feature key 3 Receive Service Set Tone 4 Restore the handset or depress Speaker key SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 This feature is assigned in the station s CLASS OF SERVICE 2 This feature is only available for the tenant without a master Attendant Console 3 On a system basis incoming trunk destination and trunk restriction class can be changed depending upon programming when the tenant ...

Page 912: ...ing a function key the associated LED will be lit when the tenant changes to NIGHT mode e In case of power failure or the system is initialized the DAY NIGHT mode will be kept as before f This feature is also available for a DSS CONSOLE g When setting from a Dterm with an LCD the following is displayed DAY NIGHT MODE CHANGES DAY NIGHT MODE STATUS DISPLAY ON Dterm For Incoming Trunk For C O S Incom...

Page 913: ...ual operation is required SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 One Digital Announcement Trunk DAT card is required per each UCD Group MP card includes 2DAT circuit and 2DAT 4DAT card provides 2 4 DAT circuits 2 After delayed announcement ends the incoming call is placed in MUSIC ON HOLD 3 When a UCD station becomes available to answer the incoming call is connected immediately even when the announcement is being ...

Page 914: ... end of announce 6 The destination for delay overflow may be set to any station or Attendant Console If the destination for delay overflow is an agent in the same UCD group or has set CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS OUTSIDE or DO NOT DISTURB the call will stay in queue and hear the DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT repeated until the call is answered 7 When the destination of delay overflow is a busy station which is ...

Page 915: ...eceives Reorder Tone 3 Station user replaces the handset onto the switchhook and waits for recall from Attendant 4 Attendant depresses the LOOP Key a Dial the C O code b Dial the desired central office number c Announce the call when the party answers 5 Attendant depresses START key and dial the station user s number 6 Station user answers the call 7 Attendant depresses RELEASE key Then station us...

Page 916: ...earance STATION APPLICATION All Dterms OPERATING PROCEDURE No manual operation is required SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 DELAYED RINGING is assigned in system programming on a per line key basis 2 The timing of call termination to the start of DELAYED RINGING is programmable in system data by increments of 2 seconds to a maximum of 40 seconds default value 10 seconds 3 When DELAYED RINGING and CALL FORWARD...

Page 917: ...TION All stations OPERATING PROCEDURE To access Attendant 1 Station user dials operator call code receive Ringback Tone 2 The ATND key lamp for INCOMING CALL IDENTIFICATION flashes Attendant answers call SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 All stations including fully restricted stations can originate a call to the Attendant 2 If TENANT SERVICE is provided each tenant group may access their own Attendant via the...

Page 918: ...and originate a call by SPEED CALLING STATION 1 From idle status press STA key on SOFT KEY 2 Enter a name by keypad 3 Press UP or DOWN key on SOFT KEY 4 The name and its telephone number are shown on the LCD 5 Press UP or DOWN key to find a required name and telephone number 6 After find the desired name and number press Line Trunk key or go off hook to originate a call To register a name and numb...

Page 919: ... this feature is ended and Line Trunk Answer key is activated h When the Dterm is in this service pressing the Recall Transfer and Conf key are not effective i Up to eight Dterms can use Help key at the same time j The explanation displayed by Help key will be automatically cleared unless Exit key is pressed for 16 to 20 seconds 2 Character Registration a Following table shows a how to record the ...

Page 920: ...When the new name and number is recorded the system automatically search the vacant memory block after pressing Feature key e In the name and number registration operation if both name and number are not registered in speed calling memory block the LCD show as follows 4 Search a Up to four characters are used as a key word when the number is searched by name b If the Dterm user enters character ex...

Page 921: ...n the user originates call pressing Line key or Speaker key or going off hook trunk access code regis tered can be processed and appropriate trunk is selected c When the user originates call after searching the number is registered into the STACK DIAL and SAVE AND REPEAT 6 Name Indication a A name is displayed on Dterm when a call is originated by SPEED CALLING SYSTEM with the following operation ...

Page 922: ... key and One Touch Button f When outgoing call encountered all trunk busy status and ROUTE ADVANCE CM71 72 is acti vated the name is displayed on the LCD g A name is displayed when Dterm user originates a call with HOT LINE The Name Display Guest Name are prior to name registered by this feature in a station to station call made by SPEED CALLING ONE TOUCH h A name is displayed for about 6 seconds ...

Page 923: ... ringing to voice announce or vice versa 4 For ringing call the called party must lift the handset and depress the flashing DIAL INTERCOM key SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 A maximum of 25 DIAL INTERCOM groups are available per system A maximum of 10 Dterm ter minals are available per DIAL INTERCOM group 2 A Dterm can have more than one DIAL INTERCOM appearance 3 Each DIAL INTERCOM provides a single voice p...

Page 924: ...n the LCD SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 The digits appear on the LCD from the right and move to the left as more digits are dialed A maxi mum of 20 digits can be displayed When the 21st digit is dialed the first digit leaves the display from the far left and the 21st digit appears on the display at the far right This process continues until all dig its have been dialed 2 On the Dterm digits also appear on ...

Page 925: ...e Line calls respectively The company name can be assigned per trunk route basis 4 The company name can be assigned by character code from the CUSTOMER ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL CAT or MAINTENANCE ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL MAT 5 While the company name is displayed the Attendant can transfer the call to a desired station by keying the destination number on the keypad In this case the company name of th...

Page 926: ...OCEDURE To access DICTATION equipment 1 Dial DICTATION ACCESS code 2 Proceed according to DICTATION instructions provided by your organization SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 One trunk circuit is required for each DICTATION ACCESS 2 DICTATION equipment must be equipped to receive pushbutton tone signals if dial control is desired 3 DICTATION equipment must be customer provided 4 DICTATION trunk can be used w...

Page 927: ...When this feature is activated by or for the called station the terminating station number is indicated on the digital display rather than the called station number when the Attendant extends a call 3 STATION HUNTING When this feature is applied due to the called station being busy and the station being in a hunt group the terminating station number is indicated on the digital display rather than ...

Page 928: ...ONDITIONS 1 By depressing the LOOP Key of a call which is in ATTENDANT CAMP ON mode and using the DEST key the Attendant can determine both trunk and station number onto which the call is camped 2 The Trunk Group number and Trunk code are displayed on the top line of LCD during an Attendant to Trunk connection 3 A DIGITAL DISPLAY will occur automatically whenever a call is answered or originated b...

Page 929: ...hase Lock Oscillator for network synchronization Clocks from the Source Oscillator or Digital Trunk Interface DTI should be connected to inputs in each PLO 5 The DTI provides signaling interface bipolar unipolar conversion frame synchronization insertion extraction and alarm detection 6 The DTI can be provided with circuit cards to interface with digital link and or ITU T standard net works 7 The ...

Page 930: ...when DIRECT IN service is desired on an extensive or system wide basis 4 This feature is also frequently referred to as INDIAL service 5 Not all telephone company central offices are capable of providing this service 6 If the called station is non existent the DID call is automatically routed to the Attendant or another predesignated station 7 Immediate Start This method is used when the serving C...

Page 931: ...e digit to four digits 14 When digit conversion of DID incoming LDN has been activated number before conversion which received from C O is displayed 15 A DID incoming LDN is converted to a PBX station number by analyzing the upper two four digits of DID incoming LDN A maximum of 10 000 DID incoming LDN can be converted to a maximum of 500 PBX station numbers 16 A tenant can be assigned per DID inc...

Page 932: ...s Tie C O etc can be directly accessed by stations using this feature 4 The trunk group access code is limited to a maximum of three digits 5 Use of the DOD feature can be denied on a per trunk group basis when the following restrictions are active on the originating station line a Fully Restricted Station DIRECT OUTWARD DIALLING attempts are routed to Reorder Tone when the station is fully restri...

Page 933: ...FF Set Cancel Status STATION APPLICATION All Dterms OPERATING PROCEDURE To initiate a call 1 Press the desired DSS key 2 Lift the handset and converse when the party answers OR 1 Lift the handset and receive Dial Tone 2 Press the desired DSS key 3 Converse when the party answers To display LINE LOCKOUT status 1 No manual operation is required When stations are currently in LINE LOCKOUT mode their ...

Page 934: ...re effective for only the first 48 DSS keys key no 00 to 47 which have two 2 LEDs red and green in each key DSS busy status indication and LINE LOCK OUT status indication are effective for all 60 keys on the DSS CONSOLE 8 When the following operations from the DSS CONSOLE are used the Function Mode key must be assigned to one of 60 DSS keys MESSAGE WAITING Set Cancel using MW key DO NOT DISTURB Se...

Page 935: ...STRIBUTION Features and Specifications for more details DO NOT DISTURB CONSOLE GENERAL DESCRIPTION This feature allows a DSS CONSOLE associated with a Dterm to be used as a DO NOT DISTURB DND CONSOLE This feature is activated by the use of a Function Mode key on a DSS CONSOLE DND set status for each station is indicated by a green LED associated with each key In addition the Dterm user can set can...

Page 936: ...f a Function Mode key on a DSS CONSOLE The MESSAGE WAITING status for each station is indicated by a green LED associated with each key In addition the Dterm user can set reset MW status using the MW CONSOLE STATION APPLICATION All stations with a DSS CONSOLE OPERATING PROCEDURE To set and cancel MESSAGE WAITING 1 Depress the MW key When stations are currently in MW their associated LED will light...

Page 937: ...key When stations are currently in RC their associated LED will light green 2 Depress the Function Mode key an LED associated with the Function Mode key will light red 3 Depress the desired DSS key s to set or cancel A lit LED indicates RC has been set 4 Depress the RC key again to return to the DSS mode if desired SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 The ROOM CUTOFF Console only displays cancels the set status f...

Page 938: ...ailed to answer their wake up call their associated LED flashes green at 30 ipm 2 Depress the Function Mode key an LED associated with the Function Mode key will light red 3 Depress the flashing DSS key s to turn out the desired station s LED 4 Depress the WU key again to return to the DSS mode if desired SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 The WAKE UP NO ANSWER CONSOLE is only used to display cancel the No Answ...

Page 939: ... becomes idle or forwarded to an Attendant or TAS 4 If there is no answer at a station the calling party will continuously receive Ringback Tone or the call ing party will be transferred to Attendant or TAS 5 Once a call is answered it can be processed by the called station in the same way as any normal trunk call 6 If the station is assigned to a STATION HUNTING group or UCD group the incoming ca...

Page 940: ...r Incoming External Calls 0 4 sec ring 0 2 sec silence 0 4 sec ring 2 0 sec ring 3 Ringing pattern for CALL BACK 0 2 sec ring OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUEING 0 2 sec silence CAMP ON and CALL WAITING STATION 0 2 sec ring 0 2 sec silence 0 2 sec ring 2 0 sec silence 4 All recalls to Dterm 0 5 sec ring 0 5 sec silence 0 5 sec ring 0 5 sec silence 5 The ringing pattern for incoming internal calls is programma...

Page 941: ... including recall 11 The lamp indication patterns are as follows a Incoming Internal Calls red 120 IPM flashing b Incoming External Calls green or red 120 IPM flashing The lamp colour for incoming external call can be selected from green or red on a per trunk route basis 12 The lamp colour of transferred incoming external calls depends on the system data assignment 13 If the system is installed be...

Page 942: ...nd cable length of the Dterm are as follows Type of Terminal Interface Card Cable Length Dterm 65 75 Series 2 wire PN 4DLCM 8DLCL Max 300 m 8 Line Key Standard Line Max 200 m 16 Line Key Max 150 m 24 Line Key PN 2DLCB Max 850 m All Type of Long Line Dterm 65 75 Note 1 The above cable length is based on the following conditions Diameter of the cable is 0 5 mili meters Protection arrester is not ins...

Page 943: ...urn to the orig inal conversation STATION APPLICATION All Dterms OPERATING PROCEDURE To set DUAL HOLD 1 A station is on a call with another station 2 One station depresses Hold key other station receives MUSIC ON HOLD 3 Second station depresses Hold key DUAL HOLD condition To return to a station to station connection 1 Two stations in DUAL HOLD condition 2 Either station presses their line key and...

Page 944: ...hand by pressing a ten key of Dterm without pressing Speaker key or going off hook STATION APPLICATION All Dterms OPERATING PROCEDURE Dial the desired station number by pressing ten key without pressing Speaker key or going off hook SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 An extension must be set as a Prime Line 2 This feature is not available when the Prime Line is busy ...

Page 945: ... of 9 hours 59 minutes and 59 seconds After that time the clock returns to zero 3 A continuous time display will occur during CONSULTATION HOLD ALL CALLS THREE WAY CALLING EXCLUSIVE HOLD Dterm and NON EXCLUSIVE HOLD Dterm 4 When a call is transferred the time display of the party receiving the transfer begins from zero 5 When the Dterm returns to the original call from CALL TRANSFER ALL CALLS or C...

Page 946: ... from any line appearing on a Dterm 2 After EXCLUSIVE HOLD has been set the user can make or answer calls from any other line appear ing on the Dterm 3 Only the Dterm that sets EXCLUSIVE HOLD may retrieve the held call 4 After a variable programmable period of time the held call will be automatically recalled regardless of the status of the Dterm 5 The LCD of other Dterm on which the held line app...

Page 947: ...n assigned as VIP class goes off hook 2 The station dials another station 3 If the called station is busy three tone bursts will be sent to the called party to indicate there is a call waiting The called party can now hang up and answer the EXECUTIVE CALL 4 If the called station is idle a distinctive ring will be sent to the called party to indicate an EXECU TIVE CALL is ringing in SERVICE CONDITI...

Page 948: ...urst tone is transmitted upon activation to alert connected parties that an EXECUTIVE OVER RIDE connection is being made In any of the above instances the calling station will receive Reorder Tone 2 If one party disconnects after the three way bridge is established the remaining two parties will still be connected 3 The EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY access code may be assigned according to customer prefe...

Page 949: ...usy connection after transmitting a warning tone STATION APPLICATION All Dterms OPERATING PROCEDURE 1 Dial busy station receive Busy Tone 2 Depress EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY OVER key LED lights and instrusion tone is trans mitted 3 Calling station is now bridged into a three way conference the LCD displays OVR RIDE xxxx yyyy where xxxx is Interrupted Party and yyyy is Called Party SERVICE CONDITIONS ...

Page 950: ...quipment such as a Fault Display Panel must be installed External alarm indication is provided using a contact to ground at the main distribution frame One contact is needed for minor alarms and one contact is needed for major alarm 4 The following FAULT MESSAGEs are provided System initialized MP FP AP communication failure FP AP board down turned back to normal condition DTI line failure turned ...

Page 951: ...rs and facsimile call station numbers that can be assigned varies with each of the following cases a When HOT LINEs are used to implement this feature a maximum of 100 facsimile stations can be assigned In addition a maximum of 100 facsimile call stations can be assigned b When HOUSE PHONE groups are used to implement this feature a maximum of four facsimile stations can be assigned In addition th...

Page 952: ...ll numbers can be assigned to a flexible line key of any one specific Dterm set 6 When a new call terminates while the facsimile incoming call lamp is lit the lamp indication changes to 120 ipm flash 7 The chime which signals starting reception of a facsimile message beeps even if the Dterm is busy unless the speaker is in use at that time ...

Page 953: ... feature is set cancelled for the Sub Line concerned a AGENT BUSY OUT UCD b CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS c CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE d CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER e CALL PICKUP GROUP f RETURN SCHEDULE Dterm 2 After a call has been originated from a Sub Line CALL BACK or OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUEING Note service can be set from that Sub Line In this case the My Line of the station that set the fea ture wi...

Page 954: ...ATION DESK CONSOLE SMART CONSOLE OPERATING PROCEDURE 1 Depress the FLASH OVER TRUNK FOT key 2 Dial the required feature access code SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 This feature is assigned on a per trunk route basis 2 The width of the transmitted PB signal can be selected per trunk route as one of a fixed at 64 msec b fixed at 128 msec 3 The duration of the hook flash signal can be assigned by system data fr...

Page 955: ...stant PABX STATION APPLICATION All Dterms OPERATING PROCEDURE 1 Press the Recall key 2 Dial the required feature access code SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 This feature is assigned on a per trunk route basis 2 The width of the transmitted PB signal can be selected as one of a fixed at 64 msec b fixed at 128 msec 3 The duration of hook flash signal can be assigned by system data from 64 msec to 1920 msec wit...

Page 956: ...ATING PROCEDURE Refer to the Command Manual SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Careful consideration should be given to any numbering assignment especially in larger systems to avoid needless loss of access codes or duplication of station numbers 2 Where TENANT SERVICE is provided station numbers may not be duplicated between tenants 3 A combination of one two three and four digit numbering may be used Example ...

Page 957: ...terms OPERATING PROCEDURE No manual operation is required once RINGING ASSIGNMENT has been programmed in system data SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Recall ringing supersedes all ringing possibilities and will ring regardless of other programming 2 Incoming C O ringing supersedes internal calls and will interrupt internal call ringing while it is in progress 3 Recall ringing C O ringing and Internal Call rin...

Page 958: ... ACCOUNT CODE Limitations a In the case of a system with AP01 card Number of digits 1 digit 10 digits If Check Code is provided limited to 8 digits The same number of digits must be assigned to AUTHORIZATION CODE and FORCED ACCOUNT CODE Number of codes Up to 1 000 codes combined with AUTHORIZATION CODE and REMOTE ACCESS CODE b In the case of a system without AP01 card Number of digits 1 digit 8 di...

Page 959: ...red SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 In the case the CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER feature is provided for the predesignated station within a GROUP DIVERSION this feature becomes effective and GROUP DIVERSION fea ture becomes ineffective 2 In case the destination station of GROUP DIVERSION is busy GROUP DIVERSION feature becomes ineffective 3 Attendant Console cannot be assigned as the destination of GROUP DIV...

Page 960: ... on the hand set STATION APPLICATION All Dterms OPERATING PROCEDURE To monitor a call 1 Talk with a station trunk by handset 2 Depress Speaker key associated LED lights 3 Continue conversation on handset 4 To return to private conversation depress the Speaker key again SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 This feature is applicable for both internal and external calls 2 Monitoring volume may be adjusted using the...

Page 961: ... allows the Dterm user to respond to a VOICE CALL without lifting the handset STATION APPLICATION All Dterms OPERATING PROCEDURE To answer a VOICE CALL 1 Depress MIC key LED lights 2 Respond to call HANDS FREE SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 HANDS FREE ANSWER BACK may only be utilized when responding to a VOICE CALL on My Line ...

Page 962: ...ate a call 1 Depress Speaker key receive Dial Tone 2 Dial the desired number 3 When called party answers lift the handset To monitor a call 1 Depress Speaker key and replace the handset 2 When call resumes lift handset SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 This feature may be used for both internal and external calls 2 Volume may be adjusted using the speaker volume control on Dterm 3 To take to the called party t...

Page 963: ...NE call to another station 2 There is 100 station 50 pair HOT LINE stations 3 HOT LINE assignments are programmed into system data via the MAINTENANCE ADMINISTRA TION TERMINAL MAT and CUSTOMER ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL CAT 4 The HOT LINE station will hear the Reorder Tone when the called station is in the following condi tions a Busy b Lock out c Make Busy 5 When the station called from the HOT LINE...

Page 964: ...onversation proceeds SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 The destination parties for this service use abbreviated call codes prepared in SPEED CALLING SYSTEM Therefore the number of destination stations is limited by the capacity of SPEED CALLING SYSTEM Max 100 stations 2 Outside connection in BROKERAGE HOT LINE service can be realized The LCD indicates a When a station user calls Trunk classification such as DD...

Page 965: ...t connects user to desired station or trunk SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Attendant Console indications will appear as follows a ATND key Lamps flash b Console buzzer sounds 2 The telephone set used with this feature may be equipped with or without dials 3 HOUSE PHONE assignments are programmed into system data via the MAINTENANCE ADMINIS TRATION TERMINAL MAT and CUSTOMER ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL CAT 4 Ther...

Page 966: ... off hook receives Dial Tone 2 If dialing is not initiated after approximately 12 seconds Reorder Tone is applied 3 After 30 seconds of Reorder Tone the station receives no tone 4 After 30 seconds of no tone the station receives HOWLER TONE 5 Upon going on hook the station is released from the HOWLER TONE receiving state and service returns to normal SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 HOWLER TONE is repeated at...

Page 967: ...inctive flash to differentiate between a call the user placed on hold and other calls STATION APPLICATION All Dterms OPERATING PROCEDURE No manual operation is required SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 When the Dterm user places a call on hold the associated green LED lamp on the line key becomes flashing 0 125 sec on 0 125 sec off 0 125 sec on 0 625 sec off ...

Page 968: ...vides the Dterm user with a unique LED indication to display the particular line the user is on STATION APPLICATION All Dterms OPERATING PROCEDURE No manual operation is required SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 The Dterm provides a green LED lit steady at the line key currently being used by that Dterm sec on Steady green off ...

Page 969: ...y upon establishment of connections STATION APPLICATION All stations OPERATING PROCEDURE No manual operation is required SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Ringing is applied to a called station as soon as the switch has determined that station to be idle There is no delay caused by waiting for a ring cycle 2 This feature can be denied using CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL ...

Page 970: ...ALL IDENTIFICA TION 4 An example of lamp and key assignment is as follows LDN Listed Directory Number Calls ATND Attendant Recall Calls RCL Attendant Recall Calls ICPT Intercept NANS Station No Answer BUSY Call Forwarding Busy TIE Tie Line 5 More than one INCOMING CALL IDENTIFICATION lamp can be lit at one time on the Attendant Console The Attendant can select any incoming call by depressing the a...

Page 971: ...call are connected SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 The Attendant can connect a trunk and Tie Line call either before or after the distant station goes off hook 2 There is no limitation on the number of incoming trunks which may be connected to Tie Lines using this feature 3 Trunk to Trunk connection can be restricted Route to Route restriction assignments 4 AUTOMATIC RECALL is work on incoming C O call to Ti...

Page 972: ...STATION APPLICATION DESK CONSOLE SMART CONSOLE OPERATING PROCEDURE 1 Station user dials feature access code and then Attendant number 2 Directed Attendant gets INCOMING CALL IDENTIFICATION indication and can answer using the normal operating procedure SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Attendant identification number must be published for each Attendant 2 ATTENDANT NIGHT TRANSFER feature cannot be activated for...

Page 973: ...ess from station 1 Lift hand set receive Dial Tone 2 Dial feature access code max 3 digits 3 Dial trunk identification number or C O code number 4 digits 4 If trunk is idle Dial Tone will be received SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 A digital display will appear on the Attendant Console which will consist C O code number 2 If the trunk is busy the Attendant or station will receive Busy Tone 3 The Attendant ca...

Page 974: ...tor B s identification number 3 Call is indicated at Console B on ANS key or TRF key 4 Operator B depresses ANS key or TRF key 5 Operator A converses with Operator B 6 Operator A and B depress RLS keys SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Each console is assigned an identification number to allow INTER POSITION CALLING or TRANS FER 2 An Attendant can receive only one INTER POSITION CALLING or TRANSFER at one time...

Page 975: ...ttendant A depresses RELEASE key to transfer or may consult first then release SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 A designated identification number is assigned to each console for the purpose of INTER POSITION TRANSFER access 2 An Attendant can receive one INTER POSITION TRANSFERRED call at a time An INCOMING CALL IDENTIFICATION key can be designated for receipt of these calls 3 An Attendant cannot transfer a ...

Page 976: ...ing STATION APPLICATION All Dterms with an LCD OPERATING PROCEDURE No manual operation is required SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 For a transferred call the LCD displays FORWARD xxxx yyyy where xxxx is Intermediate Station and yyyy is Calling Station 2 The LCD will display one of the features being used For example PICK CALL PICKUP FORWARD CALL FORWARD 3 The INTERMEDIATE STATION NUMBER DISPLAY will not be d...

Page 977: ...e access code for the desired zone s 3 Page the desired party To answer Meet Me from a Dterm or a Single Line Telephone 1 Lift handset and receive Dial Tone 2 Dial Meet Me Answer feature access code 3 Converse SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 The maximum number of internal paging zones is 8 zone 0 through zone 7 Up to 8 internal zones can be accessed simultaneously by different stations 2 The paging station c...

Page 978: ...AL ZONE PAGING Dterm CONT D SERVICE CONDITIONS CONT D 9 For the following paging a paged station must dial paging station number or Attendant access code to answer without MEET ME ANSWER ZONE PAGING by Attendant Console ALL ZONE PAGING by any station or Attendant ...

Page 979: ... that various operations of the Attendant Console are functioning normally The check is done by a preset procedure STATION APPLICATION DESK CONSOLE SMART CONSOLE OPERATING PROCEDURE Refer to SMART CONSOLE User s Guide and DESK CONSOLE User s Guide SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 If the Attendant Console is placed into LAMP CHECK mode without entering the Night mode all received calls will have RBT sent to th...

Page 980: ... off hook receive Dial Tone 2 Dial the feature access code for LAST NUMBER CALL service 3 The system will automatically redial the last number dialled from that station SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 The maximum number of dial digits to which this service is applicable is 32 2 This service is available for station call outgoing call and Speed Calling services 3 This service has a save area on a per LEN basi...

Page 981: ...utside number they dialed using a feature access key This is useful when the called station is busy or does not answer STATION APPLICATION SMART CONSOLE OPERATING PROCEDURE 1 Press LNR key followed by key 2 The system will redial the last number dialed from that Attendant SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 The maximum number of digits that can be stored for LAST NUMBER CALL is 32 ...

Page 982: ...ure access code 3 The system will redial the last number dialed from that station SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 The maximum number of digits that can be stored for LAST NUMBER CALL is 32 2 Dialing digits after going off hook replaces previously stored digits with the new digits 3 When the STEP CALL feature is used the final destination number is stored in memory 4 Pressing the Redial key when the Dterm is ...

Page 983: ...gits in front of the number dialled by the station user to allow for C O b Delete all digits or up to 8 digits from the number dialled c Allow or deny access to a specific trunk route based on the office code dialled 3 All trunk routes in the system can be accessed via LCR including Tie etc Restriction on outgoing calls and code restriction assignments are followed 4 The following programmable tab...

Page 984: ...able for assigning by time of day whether a route pat tern or tenant pattern table is to be used next in determining the final route to be chosen by the sys tem Entry of time in this table is made using military time and can be assigned to the nearest half hour 00 00 23 30 g Digit Addition Pattern Table Up to 256 tables are available for assigning digit addition pattern Maximum of addition digits ...

Page 985: ... access code Normal Operation No LCR Get LCR code to digit code development pattern Is an LCR code to digit development pattern assigned Reorder Tone Receive next digit Check assignment for a matched pattern Is a match found Is a day of week pattern assigned Check day of week assignment B No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No A ...

Page 986: ...D 91285 001 E DECEMBER 1999 Page 204 Revision 1 0 4 6 LEAST COST ROUTING 3 6 DIGIT CONT D What pattern is assigned Tenant Route Time C D E Yes No A Is a route tenant or time pattern assigned Reorder Tone ...

Page 987: ...priority route Allowed or denied Check trunk restriction table Get next priority route and go to assigned LCR TR table C Reorder Tone ROT Is a route pattern assigned Is a tenant pattern assigned Is a time of day pattern assigned B E Check time of day assignment Reorder Tone ROT None What pattern is assigned Route Tenant Get route pattern to be used Get 1st priority route and go to assigned LCR TR ...

Page 988: ... CONT D Seize a trunk in selected priority trunk route and dial No No No Yes Yes Yes Number of digits to be deleted Deleted digits accordingly Seize a trunk in 1st trunk route Delete all digits F Check digit addition pattern add digits accordingly Is a digit addition pattern assigned ...

Page 989: ...routing can be changed up to 8 times per day based on a prearranged time sched ule STATION APPLICATION All stations OPERATING PROCEDURE 1 Lift handset to receive Dial Tone 2 Dial access code usually 0 receive second Dial Tone 3 Dial area code office code and telephone number 4 System automatically completes the call via the most economical route available SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 A maximum of 8 patter...

Page 990: ... the handset the station is released from the LINE LOCKOUT state and operation returns to normal For LINE LOCKOUT with HOWLER TONE 1 Station user goes off hook and receives Dial Tone 2 If after approximately 12 seconds the station user has not initiated dialling he receives Reorder Tone 3 After 30 seconds of Reorder Tone a HOWLER TONE is sent to the station 4 Upon replacing the handset the station...

Page 991: ...t handset or depress Speaker key hear Dial Tone or answer incoming call OR Procedure 2 1 Depress desired line key hear Dial Tone or Answer incoming call Note One of the above Operating Procedures can be selected on system basis SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 A line key with the associated LED lit steadily cannot be interrupted by depressing its key 2 Once the desired line key is depressed LINE PRESELECTION ...

Page 992: ...another line key without going on hook STATION APPLICATION All Dterms OPERATING PROCEDURE While off hook on original line Depress a line key that is either idle or ringing or on hold user is disconnected from original line and connected to new line SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 LINE RECONNECT OTHER LINE cannot be utilized with a line currently in use LED lit steadily ...

Page 993: ...me line without going on hook STATION APPLICATION All Dterms OPERATING PROCEDURE To receive a Dial Tone while a call is in progress 1 Depress My Line or Recall key receive Dial Tone on the same line 2 User can dial again SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Conflicting service features are CALL TRANSFER ALL CALLS CONSULATION HOLD ALL CALLS and CALL HOLD Depressing My Line will result in reconnection to the held l...

Page 994: ...red an LDN call terminated to the Attendant Con sole 2 If the operator depresses the SRC key while the LDN is displayed the display changes to the calling party s RT TRK number In this case the LDN of the call being handled at present cannot be dis played again 3 While the LDN is displayed the operator can transfer the call to a desired station by keying the desti nation number on the key pad In t...

Page 995: ...g limit of the standard line circuit STATION APPLICATION Single Line Telephone OPERATING PROCEDURE No manual operation is required SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 The maximum loop resistance of the Standard Line Circuit and LONG LINE CIRCUIT is as follows a Standard Line Circuit Max 600 ohms including telephone set b LONG LINE CIRCUIT Max 2 500 ohms including telephone set 2 A PN AUCA card provides 2 LONG LI...

Page 996: ...ither directly or remotely Remote connection is available via either an internal modem on the MP card or an external modem Remote connection via the inter nal modem is through the COT card Connection between the modem and the COT is accomplished through internal switching of the TDSW Remote connection via an external modem is through the MP card 4 The following functions can be performed from the ...

Page 997: ...The MAT can make backup disks of office data 8 The following changes cannot be made without initialization a Addition of a Port Interface Module PIM b Addition of any AP Application Processors including the following AP00 STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING HOTEL MODEL package AP01 AUTHORIZATION CODE expansion package c Addition of Dterm data port 9 The PC used as a MAT must have CD ROM drive for ins...

Page 998: ...rst to be generated 3 If another Dterm user depresses the same MANUAL INTERCOM key a station to station call will be established after lifting the handset SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 A MANUAL INTERCOM group can consist of 2 to 6 Dterms 2 A maximum of 25 MANUAL INTERCOM groups can be assigned per system 3 On a system basis all MANUAL INTERCOM can be assigned as private or non private When a MANUAL INTERCO...

Page 999: ...STEM key 2 Press the PAGING key receive continuous Ringback Tone for 1 second 3 Page the desired party 4 Press RELEASE key To answer 1 The paged party dials the PAGING answer code receives Ringback tone 2 Attendant and paged party converse 3 Attendant presses LOOP key of held outside call 4 Attendant presses RELEASE key to connect both parties To cancel the page 1 Press the PAGING key while paging...

Page 1000: ...Calling station rings Calling station goes off hook and is immediately connected to paged station SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 A maximum of 10 routes can be provided with paging trunks 2 Voice paging equipment is customer provided 3 One paging trunk will be assigned to each route 4 DK00 card or built in DK00 in MP is required for turning on a paging equipment 5 Paging access and answer codes are assigned ...

Page 1001: ... of the corresponding station To originate a Voice Mail message 1 Go off hook and receive Dial Tone 2 Dial the Voice Mail station number receive Ringback Tone 3 Follow the instructions given by the VMS To set call forwarding to a VMS CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER SPLIT CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS SPLIT CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE SPLIT CALL FORWARDING...

Page 1002: ...he MCI is available to a direct call or a forwarded call from a station trunk Attendant to the VMS For details of the connecting patterns refer to the Instaration Procedure Manual Feature Programming Manual 5 Stations can set CALL FORWARDING or SPLIT CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS NO ANSWER and BUSY LINE to the VMS The system sends out incoming call information to the VMS Calling a station which has CA...

Page 1003: ... store up to 16 call records into its internal memory If the maximum of 16 call records is stored and a 17th is gen erated the system will write over the oldest stored record 12 VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION feature is not allowed to be combined with the Voice Mail through MCI in the system Either VOICE MAIL INTEGRATION or MCI feature must be selected in system programming 13 When terminating a call with...

Page 1004: ...ed Dterm or MW lamp on the dialled Single Line Telephone will light to indicate a message has been set To set MESSAGE REMINDER from a Dterm after dialling the station to be set 1 Lift handset or depress the Speaker key and receive Dial Tone 2 Dial the desired station number Ringback Tone or Busy Tone is received 3 Depress the MESSAGE REMINDER key or dial 6 if single digit feature access codes are ...

Page 1005: ... set 4 Depress the RELEASE key to return to an idle condition To cancel a message from the Attendant Console 1 Depress an idle LOOP key 2 Dial the MESSAGE REMINDER cancel access code 3 Dial the desired station number and receive Service Set Tone Message indication is cancelled 4 Depress the RELEASE key to return to an idle condition To cancel a message from the station that set it 1 Lift handset a...

Page 1006: ... in Line Lockout etc Message indications are not provided when a Single Line Telephone handset is off hook 9 When a Dterm calls a station that is forwarded and then depresses the MESSAGE REMINDER key the message is left at the station to which the call was forwarded 10 When all stations in a hunt group are busy messages set by a Dterm using the MESSAGE REMINDER key are left at the called station 1...

Page 1007: ... return to idle condition To cancel MW Indication 1 Depress idle LOOP key 2 Dial MW Cancel code 3 Dial station number receive Service Set Tone 4 MW indication is cancelled 5 Depress RELEASE to return to idle condition SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 MW status is displayed by the MW Lamp on Single Line Telephone or Dterm 2 MW can be automatically cleared by talking to the Attendant or the setting station If M...

Page 1008: ...ncel code 3 Dial Station Number receive Service Set Tone 4 MW indication is cancelled 5 Hang up SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 MW status is displayed by the Message Waiting lamp on Single Line Telephone or Dterm 2 MW can be automatically cleared by talking to the Attendant or the setting station If MW is not auto matically cleared the reset operation is required 3 The 4LCD 8LC card for MW is required to pro...

Page 1009: ...E 1 When the MIC LED is off depress the Feature key followed by 1 to activate the microphone The associated LED will light SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 When the MIC LED is lit intercom voice and station voice calls to a Dterm can be answered using the microphone 2 When the MIC LED is off intercom voice signals will still be received but the user must activate the microphone in order to respond using HANDS...

Page 1010: ...ork along with DICTATION ACCESS PAGING ACCESS CODE CALLING ACCESS STATION APPLICATION Not applicable OPERATING PROCEDURE MISCELLANEOUS TRUNK ACCESS is accomplished via system data programming at the MAINTE NANCE ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL MAT and CUSTOMER ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL CAT SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Access to these trunk groups is allowed or denied via CLASS OF SERVICE INDIVIDUAL 2 An interface c...

Page 1011: ...the station user s CLASS OF SERVICE allows outgoing route completion via the Attendant the sta tion user can dial 9 to reach the Attendant for completion of miscellaneous trunk calls 5 The CALL TRANSFER ALL CALLS feature will operate as follows a If the restricted station line is the controller this station cannot add a trunk from which this station is restricted b If the restricted station line i...

Page 1012: ... DESK CONSOLE 2 The lowest line of the LCD displays the function of the associated MULTI FUNCTION KEY under the following conditions a Idle state b When an Attendant called station answers or the Attendant seizes an originating trunk c When the called station is busy d When the called station is in DO NOT DISTURB e When dialing a station number without pressing the LOOP key Hotel features will be ...

Page 1013: ...ansferred to another station In case the call subsequently continues to be transferred one call may be transferred a maximum of five times as specified by the system data In case of existing CF A service In case of Multiple CF A STATION APPLICATION All stations Call Ringing CF A 1st Time S A B CF A transfer performed only once CF A CF A CF A CF A 3rd Time 4th Time 2nd Time 1st Time 5th Time CF Rin...

Page 1014: ...ALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS service SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 When CF A is set at the called station the CF A service transfers the call to the designated destination 2 In case the CF A is set to an Attendant by a station a call is transferred to the Attendant which is the same Tenant Group with the station CF A CF A Call Ringing S A B C CF A CF A CF A Call Ringing S A B C Tenant 1 Tenant 0 ATT Calling ...

Page 1015: ...ransfer destination the call is not transferred beyond that point Where system data specifies a maximum of 5 call transfers 4 In case the CF A service designates the call originating station as a transfer destination the call is not transferred to the call originating station CF A CF A CF A CF A CF A CF A Call Ringing A B C D E F G S 1st Time 2nd Time 3rd Time 4th Time 5th Time No further transfer...

Page 1016: ...tion to the combination of CF A and CF B A call can be transferred a maximum of five times as specified by the system data In the case of existing CF B Transfer by CF B only max 5 times In the case of Multiple CF B Transfer by a combination of CF A and CF B max 5 times STATION APPLICATION All stations CF B CF B CF B CF B 3rd Time 4th Time 2nd Time 1st Time 5th Time CF B Ringing Call A B C D E F S ...

Page 1017: ...EDURE The Operation Procedure for this service is the same as that of the existing CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE service SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 If the called station is busy and CF B is set at the called station the call is transferred to the designated destination by CF B CF B CF B A S B C Call Busy Busy Idle Ringing ...

Page 1018: ...tination the call is not transferred beyond that destination Where system data specifies a maximum of 5 call transfers 3 If the destination of a call transfer by CF B is the original calling station the call is not transferred to that destination CF B CF B CF B CF B CF B CF B 3rd Time 4th Time 2nd Time 1st Time 5th Time Busy Tone Busy Busy Busy Busy Busy Busy Call A B C D E F S G No further transf...

Page 1019: ...AINDER and CAMP ON If the 5th station is busy in a multiple call forwarding sequence and calling station hears Busy Tone the calling station may activate Busy Services In this case the Busy Services are set to the first busy station in the multiple call forwarding route S A B C D E F CF A CF A CF B CF B CF B Call 1st Time 2nd Time Busy Service Busy Busy Busy Busy 3rd Time 4th Time 5th Time ...

Page 1020: ... BUSY LINE CONT D SERVICE CONDITIONS CONT D 5 Station Hunting Hunting check is performed on all busy lines as follows CF A CF B CF B Call Busy Busy Busy Busy Busy Busy Busy Busy Idle Ring A B C D D1 D2 C2 C1 B1 B2 S B B1 B2 Hunting Group Hunting Group Hunting Group C C1 C2 D D1 D2 ...

Page 1021: ...ecial Dial Tone To set from the Attendant Console 1 Depress an idle LOOP key 2 Dial the specific CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER access code receive Special Dial Tone 3 Dial the originating station number 4 Dial the desired target station number receive Service Set Tone To cancel from the Attendant Console 1 Depress and idle LOOP key 2 Dial the specific CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER cancellation code ...

Page 1022: ...an be utilized by the following incoming calls a Intraoffice b DIRECT INWARD DIALLING c DIRECT IN TERMINATION d NIGHT CONNECTION e HOT LINE 4 If a station transfers a call to another station with CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER service and releases from the connection Recall service will override CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER if the call is unanswered after a predetermined time ...

Page 1023: ...ultiple connections will result in Reorder Tone being sent to the Attendant 4 INTER POSITION TRANSFER is used to transfer calls between Attendant Console 5 The system operates only on a switched loop basis Fixed loop operation is not available 6 Day to Night When the designated Master Console has depressed the NITE key the system or asso ciated Tenant changes into the Night mode If a console other...

Page 1024: ...assigned to the port on the DLC card Prime Line This line is given priority for outgoing and incoming calls The Prime Line is auto matically seized upon going off hook Sub Line This line designates any other line appearing on a Dterm The My Line will serve as the Prime Line unless differentiated in system data programming 2 If a feature is activated which can trigger an AUTOMATIC RECALL only the s...

Page 1025: ...ATING PROCEDURE To originate an outgoing call via a trunk key 1 Go off hook receive Dial Tone 2 Depress idle trunk key 3 Associated trunk lamp gives I USE INDICATION and Dterm user receives C O Dial Tone SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Dterm users can access the trunks either through a line key or directly through a trunk key 2 All the line feature keys may be programmed as trunk appearance except for a My L...

Page 1026: ...USIC ON HOLD source a MP card provides the following two synthesized melodies Nocturne or Menuett b Hold tone c External source tuner tape deck CD player etc connecting via COT or TNT or MP card d Internal Recorded Message 4 Attendant operations resulting in MUSIC ON HOLD being played include the following a When incoming calls to the Attendant are answered and the Attendant presses the HOLD key o...

Page 1027: ...he MUTE key again the mute status returns to original conversation STATION APPLICATION All Dterms OPERATING PROCEDURE To activate muting 1 While a station is in conversation the station presses a MUTE key The other side party cannot hear the voice of the station 2 The station represses the MUTE key the station returns to the original call SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 While a station is muting the associat...

Page 1028: ... connection is assigned using the MAINTENANCE ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL MAT or CUSTOMER ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL CAT on the system data base 2 The fixed connection is set automatically after initialization of the system 3 If power failure occurs the NAILED DOWN CONNECTION will be lost until power is restored and the system is reinitialized 4 For this feature it is necessary to install the Data Port C...

Page 1029: ...ION APPLICATION All Dterms with an LCD OPERATING PROCEDURE The following will be displayed on the LCD during the Dterm user talks to another station or trunk side or during ringing period 1 The Dterm is talking to another station 2 The Dterm is talking to trunk side 2 1 1 1 xx xx Station Number Station User Name Maximum of 16 characters 0 0 3 0 2 D D D 1 1 0 5 clock Call Duration Trunk Number Trun...

Page 1030: ... user name is 512 2 A maximum number of characters of station user name is 16 3 MAINTENANCE ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL MAT or CUSTOMER ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL CAT is used to register or change the station user and trunk name 4 The trunk name can be provided trunk route basis 5 A maximum number of characters of trunk name is 4 C F A L L 3 0 0 1 YY YY XX XX 3 0 0 0 Max 8 characters Max 8 characters Nam...

Page 1031: ...processed or held after the mode changeover has been completed by Attendant 2 If the NIGHT CONNECTION station to which an incoming call has been directed is busy the calling party will hear Ringback Tone until the station becomes idle 3 This service feature may be provided with NIGHT CONNECTION FLEXIBLE and TRUNK ANSWER FROM ANY STATION in the same system 4 If the NIGHT CONNECTION station is set f...

Page 1032: ...at an idle NIGHT station rings for 30 seconds before forwarding A call forwarded from a busy NIGHT station rings normally at the designated station A station to attendant call cannot be forwarded to a NIGHT station An incoming trunk call forwarded from an idle unanswering NIGHT station alerts the desig nated station with distinctive ringing system option on ringing type is available 11 CALL FORWAR...

Page 1033: ...LICATION Not applicable OPERATING PROCEDURE Answering operation is the same as for NIGHT CONNECTION FIXED Each evening before placing the console into the NIGHT CONNECTION made the Attendant programs CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS from the fixed NIGHT CONNECTION FIXED station to the desired station SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 The NIGHT CONNECTION FLEXIBLE station may be programmed from either the Attendant Co...

Page 1034: ...nswers 2 There is no AUTOMATIC RECALL for Station to Trunk and Trunk to Trunk calls when the called party does not answer 3 When the PASSING DIAL TONE feature is provided once the Attendant has accessed an outgoing trunk the call may be released from the Attendant Console and the user is allowed to complete dial ling 4 Fully restricted station users cannot be connected by the Attendant to a centra...

Page 1035: ...arty hold is available when a Dterm is engaged in a three party conference with a station and or trunk An EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY call cannot activate two party hold 5 When two parties are put on hold service features such as EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY ATTEND ANT OVERRIDE CALL WAITING ORIGINATING CALL WAITING TERMINATING BUSY VERIFICATION and ATTENDANT CAMP ON cannot be activated to that busy line with...

Page 1036: ...tion on that feature 2 Line key assignment is made in system programming using the MAINTENANCE ADMINISTRA TION TERMINAL MAT or CUSTOMER ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL CAT 3 The Dterm with 16 buttons has 15 programmable line keys One line key is reserved for that station s primary extension 4 The Dterm with 8 buttons has 7 programmable line keys One line key is reserved for that station s pri mary extensi...

Page 1037: ... program contents even if the normal power source is disconnected In addition to this the program is noise immune and system restart after power loss is immediate STATION APPLICATION Not applied OPERATING PROCEDURE No manual operation is required SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 This feature applies only to the GENERIC PROGRAM System data and temporary switching data are stored in Random Access Memory RAM 2 W...

Page 1038: ...yed at the Attendant Console when answered SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 The predetermined timing interval is programmable through the MAINTENANCE ADMINISTRA TION TERMINAL MAT or CUSTOMER ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL CAT LOOK OUT TIMER 2 The station assigned as a terminating station of each OFF HOOK ALARM group can be a member of Hunting Group 3 The Attendant can answer by depressing the ICI key which must be a...

Page 1039: ...ecting normal system operation STATION APPLICATION Not applicable OPERATING PROCEDURE Refer to the Command Manual SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 The following maintenance functions may be performed while the system is on line a Generic Program and System Data Memory testing b System Message Display and Diagnosis c System Office Data Assignment and Display d REMOTE MAINTENANCE e PEG COUNT display ...

Page 1040: ...cial Dial Tone 4 Dial OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING access code receive Service Set Tone 5 Replace handset SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Once an outgoing trunk becomes available the user s station will ring for 30 seconds If not answered within that time the station will be automatically dropped from the queue 2 When this feature is utilized in conjunction with SPEED CALLING SYSTEM or LEAST COST ROUTING 3 6 DIGIT...

Page 1041: ...n the system 10 The OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING call back will return to the originating station not the CALL FORWARDING terminating station 11 OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING is denied to station line when the CALL BACK or CALL HOLD feature is already activated 12 The Attendant cannot CAMP ON a call to a station that has activated OUTGOING TRUNK QUEU ING 13 ACCOUNT CODE and FORCED ACCOUNT CODE information can ...

Page 1042: ...s OGQ SET 3 Replace handset With LEAST COST ROUTING 3 6 DIGIT provided 1 Dial trunk access code receive PBX Dial Tone 2 Dial desired number receive Busy Tone The LCD displays BUSY 3 Depress CALL BACK key receive Service Set Tone The LCD displays SET 4 Replace handset 5 When the trunk becomes idle the station will be rung Once connected to the trunk the system automatically redials the number To ca...

Page 1043: ...aximum duration 64 sec 4 Replace handset SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 This feature is effective for incoming calls from a Ring Down DID DIT Tie Line trunk 2 A DAT is required per each UCD group Up to 128 cards can be assigned per UCD group 3 When a DAT is not mounted the overflowed call is kept ringing in case of DIT and the other calls except DIT receive Busy Tone 4 If the incoming call comes from a C O ...

Page 1044: ...e Connection RBT Queuing RBT Queuing UCD group All Busy A B C Incoming Incoming Incoming RBT Overflowed Call UCD OVERFLOW ANNOUNCEMENT BT Trunk released RBT Queuing RBT Queuing UCD group All Busy A B C D E Incoming Incoming Incoming Incoming Incoming RBT RBT RBT Overflowed Call UCD OVERFLOW ANNOUNCEMENT UCD OVERFLOW ANNOUNCEMENT UCD OVERFLOW ANNOUNCEMENT OVERFLOW ANNOUNCEMENT BT Trunk released BT ...

Page 1045: ...The incoming call E is connected to the middle of the announcement message RBT Queuing RBT Queuing UCD group All Busy A B C D E Incoming Incoming Incoming Incoming Incoming RBT RBT RBT Overflowed Calls DAT 1 BT Trunk released BT Trunk released BT Trunk released DAT 1 DAT 2 DAT 1 DAT 2 Send to C and then E Send to D UCD OVERFLOW ANNOUNCEMENT UCD OVERFLOW ANNOUNCEMENT UCD OVERFLOW ANNOUNCEMENT OVERF...

Page 1046: ...is registered as the overflow destination 2 In case all the stations are busy in Group B to which the call has been transferred by the UCD OVER FLOW service the call is registered in the queue in UCD Group A STATION APPLICATION Not applicable OPERATING PROCEDURE No manual operation is required UCD Group A All Busy UCD Group B Overflow Call Termination UCD Group A All Busy UCD Group B All Busy Over...

Page 1047: ...nce 4 An OVERFLOW Group cannot be registered into a Queue Incoming Call Station all busy UCD group System data check System Base No queuing Busy tone OVERFLOW to another UCD group UCD group base OVERFLOW Display UCD group base Yes No Queuing External Relay Control CF B of Pilot Station Is station idle in another UCD group Yes No Ringing OVERFLOW Lamp will be lit or the ringer will ring Yes No END ...

Page 1048: ...ON CODE 3 Dial AUTHORIZATION CODE and receive Dial Tone 4 Dial PAD LOCK access code 2 access code for MAID STATUS 5 Dial 2 and receive Service Set Tone 6 Restore the handset SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 This feature restricts telephones from making C O outgoing calls and or terminating calls from C O trunks stations and Attendant Stations in PAD LOCK status are able to place Station to Station calls and o...

Page 1049: ...or CUSTOMER ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL CAT 7 PAD LOCK status will continue unless it is cancelled 8 An AUTHORIZATION CODE can be assigned per station number so that one code is used only on the specific station Application Processor AP01 is required 9 This feature cannot be used in the hotel system using MAID STATUS feature 10 Application Processor AP00 is required to supply the PAD LOCK feature ...

Page 1050: ... Dial Tone 2 Dial PAGING access code 3 Connection to paging equipment is established SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Amplifiers and speakers must be customer provided 2 One trunk circuit is required for each PAGING ACCESS 3 The system will supply the interface trunk package 4 DK00 card or built in DK00 in MP is required for turning on a PAGING equipment 5 Where TENANT SERVICE is provided separate access code...

Page 1051: ...user depresses the switchhook flash key receives Special Dial Tone 2 Station user dials the paging access code receives continuous Ringback Tone for approximately one second 3 Station user pages the desired party To answer 1 The party paged is immediately connected to the paging station when the paged party dials the paging answer access code SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Paging trunks can be provided for ...

Page 1052: ...al Tone The call must be completed via the Attendant Console 3 The Attendant cannot pass Dial Tone to a station whose route restriction class is such that it cannot receive incoming calls 4 The PASSING DIAL TONE feature is limited by the number of trunks that can be accessed by the Attendant and the class of service restrictions of the station 5 RESTRICTION FROM OUTGOING CALLS This feature cannot ...

Page 1053: ...data handling To prevent such from occurring this service fea ture is used to limit usable commands on each PASSWORD level STATION APPLICATION Not applicable OPERATING PROCEDURE Refer to the Command Manual SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 There are eight levels for PASSWORDs 2 A PASSWORD consists of a maximum of eight digits 3 A PASSWORD can be used on all types of Administration Terminal CAT and MAT 4 The of...

Page 1054: ...l the desired number and pause or The old digits will be erased and the new number is displayed 3 Depress the Conf key The LCD will display SET To operate using a One Touch key Depress the One Touch key associated with the desired telephone number The speaker automatically turns on and the number is dialed SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 A stored Speed Call number may consist of a maximum combination of 16 d...

Page 1055: ... on modem trunk group Number of incoming connections using modem trunks based on modem trunk group Number of times all modem trunks were busy based on modem trunk group Number of times the CONFERENCE circuits were used on a system basis Number of times CONFERENCE circuits were all busy on a system basis Number of times an incoming call was CALL FORWARDED DON T ANSWER to the Attendant or another st...

Page 1056: ...CE CONDITIONS 1 This feature is programmed on a per trunk group basis via the MAINTENANCE ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL MAT or CUSTOMER ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL CAT 2 The PERIODIC TIME INDICATION TONE is 80 ms in duration and is sent every 180 seconds See VARIABLE TIMING PARAMETERS for other programming time periods 3 This feature is only available for station users that have placed outgoing calls to a C...

Page 1057: ...e 3 Dial desired number To answer a call on a POOLED LINE 1 Go off hook and select the ringing line key 2 Converse SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 When all trunks in the POOLED LINE group are busy no visual indication is provided on the associ ated line key LED However a different line key can be assigned for this purpose when required 2 A user on a POOLED LINE can access CALL PARK CALL TRANSFER CONFERENCE a...

Page 1058: ...OWER FAILURE TRANSFER cir cuit The PN AUC card provides 2 PFT circuits 4 Each Port Interface Module PIM can contain one PZ 8PFT card which supplies 8 POWER FAIL URE TRANSFER circuits This card is mounted on the front bracket of the PIM 5 A maximum of 32 POWER FAILURE TRANSFER connections are available per PIM 6 When the POWER FAILURE TRANSFER feature is activated telephone service is limited to in...

Page 1059: ...s a station user to originate or answer a call from the line designated as the Prime Line by going off hook It is unnecessary to depress the associated line key STATION APPLICATION All Dterms OPERATING PROCEDURE 1 Lift handset or depress Speaker key receive Dial Tone SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 One PRIME LINE per station is allowed ...

Page 1060: ...perator to answer Note PRIORITY CALL will terminate on a designated key on the Attendant Console SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 The PRIORITY CALL must be answered via a designated key in order to gain a priority capability The keys must be assigned by MAINTENANCE ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL MAT and CUS TOMER ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL CAT 2 A PRIORITY CALL cannot be initiated while in CONSULTATION HOLD ALL CALLS 3...

Page 1061: ... feature restricts Dterm users from depressing a busy line key and entering a conversation STATION APPLICATION All Dterms OPERATING PROCEDURE No manual operation is required SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 A Dterm station user cannot seize the Prime Line if it is busy 2 LINE PRESELECTION is denied if the selected line is busy ...

Page 1062: ...erence is established The overridden parties will hear a Warning Tone when the three party conference is established and CONF will be displayed on the associated Dterm dis play SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 PRIVACY RELEASE is available for a Dterm connected to a station or OG IC trunk 2 If a Dterm user depresses the Conf key the line appearance to which that Dterm is connected to is allowed PRIVACY RELEASE...

Page 1063: ...is in use with the feature activated Override to either party is denied 2 If the DND key is depressed before the conversation is concluded PRIVACY is released The LED will go off 3 If the DND key is depressed with the station off hook the DO NOT DISTURB feature has been acti vated Calls can be made with DO NOT DISTURB activated DO NOT DISTURB will not deny EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY 4 The PRIVACY feat...

Page 1064: ...lowing features are available CONFERENCE DELAYED RINGING STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SMDR CALL TRANSFER CALL PARK CALL HOLD SAVE AND REPEAT LAST NUMBER REDIAL BROKER S CALL SPEED CALLING using feature keys 3 When an outgoing call is placed SPEED CALLING SYSTEM cannot be used 4 The LED associated with the line key will be lit red when the trunk is busy and green when being used by the station ...

Page 1065: ...igned as private lines 12 If the designated trunk is busy the system is able to hunt to the next trunk following increasing trunk number order When the route number of the trunk differs from the route number of the original des ignated trunk hunting stops and the caller receives Busy Tone 13 If a station uses a secondary station on a Dterm for an outgoing calling the designated trunk for the pri m...

Page 1066: ...esponding to desired numbers OR After a connection is established between a Dterm station and a station or trunk port with an external device attached the Dterm user may depress the keypad or SPEED CALLING keys to transmit DTMF signals to control the external device SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 If tone lines from the central office are not available then the PUSHBUTTON TO ROTARY CON VERSION feature must b...

Page 1067: ...rom a keypad on the Attend ant Console STATION APPLICATION DESK CONSOLE SMART CONSOLE OPERATING PROCEDURE Attendant depresses keypad to dial SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 This feature requires that all C O Trunks or Tie Trunk terminals accept PUSHBUTTON signalling DTMF 2 PUSHBUTTON CALLING ATTENDANT ONLY may be added to the system without providing PUSHBUTTON CALLING capability to other stations ...

Page 1068: ...ce feature allows PUSHBUTTON telephone to be used when touch tone trunk circuits are not provided or are not available from the CO STATION APPLICATION All stations OPERATING PROCEDURE No manual operation is required SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 PUSHBUTTON TO ROTARY CONVERSION is software controlled on a per trunk route basis ...

Page 1069: ...s requires prior System Interworking Tests OPERATING PROCEDURE No manual operation is required SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Layer 2 and less should be activated normally 2 Redundancy structure One D channel can control maximum 30 B channels INTERACTION The following services can be provided in conjunction with feature 1 Common station voice service CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE CALL ...

Page 1070: ... party receives Special Dial Tone 3 The paged party dials his own individual radio number 4 The paging station is rung paged party receives Ringback Tone 5 The paging station answers The paging and paged stations can converse SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 RADIO PAGING equipment must be locally provided Refer to the manufacturer s documentation for the following specifications Types of tones Capability of r...

Page 1071: ...line key programmed to perform the relay function The associated line key LED will go off The contact will open and remain open SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 A maximum of 128 contacts per system can be controlled 2 One DK00 card or built in DK00 in MP is required for every eight external items to be controlled 3 The RELAY CONTROL key functions regardless of the Dterm condition busy or idle 4 The contact re...

Page 1072: ...s must be assigned to AUTHORIZATION CODE and REMOTE ACCESS CODE Number of codes Up to 1 000 codes combined with AUTHORIZATION CODE and FORCED ACCOUNT CODE b In the case of a system without AP01 card Number of digits 1 digit 8 digits Number of codes The maximum number of codes depends on the numbering scheme and digit number For details refer to APPENDIX 3 2 Dual Tone Multi Frequency DTMF instrumen...

Page 1073: ... not answer or the number dialled is a feature access code any one of the following operations can be set a The C O line can be released b Dial tone can be supplied c An alternate call terminating destination Attendant Console TRUNK ANSWER FROM ANY STATION DIRECT IN TERMINATION can be provided 9 The outside user can access a Digital Announcement Trunk DAT card via REMOTE ACCESS TO SYSTEM if progra...

Page 1074: ...te 2 The DAI cards are required in both of the Main PIM and the Remote PIM 3 The Remote PIM can be installed at a maximum of 400 m distance from the Main Site The distance can be extended by using line extension equipment repeater MUX etc 4 A maximum of 63 lines trunks can be accommodated in one Remote PIM with T1 interface A maximum of 60 lines trunks can be accommodated in one Remote PIM with E1...

Page 1075: ... Processor MP is used no modem at each remote site is required A cable for connection between the MP and the on site modem When the internal modem of the MP is used this cable is not required 2 The internal modem of the MP is compatible with the following specifications ITU T V 22 1200 bps ITU T V 32 4800 9600 bps ITU T V 22 bis 2400 bps ITU T V 34 19 2K 33 6K bps Bell 212A 1200 bps 3 Any one of t...

Page 1076: ...usy out state call termination is restricted for stations and allowed for trunks and call origi nation is available for stations and restricted on trunks 2 This assignment is done by MAT and is assigned on a per station or per trunk basis 3 When a station or trunk is busied out while a call is in progress the call is not interrupted The station or trunk is made busy upon the circuit becoming idle ...

Page 1077: ...ATION Not applicable OPERATING PROCEDURE No manual operation is required SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Batteries should be installed inside the PIM or separately from the system 2 Batteries must be locally provided 3 No interruption of system operation will occur during switchover from commercial to battery power 4 Duration of battery operation is a direct function of the capacity of the batteries installe...

Page 1078: ... required in office data assignment STATION APPLICATION Not applicable OPERATING PROCEDURE Refer to the Office Data Programming Manual for activation procedures SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 This feature is only applicable for equipment installed in Port Interface Module PIM 0 to 4 2 System data is not assigned to any vacant slot 3 Virtual stations are not assigned 4 The RESIDENT SYSTEM PROGRAM scans the h...

Page 1079: ... controlled by assigning a Route Restriction Class RSC to each line There can be a maximum of 8 different RSCs per system each of which can be programmed to restrict an assigned station from none one or more than one trunk group maximum 64 trunk groups 6 When a trunk group access code is dialled the station user s assigned RSC is used to index a trunk group route restriction table to determine if ...

Page 1080: ...nute increments on a 24 hour basis depending on programming 5 If 2 or 3 is selected dial the month and date eg for June 8 enter 0608 6 Restore handset RETURN SCHEDULE is registered To cancel RETURN SCHEDULE from the station that set RETURN SCHEDULE 1 Go off hook and receive Dial Tone 2 Dial RETURN SCHEDULE cancel code 3 Restore handset RETURN SCHEDULE is cancelled SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Registration...

Page 1081: ...within the same day Provides an hour and minute display c AWAY BACK recommended when the station user has left the premises and will be away for an extended time period Provides a month and date display d VACATION Provides a month and date display 7 Reorder tone is heard by the calling party when a station that set RETURN SCHEDULE is called Ringback Tone can be provided on a system wide basis 8 Th...

Page 1082: ...FREQUENCY at the Dterm 1 Depress the Feature key followed by 3 receive the new selected tone from the built in speaker 2 Depress the Feature key to return to idle 3 Repeat this procedure until the desired tone is selected SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 The RING FREQUENCY for both internal and external calls can be controlled by system program ming For internal calls the frequency can be assigned on a per st...

Page 1083: ...nswer the incoming call SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 This service feature is allowed or denied according to the Service Feature Class assigned to each sta tion 2 Priority for answering incoming calls is as follows a Voice Call b Incoming Call of My Line c Incoming Call on Trunk Line d Incoming Call on Sub Line 3 RINGING LINE PICKUP Dterm has priority over PRIME LINE PICKUP Dterm in any case 4 PRIME LINE P...

Page 1084: ...hould be Industry Standard 10pps instruments 2 Pushbutton instruments may be utilized in conjunction with ROTARY DIAL CALLING 3 It is possible to provide only the Attendant with pushbutton calling while all other stations are assigned ROTARY DIAL CALLING Refer to PUSHBUTTON CALLING ATTENDANT ONLY for further details 4 If ROTARY DIAL CALLING is assigned to a line only rotary dial sets can be used o...

Page 1085: ...single ROUTE ADVANCE group is 7 5 The total number of routes that can be contained in all ROUTE ADVANCE groups is 64 6 The same route can be included in two or more alternative groups 7 ROUTE ADVANCE occurs only when the dialled code access the first choice trunk group in the ROUTE ADVANCE table 8 No code conversion capability is provided with the ROUTE ADVANCE feature The digits after the trunk a...

Page 1086: ...SAVE AND REPEAT function may be set at any time after the number has been dialled and before going on hook 3 It is not necessary to erase the stored number in order to save another The second number will auto matically replace the first 4 If necessary dialling can be added after depressing the SAVE AND REPEAT key 5 When a call is originated using the SAVE AND REPEAT feature the LED associated with...

Page 1087: ... circuit on a 4LC 8LC card 2 The contact installed must be a normally open contact 3 The contact generated signal is non latching therefore if the contact opens again the signal to the Attendant Console stops 4 The station number assigned to the single line circuit associated with the contact closure is displayed when the Attendant depresses the ATND key or ANSWER key 5 Assignment of this feature ...

Page 1088: ...nel must be installed External alarm indication is provided using a contact to ground at the main distribution frame One contact is needed for minor alarms and one contact is needed for major alarms 4 The following fault messages are provided System Initialized Number of stack overflows was more than a fixed number MP FP AP communication failure FP AP board down turned back to normal condition DTI...

Page 1089: ... Attendant depresses the SERIAL CALL SET SC key 4 The called station and incoming caller are connected 5 The called station hangs up The SERIAL CALL TERMINATION SRL LED on the Attendant Console flashes at 60 IPM If the Attendant is available an audible indication is provided 6 The Attendant depresses the ANS or SRL key to return to the original incoming calling party SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 SERIAL CA...

Page 1090: ...s service features as they are initiated STATION APPLICATION All Dterms with an LCD OPERATING PROCEDURE Each display is automatically generated when a service feature is initiated SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 The contrast on the LCD Display Panel is controlled by a switch on the lower front side of the Dterm directly below the key pad Refer to VOLUME CONTROL Dterm for details ...

Page 1091: ...ys SWAP OK xxxx where xxxx is Station B number 6 Restore the handset After four seconds data between Station A and Station B will be exchanged SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 This feature can move Dterm to Dterm or Single Line Terminal to Single Line Terminal The following cases are not available Single Line Terminal Dterm PS PS Single Line Terminal Dterm However the following cases are available Note Single...

Page 1092: ...unk station can not be moved if CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS BUSY LINE DON T ANSWER Do Not Disturb Mes sage Waiting MW or Busy Out is setting the associated LED will be lit 7 When Single Line Terminal is moved to Single Line Terminal if MW is setting after moving MW lamp will be lit 8 During saving loading system data this feature is restricted Because system data is changed when this feature is acti...

Page 1093: ... service BT 1 RBT 1 Voice Ring changeover 2 CB OG Q 2 CB No Answer 3 EROW 3 4 Sta Camp On 4 5 Call Waiting 5 6 MSG Set 6 MSG Set 7 Step Call 7 7 Last one digit 8 MSG Record 8 MSG Record 9 9 0 0 Note Service setting is possible from Dterm Single Line Telephone DP or DTMF and limited fea tures from Attendant as per If the requested feature is not available for any reasons Reorder Tone will be heard ...

Page 1094: ... WAITING Access Code 5 When the called busy station s number has been dialled and Busy Tone received dial 5 and hear a Special Ringback Tone Busy Station will hear Call Waiting Tone 3 beeps 6 MESSAGE WAITING LAMP SETTING Access Code 6 When the called busy station s number has been dialled and Busy Tone received dial 6 and hear a Service Set Tone MESSAGE WAITING indication is set 7 STEP CALL Access...

Page 1095: ...nd hear a Service Set Tone MESSAGE WAITING indication is set 12 MESSAGE WAITING LAMP SETTING Access Code 8 After dialling desired station number and hearing Ring Back Tone dial 8 and hear a Service Set Tone record a message MESSAGE WAITING indication is set SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 The associated access codes are preassigned and cannot be changed 2 The Attendant can use the following services MSG Set ...

Page 1096: ... to the Operating Procedure section of that particular Feature and Specifications SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 When accessing SINGLE DIGIT FEATURE CODEs consideration must be given to the overall num bering plan of the particular system unless timing start has been provided 2 The symbols and can be used as the first digit of a trunk access code and can be used as a fea ture access code 3 A SINGLE DIGIT FE...

Page 1097: ...ICE CONDITIONS 1 Access from the Attendant Console is only available by depressing the key 2 Access from a dial pulse telephone is not possible as there is no key 3 The SINGLE DIGIT STATION CALLING WITH TIMING feature can also be used for Attendant Console access Trunk Route access Trunk Route Advance access TAS access 4 The inter digit timer can be set from 3 to 8 sec in system data 5 This featur...

Page 1098: ...tion numbers STATION APPLICATION All stations OPERATING PROCEDURE To dial another station using a SINGLE DIGIT 1 Go off hook receive Dial Tone 2 Dial SINGLE DIGIT preprogrammed code 3 Desired service station will be rung SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 The SINGLE DIGIT number should be different from the first digit of Trunk Access Codes Service Feature Access Codes Other Station Numbers ...

Page 1099: ...ginating holding extending and re entering calls When ATTENDANT LOOP RELEASE is used the number of loops is effectively increased to a maximum of 12 for each console STATION APPLICATION SMART CONSOLE SN708 SN709 SN712 ATTCON OPERATING PROCEDURE Detailed operating procedures are provided in Features and Specifications of the services related to the SMART CONSOLE SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Each Firmware P...

Page 1100: ... DESKCON SN708 SN709 SN712 ATTCON A maximum of 8 SMART CONSOLEs can be supported per system 2 Each SN716 DESKCON uses a 3 pair cable 3 The SN716 DESKCON is equipped with an Alarm LED This LED will flash for Minor Alarms and light steadily for Major Alarms Refer to Maintenance Administration Terminal Fault Messages for more information Refer to the following chart for cable distances 4 Refer to the...

Page 1101: ...INE APPEARANCE assigned as a secondary station can only pickup calls directed to the group programmed for that secondary station 3 A SOFTWARE LINE APPEARANCE can enter or access the SPEED CALLING data on the station of the same Dterm on which it appears 4 All STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SMDR data of the SOFTWARE LINE APPEAR ANCE will be recorded as activity on the primary station of the Dterm...

Page 1102: ...on of the pressed SOFT KEY is indicated on the LCD 3 Press the Exit key and the explanation is deleted If the Exit key is not pressed for 16 to 20 seconds the explanation is deleted automatically SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 The indication of 4 SOFT KEYs are shown in the third line and each key is indicated by maximum 6 letters 2 The combination of SOFT KEYs are maximum 4 patterns per system The pattern c...

Page 1103: ...ll When called party is busy holding a station trunk When called party sets Do Not Disturb Trunk busy During speaking holding no call During speaking holding a station trunk FUNCTION Scroll key Function keys The function assigned by CM90 F0XXX F1XXX and F50XX can be set to the SOFT KEYs by CM9A For details refer to the Command Manual Example MIC ON OFF Save and Repeat Call Pickup Direct Call Forwa...

Page 1104: ... APPLICATION All stations OPERATING PROCEDURE 1 Station user depresses switchhook receives SPECIAL DIAL TONE 2 User may now activate a service feature such as CALL HOLD CALL TRANSFER ALL CALLS SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 If dialling is not initiated within 12 seconds after receiving SPECIAL DIAL TONE Reorder Tone will be sent to the station If Switch Hook Flash or On Hook still has not been initiated aft...

Page 1105: ...te Service Feature Class SFC STATION APPLICATION All stations OPERATING PROCEDURE 1 Lift the handset or depress the Speaker key on Dterm and receive Dial Tone 2 Dial the SPEED CALLING SYSTEM access code one or two digits or depress the SPEED CALL ING SYSTEM feature access key one touch key on Dterm 3 Dial the abbreviated call code two or three digits 4 If the station is allowed this call converse ...

Page 1106: ... per 16DD 16DS and a maximum of 12 numbers may be stored per 24DS one number per key 2 A stored number may consist of a maximum combination of 16 digits including pauses The trunk access code maximum 4 digits must be dialled to be stored however the trunk access code is not counted in the 26 digits 3 Storage of SPEED CALLING ONE TOUCH numbers must be done while the Dterm is idle 4 As a new number ...

Page 1107: ...h key is sent out as DTMF signal continuously If the second One Touch key stores the station or outside number with DTMF signal the above b c only the station outside number is sent out and the DTMF signal is not sent out 6 By dialing the feature access code of CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS BUSY LINE NO ANSWER and depressing a One Touch key CALL FORWARDING can be set to a stored station out side numbe...

Page 1108: ...breviated code to be assigned 3 Dial the desired telephone number including a trunk access code 4 Depress the Feature key From a Single Line Telephone To operate 1 Go off hook and dial the SPEED CALLING STATION feature access code 2 Dial the abbreviated code assigned to the desired number 3 The number is dialled To program number in memory 1 Go off hook and dial the SPEED CALLING STATION programmi...

Page 1109: ...26 digits available Rotary type phones cannot store a pause The pause length is Normal pause 1 5 sec Long pause programmable 1 5 12 sec 8 Memory for SPEED CALLING ONE TOUCH Dterm is also used for this memory 9 Hook flashes cannot be programmed into SPEED CALLING STATION 10 The same memory blocks can be shared by multiple stations When the same memory blocks are shared there is an assignment that a...

Page 1110: ...stem is 300 If necessary the memory blocks for SPEED CALLING ONE TOUCH STATION can be assigned for SPEED CALLING SYSTEM In that case up to 4000 SPEED CALLING SYSTEM numbers can be used in addition to 300 4 Each tenant in the system can be assigned up to 300 SPEED CALLING SYSTEM numbers 5 SPEED CALLING SYSTEM numbers are assigned in system programming from the MAINTE NANCE ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL M...

Page 1111: ...STATION APPLICATION All Dterms OPERATING PROCEDURE To initiate a call 1 Depress the Speaker key or lift the handset and receive Dial Tone 2 Depress the SPEED CALLING SYSTEM access feature key one touch key or dial SPEED CALLING SYSTEM access code one or two digits 3 Dial the abbreviated call code two or three digits The LCD displays xxx where is xxx is Abbreviated Call Code 4 Converse when the par...

Page 1112: ...d destination number 0 9 receive Service Set Tone DESTINATION NUMBER 0 Target Station for SPLIT CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS Block No 0 1 Block No 1 2 Block No 2 3 Block No 3 4 Block No 4 5 Block No 5 6 Block No 6 7 Target Station for SPLIT CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS Block No 7 8 Target Station for CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS 9 SPEED CALLING STATION Note Destination No 0 7 is pre assigned in system prog...

Page 1113: ...LIT CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS 1 Lift the handset receive Dial Tone 2 Dial the SPLIT CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS cancellation code receive Service Set Tone 3 Replace the handset SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 This feature allows a station to set the two kinds of call forwarded stations One is the target station assigned for CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS the other is the target station assigned for SPLIT CALL FORWA...

Page 1114: ... Dial Tone 3 Dial the desired destination number 0 9 receive Service Set Tone DESTINATION NUMBER 0 Target Station for SPLIT CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE Block No 0 1 Block No 1 2 Block No 2 3 Block No 3 4 Block No 4 5 Block No 5 6 Block No 6 7 Target Station for SPLIT CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE Block No 7 8 Target Station for CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE 9 SPEED CALLING STATION Note Destination No 0 7 is...

Page 1115: ... the SPLIT CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE cancellation code receive Service Set Tone SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 This feature allows a station to set the two kinds of call forwarded stations One is the target station assigned for CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE the other is the target station assigned for SPLIT CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE The target stations for SPLIT CALL FORWARDING is pre assigned in system program...

Page 1116: ...Tone DESTINATION NUMBER 0 Target Station for SPLIT CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER Block No 0 1 Block No 1 2 Block No 2 3 Block No 3 4 Block No 4 5 Block No 5 6 Block No 6 7 Target Station for SPLIT CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER Block No 7 8 Target Station for CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER 9 SPEED CALLING STATION Note Destination No 0 7 is pre assigned in system programming The LCD displays SET xxxx wh...

Page 1117: ...ws a station to set the two kinds of call forwarded stations One is the target station assigned for CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER the other is the target station assigned for SPLIT CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER The target stations for SPLIT CALL FOR WARDING is pre assigned in system programming 2 Either CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER or SPLIT CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER can be selected for the featur...

Page 1118: ...EST key 2 Station class number displayed To speak with both parties 1 Depress TALK key To release from Attendant Console 1 Depress RELEASE key To disconnect all parties involved in a three way conference 1 Depress DEST key 2 Depress CANCL key twice SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 The Attendant may alternate between the called and calling station parties and three way conference as desired 2 If the SERIAL CAL...

Page 1119: ...zes the Transfer key to alternate conversation between the two parties STATION APPLICATION All Dterms OPERATING PROCEDURE While a conversation is in progress 1 Depress the Transfer key hear Special Dial Tone 2 Dial the new number first party is held second party answers 3 Depress the Transfer key and return to first party second party is held 4 Repeat as often as needed SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 A THRE...

Page 1120: ...K CONSOLE SMART CONSOLE OPERATING PROCEDURE 1 Press the LNR key The caller hears Special Dial Tone and the number dialled last is displayed on the LCD 2 To display the numbers dialled before the last call press the LNR key again While the caller receives Special Dial Tone the number dialled before the last call is displayed on the LCD Each time the LNR key is pressed the numbers dialled for the la...

Page 1121: ...ll depress the Redial key again While the caller hears Special Dial Tone the number dialled before the last call is displayed on the LCD Each time the Redial key is depressed the numbers dialled for the last five calls are displayed sequen tially from the last number dialled 3 To redial the displayed number on the LCD depress the or key The following displayed on the Dterm Operation LCD Display a ...

Page 1122: ...f the LCD is being used by Data Communication OAI STACK DIAL is not available 6 The maximum number of digits that can be memorized by STACK DIAL is 32 The number of digits to be displayed on the LCD ranges from 1 to 16 7 When only one number is registered by STACK DIAL blank is displayed on the lower line of the LCD when the Redial key is pressed If redial is attempted by pressing the key while BL...

Page 1123: ...st party to be added to the conference 4 Depress the Transfer key after the party answers and then dial the access code B to add then into the conference 5 Conference leader sequentially calls all desired parties and connects them to the CFT trunk by dial ling the assigned access code B The called party Station C O Tie waits in the conference mode until the leader is connected to the CFT trunk 6 A...

Page 1124: ... access key The CONFERENCE feature access key LED lights red 2 Dial the number of the first party Station or C O Tie Line to be added to the conference 3 Depress the CONFERENCE feature access key again after the party answers The line key LED lights red and the CONFERENCE feature access key LED lights green The first party is connected to the CFT trunk 4 Depress the Hold key The CONFERENCE feature...

Page 1125: ...alled access code For instance if the leader dials the access code for a 10 party conference when only one CFT trunk is idle the leader is restricted and hears ROT 6 The maximum number of C O Line Tie Lines that can be connected in a conference is Up to five C O Lines Tie Lines for a 6 party conference Up to nine C O Lines Tie Lines for 10 party conference 7 Call charges for C O lines are call cha...

Page 1126: ... trunk is used The leader is not attending by Hold key Light Red CFT trunk is used The leader is not attending by going on hook Light Green Conference is established 14 A participant can replace a conference leader by depressing the CONFERENCE feature access key of their Dterm If the kind of Conference key 6 party or 10 party is different from that of the leader replace is not allowed Call charges...

Page 1127: ...ion number after placing an incoming call on CONSULTA TION HOLD ALL CALLS 2 Calling station hears Busy Tone 3 Calling station goes on hook 4 Busy station will hear Camp On Tone one tone burst STATION CAMP ON is set Procedure 1 and 2 can be useful on same system but can be eliminated by system data for each procedure basis SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 When STATION CAMP ON is activated to a station any othe...

Page 1128: ... to be bridged in or to the call destination d BUSY VERIFICATION Camp On service can be set to the party engaging in a bridged call three way calling A bridge in can be made in a case where Camp On service has been set to the party to be bridged in or to the call destination e CALL HOLD Camp On service can be set to the party which has set Call Hold service When the station has become idle Camp On...

Page 1129: ... set CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS or DO NOT DISTURB hunting will bypass that station and continue in the order of hunting 5 The maximum number of stations per hunting group is 60 include secretary Hunting 6 There is no limit to the number of STATION HUNTING CIRCULAR groups within the system 7 STATION HUNTING is activated first rather than CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE if the dialled station has set this ...

Page 1130: ...hunt 11 Each station can belong to only one hunt group 12 This feature will be activated whenever the hunt group is dialled or terminated under the following conditions Dialled from a station Dialled from Attendant Console Dialled from DID Direct Inward Dialling Dialled from Tie Line Terminated by DIT Direct In Termination Terminated by HOT LINE Terminated by OFF HOOK ALARM ...

Page 1131: ...ION HUNTING SECRETARIAL hunt group can be a Circular or Terminal Hunt group 3 A maximum of 31 stations can be members of the STATION HUNTING SECRETARIAL group 4 Any number of stations in STATION HUNTING TERMINAL groups and STATION HUNTING CIRCULAR groups can have their calls rerouted to a station within the STATION HUNTING SEC RETARIAL group In practice it is best for the pilot number of STATION H...

Page 1132: ...MINAL groups per system 4 When the station number used as a pilot number has set CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS CALL FORWARDING will reroute the call and STATION HUNTING TERMINAL will not occur 5 When an station within the STATION HUNTING TERMINAL group other than the pilot station sets CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS calls already in the hunt process will bypass the station and continue hunting Calls direct...

Page 1133: ...his feature will be activated whenever the hunt group is dialled or terminated under the following conditions Dialled from a station Dialled from Attendant Console Dialled from DID Direct Inward Dialling Dialled from a Tie Line Terminated by DIT Direct In Termination Terminated by HOT LINE Terminated by OFF HOOK ALARM ...

Page 1134: ...e displayed Therefore it is recommended that this feature is per formed after complaints or problems should occur 3 Printout of station line status is not available through the printer connected to the MAT 4 Station line status is displayed in numerical data The numerical data represents the status from both hardware and software aspects Following shows the numeral data displayed and their corresp...

Page 1135: ...n 1 0 2 2 STATION LINE STATUS DISPLAY CONT D SERVICE CONDITIONS CONT D Software Status 01 Terminal is idle 02 Terminal is in line lockout status 03 08 Terminal is hush 5 This feature is also available from the CUSTOMER ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL CAT ...

Page 1136: ...ally provided For outgoing calls up to 26 digits can be recorded 3 When customer provided computer equipment is connected using the RS 232C interface SMDR information will be transmitted directly to the equipment as each call record is completed 4 One RS 232C interface port is provided The following specifications apply to this port Synchronization Asynchronous Data Speed 9600 bps maximum Code ASC...

Page 1137: ...ll not be recorded 8 The built in SMDR can not be provided when AP00 is mounted 9 The built in SMDR does not provide a record of tandem calls 10 ACCOUNT CODES FORCED ACCOUNT CODES AUTHORIZATION CODES and REMOTE ACCESS TO SYSTEM codes on Tandem connections are reported in the applicable call record Tan dem SMDR with AP00 only 11 SMDR with AP00 provides a record of incoming Tie Line tandem calls whe...

Page 1138: ...n is busy the call will not be transferred to the Attendant Console unless CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE is provided has been set 4 STATION TO STATION CALLING between tenants will not be restricted unless for such restriction is programmed by system data 5 The maximum number of digits per station number is 4 6 The same station numbers cannot be duplicated within the system 7 There is only First Party ...

Page 1139: ...on number to the Attendant 4 The Attendant dials station number 5 Calling and called parties are connected when the Attendant depresses RELEASE key SERVICE CONDITIONS l The Attendant may drop out of the connection either before or after the called party has answered 2 If the called station does not answer within 30 seconds AUTOMATIC RECALL will be activated 3 Using this feature the Attendant may c...

Page 1140: ...is service feature can be provided for all station and the Attendant Console s 2 If the second selected station is also busy STEP CALL can continue until an idle station is reached When CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS is set and a station called during STEP CALL meets the CALL FORWARDING condition CALL FORWARDING will occur 3 CONSULTATION HOLD ALL CALLS STEP CALL can be activated when Busy Tone is retur...

Page 1141: ...es attenu ation so that the desired transmitting and receiving levels can be maintained providing the overall tan dem system with transparency 2 When all Tie Trunks are busy the calling station will receive Busy Tone 3 Careful consideration should be given to access code numbering plans to avoid unnecessary loss of access codes and code duplication within the same system 4 Tandem switching can als...

Page 1142: ...ks where required 4 When a Tenant s station dials the operator access code it will be connected to the associated Attend ant 5 Different Tenants can utilize the same one numbering plan when necessary 6 The system can provide TENANT SERVICE to a maximum of 64 tenants 7 The same station numbers cannot be assigned among different tenants e g stations numbered 2XXX can only be associated with one tena...

Page 1143: ...s or the assignment of different paging zones and different num bering plans allow for individual paging access by Tenants 14 When MULTIPLE CONSOLE OPERATION is applied a master Attendant Console must be desig nated to place multiple tenants into night mode 15 A different music source for MUSIC ON HOLD maximum 10 may be used for each Tenant ...

Page 1144: ...r 4 Depress the Conf key A three party conference is established The display shows CONF plus the name and number of the trunks or station if assigned SERVICE CONDITIONS l A maximum of two trunks can be used in a conference 2 Single Line Telephones can add up to one additional party three party conference 3 Dterm can add up to two additional parties four party conference Refer to ADD ON CONFERENCE ...

Page 1145: ...n to the first party by hookflashing again 12 When a call is made to a second external party after a hookflash the next hookflash will result in a con ference By hookflashing again the last connection is released returning the Single Line Telephone user to the original party 13 CALL BACK and MESSAGE WAITING can be set to stations involved in a three or four party con ference 14 Amplification is pr...

Page 1146: ...ost 3 Each Tie Line group can be arranged for rotary or pushbutton address signaling incoming and or out going 4 The system can be equipped with only dial repeating Tie Lines Immediate start delay dial or wink start signaling is available 5 When a trunk group access code is dialed by a station user the Tie Line group is used to index a trunk route restriction table to determine if the call attempt...

Page 1147: ...CEDURE No manual operation is required SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 PAD CONTROL will be automatically switched in for the following connections a LDT to Station b LDT to Attendant Console 2 PAD CONTROL will not be switched in for the following connections a LDT to C O Trunk b C O Trunk to LDT c THREE WAY CALLING used in conjunction with TRUNK TO TRUNK CONNECTION 3 The E M Trunk DTI provides PAD CONTROL so...

Page 1148: ...tendant Console STATION APPLICATION DESK CONSOLE SMART CONSOLE OPERATING PROCEDURE Time is constantly displayed on the TIME DISPLAY area of the Attendant Console SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 The built in clock of the Attendant Console is independent of the clock in the system The clock display of the SMART CONSOLE is synchronized with the clock in the system ...

Page 1149: ... the Dterm s LCD STATION APPLICATION All Dterms with an LCD OPERATING PROCEDURE No manual operation is required SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Time is displayed according to the clock in the system and is set via the MAINTENANCE ADMINIS TRATION TERMINAL MAT or CUSTOMER ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL CAT 2 Time is displayed automatically e g 12 48 PM WED 28 APR 1999 ...

Page 1150: ...releases the trunk is programma ble from 4 120 seconds 30 seconds as set in default During this period the station s Speaker LED is lit and the station is considered off hook by the system 2 The time between the release of the trunk and the reseizure of the trunk is programmable from 4 120 seconds 60 seconds as set in default 3 The number of times a TIMED QUEUE will occur is programmable from 1 7 ...

Page 1151: ...IMED REMINDER cancellation code or depress the TIMED REMINDER key and depress 3 Receive Service Set Tone 4 Restore the handset SERVICE CONDITIONS l The time is entered on a 24 hour basis in 1 minute increments 2 A maximum of 32 stations can set the same reminder time When the number of settings exceeds 32 the excess stations will automatically be set to 5 minutes prior to the time set at the other...

Page 1152: ...ade to the announcement card Secondary station users cannot be connected to the beginning of the message 8 The number of TIMED REMINDER attempts is programmable in system data from 1 to 5 times when the called station does not answer 9 If the station does not answer is busy in LINE LOCKOUT or ringing recalling is initiated 1 minute later When each call results in failure it is printed out at the p...

Page 1153: ...ce this feature is programmed into system data SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Restriction may be programmed to give a station user busy signal or to divert him her to the Attendant Console 2 This feature may be applied to all types of C O trunks provided the same restrictions apply to all trunks of the same type 3 This feature is applied to individual stations on a route restriction basis 4 TOLL DENIAL TOLL...

Page 1154: ...RAL DESCRIPTION A maximum of 18 digits can be assigned for each trunk access code If the station user dials more dig its than pre determined number this service feature will deny the call STATION APPLICATION All stations OPERATING PROCEDURE No manual operation is required SERVICE CONDITIONS None ...

Page 1155: ...returned to the calling party TOLL DENIAL If desired the calling party can be routed to the Attendant Console TOLL DIVERSION Either TOLL DENIAL or TOLL DIVERSION is set on a per system basis 4 The PASSING DIAL TONE feature does not override the TOLL RESTRICTION feature 5 OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUEING provides queueing on selected outgoing trunk groups which are busy when dialed The station user goes on ...

Page 1156: ...l the specified TAS access code or depress the specified TAS key if provided on Dterm 4 Connection to the incoming call is completed SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 TAS indication will be activated for the following incoming calls Exchange Line Calls Listed Directory Number LDN calls Tie Line Calls available only for operator calls 2 TAS indicator can be provided on a per tenant basis and there can only be o...

Page 1157: ...following attendant seeking calls cannot be answered by the TAS feature Attendant intercept calls Hot Line calls Attendant transfer calls Operator calls 9 Incoming calls remain in the TAS queue until answered from a station or until abandoned by the far end 10 TAS will default if translations are not provided in the system for a night connection station If TAS is not equipped intercept treatment i...

Page 1158: ... 1 The Attendant Console must be programmed to have a designated TRUNK GROUP BUSY LED on a function key 2 This feature may be used on trunk groups consisting of either C O Tie or special trunks paging trunks cannot be assigned to TRUNK GROUP BUSY LED 3 Beside Trunk Group Busy LEDs on the Attendant Console trunk busy status can be displayed by the following LEDs a Function key LEDs on Dterm b Exter...

Page 1159: ...an incoming call 1 Depress the ringing line key 2 Lift the handset 3 Answer the incoming call To transfer an incoming call 1 Depress the ringing line key lift the handset and answer the incoming call 2 Depress the Hold key receive dial tone No tone can be selected by system data The line key blinks in red 3 Dial the target station number for transferring the call by voice call or by ringing 4 Rest...

Page 1160: ...LLING SYSTEM and SPEED CALLING STATION cannot be used c ACCOUNT CODE and or AUTHORIZATION CODE cannot be dialled 3 The LED associated with the line key will be lit red when the trunk is busy 4 Trunks assigned as TRUNK LINE APPEARANCE Dterm can also be assigned to ring at ATTEND ANT CONSOLE SMART CONSOLE and TRUNK ANSWER FROM ANY STATION 5 When transferring the call of line key it can be specified ...

Page 1161: ...aced on CONSULTATION HOLD ALL CALLS and Special Dial Tone is received 2 Dial the applicable trunk access code 3 Dial the desired number and wait for the party to answer 4 Depress the Conf key A THREE WAY CALLING is now in progress OR Restore the handset The original caller and second party are now connected To establish a TRUNK TO TRUNK CONNECTION from the Attendant Console 1 Attendant answers an ...

Page 1162: ... TO TRUNK CONNECTIONS in the system 8 TRUNK TO TRUNK CONNECTION can be restricted by trunk route to trunk route restriction assignments 9 Recalls will apply to a TRUNK TO TRUNK CONNECTION except where answer supervision is pro vided i e second trunk is a tie line l0 Depressing the Answer key after the second call is established allows the station user to return to the original line resulting in a ...

Page 1163: ...l change to show the selected outgoing trunk number 4 The call is extended by operation of the RELEASE key The Attendant Console will be recalled On answer the Attendant will be connected to the original trunk party If the call is answered the Trunk to Trunk connection is maintained 5 After recall to the Attendant Console the called party may answer which would result in an initial 3 way conversat...

Page 1164: ...on depresses the hookswitch momentarily to establish a THREE WAY CALLING 4 The station causes the trunk to be released by making another Switch Hook Flash The station returns to the original call SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 The third party that can be cancelled by this service is a trunk party seized by an outgoing access from CONSULTATION HOLD ALL CALLS 2 If a BROKER S CALL has been activated by a Dterm...

Page 1165: ...directed to the pilot number are directed to that UCD group 2 Up to 60 stations may be programmed into a single UCD group and up to 512 stations or 256 Dterms can be used per system if expansion memory is used in MP up to 512 Dterms can be used 3 Assignment of UCD groups is made by means of the MAINTENANCE ADMINISTRATION TERMI NAL MAT or CUSTOMER ADMINISTRATION TERMINAL CAT 4 UCD groups consist of...

Page 1166: ...n all the stations and UCD queue are busy CALL BACK is set to the controlling station l0 UCD pilot number can be used as the destination station of DIRECT IN TERMINATION DIT or NIGHT CONNECTION 11 UCD pilot number can be assigned as the destination station of OFF HOOK ALARM PRIORITY CALL and ATTENDANT NIGHT TRANSFER Hunting function supersedes UCD 12 UCD pilot numbers should not be placed in Stati...

Page 1167: ...umber before conversion which received from C O is displayed 21 A DID incoming LDN is converted to a UCD station number by analyzing the upper two four digits of DID incoming LDN A maximum of 10 000 DID incoming LDN can be converted to a maximum to 500 UCD station numbers 22 Priority Queuing is available for incoming trunk calls The queue priorities are assigned on a trunk route basis or per stati...

Page 1168: ...l the stations of each PBX connected using Tie Lines are assigned a Station Number of 3 or 4 digits and the location of the PBX can be identified by the first two digits of the Sta tion Number When this numbering plan is employed a station user from any PBX within the network can call a desired party using a uniform dialing method Office Code and Station Number When this numbering plan is employed...

Page 1169: ...sion 1 0 2 4 UNIFORM NUMBERING PLAN CONT D Figure 1 Numbering Plan Station Numbers 1st 1 2 or 3 digits indicate the Office Location Main office Satellite office Tributary office Public Network Public Network 4XX X 51X X 6XX X 54X X 52X X 53X X ...

Page 1170: ...ONDITIONS 1 One to eight digits can be assigned as Station Number 2 In case of Numbering Plan Station Numbers the location of the PBX is identified by either the first digit first 2 digits or first 3 digits of the Station Number Office code Main office Satellite office Tributary office Public Network Public Network X X X X X X X X X X X X 222 233 244 ...

Page 1171: ...f station numbers of different lengths is allowed as shown below Example 8 222 4XXX 8 222 3XX 8 244 4XXX 8 244 2XX 8 233 3XXX 8 233 4XX 3 In case of Numbering Plan Office Code and Station Numbers within the same PBX a station to sta tion call can be performed only by dialing the Station Number 4 For outgoing calls from a Data Port using a DATA key on a Multiline Terminal a voice call must be estab...

Page 1172: ...ual operation is required SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 For incoming connections digits may be added or deleted according to the route involved A maxi mum of 2 digits may be deleted and a maximum of 2 may be added 2 For outgoing connections digits may be added or deleted according to the route involved A maxi mum of 10 may be added inclusive of the access code 3 Digits may be added or deleted according to ...

Page 1173: ...ANT CAMP ON and unanswered calls a Standard timing 31 2 33 6seconds b Variable timing 2 4 124 8 seconds 2 4 second increments in 2 4 33 6 seconds 9 6 second increments in 38 4 124 8 seconds 2 Elapsed time before CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER for incoming trunk calls or AUTO MATIC CHANGE OF NIGHT SERVICE activation a Standard timing 32 36 seconds b Variable timing 4 120 seconds 4 second increments 3...

Page 1174: ...ll TIMED REMINDER a Standard timing 28 32 seconds b Variable timing 4 32 seconds 4 second increments 12 Single digit dialing timer Timing Start a Standard timing 4 5 seconds b Variable timing 2 8 seconds 1 second increments 13 Maximum UNIFORM CALL DISTRIBUTION UCD call waiting time before answer or abandon ment for PEG COUNT a Standard timing 32 36 seconds b Variable timing 4 120 seconds 4 second ...

Page 1175: ...able timing 4 120 seconds 4 second increments 22 Automatic Recall of Attendant held calls a Standard timing 31 2 33 6 seconds b Variable timing 2 4 124 8 seconds 2 4 second increments in 2 4 33 6 seconds 9 6 second increments in 38 4 124 8 seconds 23 Elapsed Time before CALL FORWARDING DON T ANSWER for internal and assisted calls a Standard timing 32 36seconds b Variable timing 4 120 seconds 4 sec...

Page 1176: ...alling party DESK CONSOLE SMART CONSOLE For called party All Dterms OPERATING PROCEDURE To place a VOICE CALL from an Attendant Console to a Dterm 1 Operator dials desired station number and receives Ring Back Tone 2 Dial 1 a signal tone is transmitted over the called party s speaker If the Attendant uses the SMART CONSOLE the LCD displays 3 Voice announce call 4 Called party can reply hands free ...

Page 1177: ... The called party s extension will ring 3 The handset must be used for reply OR 3 Dial 1 4 Wait for voice page alert tone The calling party s LCD displays VOICE CALL xxxx where xxxx is Called Dterm 5 Voice announce call 6 The called party can reply handsfree When a called Dterm has been set to Voice First 1 Press the station line key and lift the handset 2 Dial station number Wait for voice page a...

Page 1178: ...RE ACCESS CODE must be allowed in system programming 3 VOICE CALL service on station lines can be allowed or denied on a system basis 4 Microphone control MIC key LED must be lit for HANDSFREE ANSWERBACK response 5 Refer also to the DIAL INTERCOM feature 6 VOICE CALL is available only to the My Line of the dialed station 7 VOICE CALL will follow CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS and CALL FORWARDING BUSY L...

Page 1179: ... LINE DON T ANSWER SPLIT CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS BUSY LINE DON T ANSWER DO NOT DISTURB AGENT BUSY OUT UCD Note STATION MESSAGE SCHEDULE DISPLAY CALL BACK Note When Agent Busy Out UCD is set or canceled by the function key of a Dterm the announcement is not provided b A Digital Announcement Trunk DAT circuits of MP card or a 2DAT 4DAT card are required MP card includes two DAT circuits and 2DAT 4...

Page 1180: ...ESSAGE WAITING can be separated from CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS and DO NOT DISTURB In case of a station is set both of MESSAGE WAITING and CALL FORWARDING ALL CALLS or DO NOT DISTURB services the station receives an announcement for the MESSAGE WAITING service d This service is effective on the system wide basis e A station can originate a call while receiving the announcement ...

Page 1181: ...llowing features related to the VMS 1 One touch access to VMS When a station or an Attendant transfers an external call to a destination station and if the destination station is busy or does not answer the station Attendant can transfer the call to a VMS by dialling 9 or by pressing a function key provided for this feature 2 Transferring Camp On call from Attendant to VMS When an Attendant sets C...

Page 1182: ...one touch access from a Single Line Telephone 1 While answering an external call press the FLASH key or momentarily press the hook switch and receive a feature dial tone 2 Dial a desired station number and receive a ringback tone or a busy tone 3 Dial 9 or press a function key assigned for transferring a call to a VMS 4 Restore the handset To transfer a call to a VMS by one touch access from a Dte...

Page 1183: ...INE to the VMS The system sends out a mail box number to the VMS Calling a station which has CALL FORWARDING set to the VMS is automatically answered by the VMS 6 The DTMF signal prepause Inter Digit Pause and DTMF signal width of the station number automat ically sent out to the VMS from the system are as follows a Prepause Variable from 1 sec to 12 sec in 1 second increments b Inter Digit Pause ...

Page 1184: ...sses the VMS directly the calling party hears Busy Tone Station A can set call back to the VMS 10 MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING to VMS When the final destination for any combination of MULTIPLE CALL FORWARDING is the VMS calls can be transferred to the VMS The first forwarded station s number forwarded to the VMS is sent to the VMS For example a call is received by station A which is forwarded to Stati...

Page 1185: ... receive Dial Tone 2 Dial the Voice Message Waiting System record access code 3 Dial the message number 0 9 and receive Service Set Tone for 3 seconds 4 Record the message 5 Restore the handset To check 1 Lift the handset and receive Dial Tone 2 Dial the Voice Message Waiting System replay access code 3 Dial the message number 0 9 and receive Service Set Tone for 3 seconds 4 Listen to the message ...

Page 1186: ...en to the message 4 Depress the Speaker key or restore the handset Voice Message Waiting Individual To set 1 Lift the handset and receive Dial Tone 2 Dial the Voice Message Waiting Individual set access code and receive Special Dial Tone 3 Dial the desired station number and receive Service Set Tone for 3 seconds 4 Record the message 5 Restore the handset To cancel 1 Lift the handset and receive D...

Page 1187: ...erm 1 Depress the Speaker key or lift the handset and receive Dial Tone 2 Depress the MSG key 3 Listen to the message 4 Depress the Speaker key or restore the handset SERVICE CONDITIONS 1 Message Waiting status is displayed by the Message Waiting lamp on Single Line Telephones or Dterm 2 The LC card is required to provide Single Line Telephones with the Message Waiting function Single Line Telepho...

Page 1188: ...ing System Individual can be automatically cleared by retrieving a message from a set station 8 For the Voice Message Waiting System more than one connection can be made to a Digital Announcement Trunk Secondary connections can be made in the middle of a message For the Voice Message Waiting Individual only one station can be connected to each Digital Announcement Trunk Card at a time 9 Any operat...

Page 1189: ...2 Depress the UP key to increase the volume or the DOWN key to decrease the volume 3 Depress the Feature key or lift the handset and restore the handset to return to idle OR 1 When in a ringing state depress the UP key to increase the volume or the DOWN key to decrease the volume C O Transmission Level 1 While connected to a trunk depress the Feature key followed by 2 or 4 Feature key 2 5 dB recei...

Page 1190: ...R PAGE is in progress the original call is put on hold A holding tone is not transmitted to the other party of the original call 2 The called station can then privately talk to the calling station the secretary 3 The called station re presses the Answer key or presses the hook switch 4 The called station will return to the original call while the calling station is put on hold If the called statio...

Page 1191: ... line or trunk line appearance 6 WHISPER PAGE can not be set to a call in progress with the sub line to which Camp On has been set 7 When station C interrupts the conversation Station A and Station Trunk B Station C can hear Station A but can not hear Station Trunk B And Station C can talk with only Station A Station Trunk B can not hear the conversation Station A and Station C ...

Page 1192: ...ND 91285 001 E DECEMBER 1999 Page 410 Revision 1 0 THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY ...

Page 1193: ...l setup functions and to program One Touch Speed Dial Feature Keys Hold HOLD To place an internal or external call on hold Recall LNR SPD To terminate established call and re seize internal dial tone Redial RECALL To activate Last Number Call and Speed Calling Speaker SPKR To control the built in speaker which can be used for Hands Free dialing monitoring Transfer TRF To transfer established calls...

Page 1194: ...ding Busy Line Calling station CF BUSY 3000 FDB 3000 Call was forwarded to station 3000 Call Forwarding Busy Line Called station CF BUSY 3020 3010 FDB 3020 3010 Station 3010 was forwarded from sta tion 3020 Call Forwarding No Answer Calling station CF NANS 3000 FDN 3000 Call was forwarded to station 3000 Call Forwarding No Answer Called station CF NANS 3020 3010 FDN 3020 3010 Station 3010 was forw...

Page 1195: ...3000 Intercom Calling and called party ICM 3000 ICM 3000 Call on intercom Internal Zone Paging with Meet Me Originator PAGING PAGING Message Reminder MESSAGE 3000 MSG 3000 Confirmation of message reminder Off hook Alarm Transferred destination OFF HOOK ALM 3000 OFA 3000 Call was forwarded from station 3000 by Off hook alarm Room Cutoff Transferred destination RCO 3000 RCO 3000 Call was forwarded f...

Page 1196: ...t digit 2nd digit 3rd digit 4th digit registered ID Pattern Table 0 1 8 9 0 2 9 0 1 8 9 0 1 9 1000 1001 1009 1010 1011 1019 0 1 9 0 1 9 1090 1091 1099 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 Purpose Trunk Restriction Class Service Restriction Class A Service Restriction Class B Service Restriction Class C Limitations The maximum number of ID Code Development Tables in the system Wit...

Page 1197: ......

Page 1198: ......

Page 1199: ...ND 91285 002 E ISSUE 1 Model 100MX HOSPITALITY FEATURES AND SPECIFICATIONS OCTOBER 1999 ...

Page 1200: ...his document for use by its employees and NEC subsidiary The information contained herein is the property of NEC Corporation and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval from NEC Corporation Copyright 1999 NEC Corporation 7 1 Shiba 5 chome Minato ku Tokyo 108 8001 Japan Printed in Japan NEC NEAX and Dterm are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation ...

Search results

Summary of Contents for NEAX 2000

Reviews:

Related manuals for NEAX 2000

Brands by name

Popular brands

NEC NEAX 2000, Programming Manual

Search results

Summary of Contents for NEAX 2000

Reviews:

Related manuals for NEAX 2000

Brands by name

Popular brands